User Guide

You should carefully read the following terms with any term or condition of the Agreement. You agree
and conditions before opening this package. upon such termination to destroy the Program together
Opening this package indicates your with all copies, modifications and merged portions in any
acceptance of these terms and conditions. If form.
Parr
you do not agree with them, you should LIMITS
promptly return the package unopenedto the EXCEPT AS STATED BELOWIN THIS SECTION THIS
person from whom you purchased it within PROGRAM IS PROVIDED “AS IS” WITHOUT WAR-
fifteen days from the date of purchase and RANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IN-
your moneywill be refunded to you bythat PLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE iM-
PLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
person. If the person from whom you FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE EN-
purchased this package fails to refund your TIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE
money, contact TSL immediately at the OF THE PROGRAMIS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PRO-
addressset out below. GRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU (AND NOT TSL OR
AN AUTHORIZED DEALER) ASSUME THE ENTIRE
TSL provides computer software contained on COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR
the medium in this package (the “Program”), and CORRECTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE
licenses its use. You assume responsibility for EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE
the selection of the Program to achieve your ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLYTO YOU. THIS
WARRANTYGIVES SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND
intended results, and for the installation, use and YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY
results obtained from the Program. FROM STATE TO STATE.
TSL does not warrant that the functions contained in
the Program will meet your requirements or that the
. You are granted a personal, non-transferable and operation of the Program will be uninterrupted or error
non-exclusive license to use the Program under ree.
the terms stated in this Agreement. Title and TSL does warrant, as the only warranty provided to
ownership of the Program and documentation you, that the diskette(s} on which the program is fur-
remain in TSL; nished, will be free from defects in materials and work-
b. the Program maybe used by you, your employ- manship under normal use for a period of ninety (90)
ees, or your agents only on a single computer; or, days from the date of delivery to you as evidenced by a
in a TSL-approved computer network whereall of copy of your receipt.
the Program’s data resides at one disk file server;
c. you and your employees and agents are required
to protect the confidentiality of the Program. You TSL’s entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be:
maynotdistribute or otherwise make the Program 4. the replacement of any diskette not meeting TSL’s
or documentation available to any third party; “Limited Warranty” and whichis returned to TSL or
d. you may not copy or reproduce the Program or an authorized TSL dealer with a copy of your
documentation for any purpose, except you may receipt, or
copy the Program into machine readable or printed 2. if TSL or the dealer is unable to deliver a replace-
form for backup purposes in supportof your use of mentdiskette which is free of defects in materials
the Program. (Anyportion of this Program merged or workmanship, you may terminate this Agree-
into or used in conjunction with another program ment by returning the Program and your money
will continue to be the property of TSL and subject will be refunded to you by the dealer from whom
to the terms and conditions of this Agreement); you purchased the Program.
e@. you may not assign or transfer this Program or this IN NO EVENT WILL TSL BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY
license to any other person without the express DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST
prior consent of TSL; SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUEN-
f. you acknowledge that you are receiving only a TIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR IN-
limited license to use the program and the related ABILITY TO USE SUCH PROGRAM EVEN IF TSL OR
documentation, You acknowledge that TSL retains AN AUTHORIZED TSL DEALER HAS BEEN ADVISED
title to the Program and documentation. You ac- OF THE POSSIBILITY. OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR FOR
knowledge that TSL has a valuable proprietary ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY.
interest in the Program and documentation; and SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION
g. you may use the Program in a multiuser arrange- OR EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR
mentonlyif you license the multiuser versions of CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMI-
the Program and pay the applicable licence fee TATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
based on the number of users on the system.
You must reproduce and inciude the copyright no-
tice on any copy, modification or portion merged You may not sublicense, assign or transfer the license
into another program. You may modify the Program or the Program except as expressly provided in this
for your ownuse, entirely at your ownrisk, provided Agreement. Any attempt otherwise to sublicense, assign
that the Program is used as specified in Section (b) or transfer any of the rights, duties or obligations hereun-
of this Agreement. der is void.
YOU MAY NOT USE, MODIFY, OR TRANSFER THE This Agreement will be governed by the laws of the
PROGRAM, OR ANY COPY, MODIFICATION OR State of Georgia.
MERGED PORTION, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, EX- Should you have any questions concerning this
cers AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR IN THIS LI- Agreement, you may contact TSL by writing to The
E. Software Link, Incorporated, 3577 Parkway Lane,
IF YOU TRANSFER POSSESSION OF ANY COPY, Norcross, Georgia 30092, USA.
MODIFICATION OR MERGED PORTION OF THE YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THATYOU HAVE READ THIS
PROGRAM TO ANOTHER PARTY, YOUR LICENSE iS AGREEMENT, UNDERSTAND IT AND AGREE TO BE
AUTOMATICALLY TERMINATED. BOUND BY iTS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. YOU FUR-
THER AGREE THATIT IS THE COMPLETE AND EX-
CLUSIVE STATEMENT OF THE AGREEMENT BE-
The license is effective until terminated. You may termi- TWEEN YOU AND TSL AND ITS DEALER (“US”)
nate it at any other time by destroying the Program WHICH SUPERSEDES ANY PROPOSAL OR PRIOR
togetherwith all copies, modifications and merged por- AGREEMENT, ORAL OR WRITTEN, AND ANY OTHER
tion in any form. It will also terminate upon conditions set COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN US RELATING TO THE
forth elsewhere in the Agreementor if you fail to comply SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS AGREEMENT.
Trademark Netic 2

ALL CHARGECARD is a trademark of All Computers, Inc.

AT-GIZMOis a trademark of The Software Link, Inc.

CROSSTALKis a registered trademark of Digital Communications

Associates.

Disk Manageris a registered trademark of Ontrack Computer

Systems, Ine.

HAYESis a registered trademark of HAYES Microcomputer

Products, Inc.

IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines

Corporation.

Intel is a registered treidemarkof Intel.Corporation.

Lotus and 1-2-3 are re¢zistered trademarks of Lotus Development

Corporation.

Maxpeedis a trademat’k of Maxpeed Corporation

Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

MS-DOSis a trademark of Microsoft. Corporation.

PC-DOSis a trademar k of International Business Machines

Corporation.

PC-EmuLink is a tradesmark of The Software Link, Inc.

PC-MOSis a trademark of The Software Link, Inc.

ProComm is a trademark of PIL Software Systems.

WYSE-60is a trademark of Wyse Technology

Copyright Notice

Copyright 1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991 The Software Link, Inc. All “
rights reserved worldwide, No part of this publication may be
reproduced without the express written permission of The Software
Link,Inc.

Notice

This information package contains TSL policies, procedures,

programs andpricing that are in effect at the time of publication.
TSL reserves the right to change or cancel any policy, procedure, pro-
gram or price at any time without notice.

In no event will TSL be liable to you for any damage, including any
lost profits, lost savings or other incidental or consequential damages
arising out of the use or inability to use any of the information
provided in this package.
Thou Shalt Not Dupe

Hither Way Its Wrong

People who would never walk into a store and shoplift a software
product think nothing of making several copies of the same software.
The results are the same. Theact is just as wrong.

When it comes to unauthorized duplication of software, many people

do not realize the costly impact on the software developer and the cus-
tomer community. The relationship between customer and developer
in a software transaction is one.of mutual trust. The customer trusts
that the developer hasproduced a product that will deliver the
desired result, performs according to specifications, and is properly
documented and supported. The developer trusts that the cus-
tomer will make use of only those copies for which he has pur-
chased.a license, even though making additional, unauthorized
copies is relatively easy.

Unauthorized duplication and use of software violates the U.S.

Copyright Law, and unfairly deprives software developers of revenue
they are entitled to receive for their work.

Software developers find that thousandsofillegal copies have been

made by customers whoeither innocently believe they are doing noth-
ing wrong or simply choose to ignore the law.

The Law is Clear

Reproducing computer software without authorization vio-

lates the U.S. Copyright Law.It is a Federal offense. The
moneypaid for a software product represents a license fee for
the use of one copy. It does not represent an authorization to
copy. Civil damagesfor unauthorized software copying can be
as much as $50,000 or more and criminal penalties include
fines and imprisonment. Bills have been introduced in Con-
gress to strengthen the law and increase penalties.
NMoyths and Facts of Sofiware

Let’s start by dispelling some myths with a few facts.

First, software developers do not condone unauthorized copying in

order to gain market penetration.

Second, the price of software does not make unauthorized copying jus-
tifiable. The cost of a software product to a consumer represents only
a small fraction of the publisher’s marketing and developingcosts.

Third, although thecost of softlifting is borne initially by the software

developer,it is paid for ultimately by legitimate users.

What It Means to You

It’s obvious that legitimate software users are paying for theft along
with software developers. It’s obvious, too, that no one is going to put
up with it for long.

Think twice before you ask someoneto give you an illegal copy of
their software. Think three times before you offer to do it for someone
else. Softlifting or software piracy is not only a crime;it’s simply
wrong.

Where to Get More Information

ADAPSO represents more than 750 corporate membersthat provide

a wide spectrum of computer services and software including: micro,
mini and mainframe software products; professional software ser-
vices; batch and remote processing services; integrated
hardware/software systems; education and training; and consulting.

For further information or questions on software protection, contact

ADAPSOat Suite 300, 1300 North 17th Street, Arlington, VA 22209;
or phone (708) 522-5055.

Copyright by ADAPSO, 1984. Permission to reproducethis article is

granted by ADAPSO.
 }

[OW TO USE THIS MANUAL

i

This manualis provided as a guide for anyone who uses PC-MOS,

You will find that MOS provides many options to let you customize
the operation of your computer, and to maintain your information.
Thefollowing is a brief summary of the information in this manual,
and howit is organized.

CHAPTER 1: OVERVIEW- This chapter is an introduction to MOS.

It explainsthefiles provided with MOS, somespecial terms and how
they are used, who the system administrator is and the respon-
sibilities of that person, and how to makeentries on the command
line. Reading this chapter will give you a better understanding of
MOS, andthe rest of the information in this manual.

CHAPTER2: CONFIGURATION- The command statements you

may enter in the CONFIG.SYSfile to define your environmentare ex-
plained in this chapter. Following the commandsis an explanation of
the standard and optional device drivers provided with MOS.

CHAPTER3: FILES & DIRECTORIES- MOSusesdifferent types

of files to execute commandsandstore information. This chapter ex-
plains how MOS treatsfiles, and the directory structure that lets you
organize and groupfiles.

CHAPTER 4: GENERAL COMMANDS- The types of MOS com-

mands and the conventions used to present them are explained in
this chapter. The general processing commands in MOSare then ex-
plained in alphabetical order. Commandsthat have a specific func-
tion and require more detail are explained in the other chapters.

CHAPTER5: MULTI-TASKING/USER- You will find all the

detailed information to set up a multi-tasking and/or multi-user sys-
tem with MOSin this chapter.

MOS-DIOL i
CHAPTER6: BATCH FILES- The batch file commands that MOS
recognizes as a job control "language" are explained in this chapter.
Batch files are used to automate a sequence of commands and —,
programs. This chapter provides many examples to help you write
your own batchfiles.

CHAPTER 7: MOS EDITOR- The MOS Editor provides two modes

of editing, a Command mode and a Visual mode. The modesof editing
a file, editing commands and editing keys are explained in this chap-
ter.

CHAPTER8: DEBUG - MOSprovides a .DEBUGutility that lets

you make changes to existing programs and check for problems
during execution. The use of DEBUGis explained in this chapter,
along with the many commandsthat are available when .DEBUGis
active. The use of DEBUG should normally be reserved to those with
programming experience.

CHAPTER9: SECURITY - The instructions and commandsto in-

itiate MOS security with security classes, User ID’s and passwords a
are explained in this chapter, along with the effect security will have
on the processing offiles, directories. and partitions on your computer.

CHAPTER 10: PRINT SPOOLER- If you have multiple users or

multiple printers, you may want to use the MOS Print Spooler to.con-
trol print operations. The commandsto set up and use the Print
Spooler are explained in this chapter.

APPENDIX A: WARNING AND ERROR MESSAGES - This ap-

pendix contains the warning and error messages issued by MOS, and
what causes the warning or error to occur.

APPENDIX B: NETBIOS EMULATION- MOSprovides NETBIOS

emulation for intertask communication between applications. This
chapter explains how to set up MOS to use NETBIOS emulation.

APPENDIX C: CUSTOMIZING THE HELP FACILITY - You may ~~

change or add to the text of the MOS Help Facility, which is the text
that displays for the .HELP command. The instructions to modify the
help facility are explained in this appendix.

i MOS-DLSL
GLOSSARY- This section contains an explanation of the terms used
in this manual, listed in alphabetical order.

INDEX - An indexis provided at the end of this manualto help you

easily reference specific information.

README - There may be new features or commands in MOSthat

are not documentedinthis manual. Any new information is con-
tained in the READMEfile provided with MOS. To checkthisfile for
the latest information,place your MOSdiskette in drive A-and type
the following command, including the periods:

TYPE A:‘README | MORE

This will displays the contents of the file on your video screen, one
page at a time. Checkingthisfile will ensure that you are awareofall
features and commands in MOS,

MOS-DI91 iti
 This page intentionally left blank.

iv MOS-DI9L
ao
TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1; OVERVIEW

Introduction 2... oe 1-2

Special MOS Features... 2... 2... 0 ee eee ee es 1-3
Optimization of Memory Managed Environments........ 1-4
Support for non-Memory Managed Environments........ 1-5
Video Handling ...... 0... eee et eee et ee ns 1-6
VIDPATCH.COM .. 0... cee ee te eee ns 1-6
MOS Files ...... ee ee ee ee ee 1-8
Understanding Terms in MOS ............002004 1-10
The System Administrator ..... 0.6. pee eee ee ee 1-12
Command Line Editing .. 1... ee en 1-13
Command Reeall Buffer... . 1... ee ee 1-13
Command Line Control Keys .........00000 502 e ae 1-14

VHAPTER 2: CONFIGURATION

Introduction . 0... 2-2

Creating a CONFIG.SYS File. . 2... 0. ee ee ee 2-2
Configuration Command Statements .........+0000% 2-3
BOBT 2 es 2-4
CACHE 2... 0 6c ee es
COUNTRY... 1. ee ee ee es 2-15
DESNOW .. 0... ee ee ee 2-16
DEVICE & LDEVICE........6. 0... eet ene 2-17
FREEMEM ........ 00 eee eee ee eens 2-19
MEMDEV ...... 2... eee et es 2 - 22
SHELL... ee 2-26

MOS-DL9L
 SLICE «0. ee ee es 2-27
SMPSIZE 2... kee ee 2-28
USERFILE 2... ee ee 2-30 os,

VTYPE . es 2-81
Device Names . 1... ee ee ee 2-37
Special MOS Device Drivers 2.0.00. cee ee es 2-38
SEMS.SYS 2... ee 2-38
SMOUSESSYS 20 2-40
$PIPE.SYS 0... te es 2-42
$RAMDISK.SYS «2... ee ee 2-44
$SERIAL.SYS 0... et es 2 - 46

CHAPTER 3: PILES AND DIRECTORIES

Introduction . 6. we ee te 3-2
Naming Files 2... ec ee ee 3-2
File Extensions .. 1... ee te ee 3-3
Displaying File Names .. 2... 2 ee ee ee 3-3
File Characteristics . 2... ee ee 3-4
File Sizes 6. ee ee 3-4
Updated Date and Time ........... 000+ eee 3-4
File Attributes... 0. es 3-4
Classand UserID... 2... ee et 3-5
Creation Date and Time ..... 0... 0... 0+ eee 3-5
File Sharing ©. 6. ee eee 3-5
Wildcard Characters 2... 0... ee ee 3-5
File Maintenance .. 1... 6. ee ee ee ee 3-7
Directories 2... 3-8
Directory Structure . 0... ee 3-9
Directory Names... ee 3-10
Organizing Directories ... 1... ee te ee 3-11
Directory Maintenance ....... ee ee ee 3-11
Displaying a Directory . 2... 6 ow 3-13
Displaying a Directory Structure... 2... 6. ee 3-14

vi MOS-DLOL
CHAPTER 4: GENERAL COMMANDS

Introduction . 0... ee ee et te ee 4-3

Intrinsic and Extrinsic Commands ..........0.00005 4-3
Extrinsic MOS Commands ....-.. 00 epee ear eae 4-4
Intrinsic MOS Commands ........ 0000 eee eee A-5
Invoking Commands .. 1... ee ee ee 4-6
Understanding Command Conventions ..........005% 4-7
Input/Output Redirection... 1... eee sl 4-9
General Commands ...... 2.0... cee eee ee ee 4-11
“ADDDEV «6. ee es 4-11
ALIAS 20 ee ee 4-18
“BREAK . ww i 4-16
CD... eee ee 4-17
CLS ee ee 4-19
-COMMAND... 2... ee ee ee 4-20
-COMPFILE . 1. we ee ee ee es 4-22
COPY 2. ee 4-25
DATE 2 oe ee 4-32
DIR 2. ee 4 - 33
-DDIRMAP 1.0. ce 4 - 36
-DISKCOPY . 0... ce ee 4 - 38
SDISKID 2... es 4-40
-ENVSIZE «00. ee ee 4-42
“ERASE «ww we ee ee 4-42
-EXCEPT 2.1.1. we ee es 4-45
“EXPORT . 1.1... ee es 4-49
FILEMODE...... 0... ee es 4-538
FORMAT . 1... ee ee ee ee 4-55
HELP .. 1... ee es 4-58
IMPORT . 2... ee ee es 4-59
MD 2 ow es 4-61
MORE 1. wk ns 4-63
MSORT . 2... ce es 4-64

MOs-DL91
 ONLY 20 ee eee 4 - 68
PATH 26 4-71
PROMPT .. 1. ee ee 4-73
RD. 4-76
REL ow 4-77
REMDEV .. 0. 1 ee ee 4-78
RENAME .. 1. ee ee ee 4-79
SEARCH 2... ee ee ee 4 - 82
SET 20. es 4-84
TIME ow ee ee 4-86
TYPE 2. ee ee ee 4-88
VERIFY 26 ee ee 4-90
LWVER 20 es 4-93

CHAPTER 5: MULTI-TASKING/MOLTLUSER

Multi-Tasking Concepts... 1... 6 ee ee ee 5-4

Multi-Tasking Processing... 16... eee ee ee es 5-7
Multi-User Concepts 2.0... 0. eee tt ee es 5-7
Multi-User Processing... 1... ee ee 5-8
Time Sharing . 1... ee 5-8
Rebooting Tasks... 1... ee ee eee ee es 5-9
Multi-Tasking and Multi-User Commands .......... 5-10
ADDTASK 2... 5-11
-RREMTASK «0 ee ee ee 5-18
Partition Access . 2. 0. ee 5-19
Partition Access Keys... 1... 0. ee ee ee 5-19
SWITCH Command ......... 0.05028 eae 5 - 20
Turning Partition Access On and Off ........... 5 - 20
MOS Utility Functions 2... 6... ee ee ee eee 5 - 20
The .MOS Utility Commands ...... 0... . 0-00 ea 5-21
MOS MAP ..... 2... ee ee ee 5 - 22
MOS DIS 2... be ee he 5 - 23
“MOS NODIS .. 0. ce ee ee 5 - 23

viil MOS-DiS1
 MOS USEIRQ .......-. 00 ee eee eee 5-23
-MOS FREEIRQ@.. 2... 2. ee ee ee 5 - 26
MOS IRQ 2... ee 5-27
«MOS WAIT . 0... ee ee 5 - 28
“MOS VMODE... 1. 2. ee ee ee ee 5 - 29
-MOS SERINIT ... 2... 00... ee ee ee es 5 - 80
-MOS ROUTE (COMn) .......... 2.00002 eee 5-31
-MOS ROUTE (LPTn). 2... ee ee 5-31
-MOS ROUTE (TERM) ....... 2... 0 008 eee 5 - 32
“MOS ROUTE (NOTERM) ........0.. 054 ee ee 5 - 32
“MOS RESIZE... 1. te 5 - 32
“MOS INFO 1... ee ee es 5 - 33
‘MOS DSPORT .. 1... 0... eee eee eee es 5 - 35
“MOS MOUSE... 2... 0. ee ee es 5 - 36
sMOS KEYB .. 2... we 5 - 38
Foreign Keyboard Drivers ......... 002 eee 5 - 39
»MOS FILES... 0 ee 5-40
*-MOS HOLD LPTn ....,...0 0.05. eee eee 5 - 40
MOS TSR... ee ee te 5-41
‘MOS ANSI .. 2... ee 5 - 42
sMOS DOSVER ... 2... 0. ee et te ees 5-42
The .MOSADM Utility Command ............... 5 - 48
-MOSADM SLICE... 6.0. cee ee es 5-44
-MOSADM PRI .. 0. ce es 5-45
-MOSADM CACHE ......... 0000 eee ewes 5 - 46
.MOSADM SWITCH ... 1.2... 0. ee ee en 5 - 46
-MOSADM TMFACTOR ... 2... 0.00 ee eens 5 - 46
-MOSADM HOLD LPTn ... 6... eee ee ee 5-47
-MOSADM VIRQ .. 1... oe ee es 5-48
-MOSADM RESET ...... 2.0.02 eee ee ees 5-48
-MOSADM TIME .. 1... ee ee 5 - 49
-MOSADM EMSLIMIT ..........0 0008 8 ee ess 5-49
Connecting Terminals and Workstations ........... 5 - 52
Terminals vs Workstations .......6.-0 0 ee eas 5 - 52
Serial Ports 2... ee 5-53
Cable Connections .... 0... ee ee 5-538
Modem Cable Connections .........00 06+ wee 5-54

MOS-D191 ix
Terminal and Workstation Device Drivers. ........63 5-55
Terminal Display Differences... 0... ee 5-57
Escape Sequences for Non-PC Type Terminals ........ 5 - 58
Escape Sequence Chart... 0.5... eee ee ee ees 5-61
JKKEYMAP .. 1... ee we en 5 - 62
Modems .. 1 wee ee 5 - 64
MODEM.COM. 1.1... 60. ee ee es 5 - 64
Defining Modem Types ...........200 0 ee ee 5 - 65
SunRiver Terminal Driver .. 1... 0.000. 0c e pues 5 - 66
MOS System Monitor .. 2... ee ee ee en 5-68

CHAPTER 6: BATCH FILES

Introduction . 6... ek a 6-2

Batch File Features... 0. 0. ee we ee 6-2
Creating Batch Files .. 1... eee ee tw ee ne 6-3
Batch FileCommands.... 0... 6 eee eee ee ee 6-3
tABORT 20 ww ce ee ee es 6-4
MAUTOCD 20 ee es 6-5
‘BATECHO 2... ee ee 6-6
sCALI/,RETURN 2.0. 0 ee ee 6-7
“ECHO 2... ee ee 6-9
FLUSH . 20. ee et ee ee 6-10
FFORINDO . 1... 6-11
GOTO 2 ew ee 6-13
AR Lc es 6-14
-INSERT . 0. wc ce ee ee ee ee 6-17
KEY 20 ee ee 6-18
“NEXT 2. ee ee ee ee ee 6-21
‘PAUSE 2.00. ee ee 6 - 22
“PREM... es 6 - 23
STOP 2... te ee eee 6 - 24
TEXT/ENDTEXT ........ 24 eee eee eas 6 25

x MOS-DI91
 2),

Batch File Processing .. 1... eee te ee 6 - 29

Automated Batch Files .......... 00-004 ee ee 6 - 29
Nested Batch Files ... 2... ...0 2.000004 ee ee 6 - 33
Replaceable Operand Files ............00004 6 - 34
Compatibility 2... ee ee ee 6 - 36

CHAPTER. 7: MOS EDITOR - ED

Introduction . 6... ee ee 7-2

Invoking the Editor .. 1... ee ee ee 7-2
Editing in the Command Mode ........... 0.005005 7-3
Command Mode Commands ...........6 000 en ee 7-5
A-ASSIGN 2... 7-6
C-COPY 2... ee 7-7
D-DELETE...... 0.0... eee ee ee 7-8
E-END . 0... ee es 7-9
F-FILENAME .......0. 000 cee eee eee eee 7-10
H-HELP 2... . ee et 7-11
T-INSERT ....... 0002.02 eee eee ee een 7-12
L-LIST 2... ee ee ee 7-18
M-MOVE ... 2. ee 7-14
P-PRINT .. 0... ee es 7-15
Q-QUIT. 2 2. ee ee es 7-16
R-REPLACE ..... 2. ee ee ee ee 7-17
S-SEARCH .. 2... 2.0. cee ee ee 7-18
V-VISUAL MODE ............ 00024 ene 7-19
W-WRITE 1.1... ee 7-20
X - EXECUTE MACRO ....,.........220005 7-21
Editing in Visual Mode ... 1... 1. ee ee ee 7-22
Visual Mode Editing Keys ........46 00. . 6 ee eee 7-24
Using Macros .. 1... ee ee 7-26

MOS-DI91 xi
CHAPTER. 8: DEBUG

Introduction . 6... ee 8-3

-DEBUG Break points... ee ee ee 8-4
Entering .DEBUG Commands ...............0.04 8-4
-DEBUG Commands ... 0... 2.000. eee eee ene 8-6
A-ASSEMBLE .... 0.0.0. 00. eee ee eee es 8-7
AU - ASSEMBLE -UNASSEMBLE ...........25 8-9
BC - CLEAR BREAKPOINT .........8 0000065 8-10
BD - BREAKPOINT DISABLE... .........0454 8-11
BE - BREAKPOINT ENABLE ..........0.200. 8-12
BL- BREAKPOINT LIST 2.6... ee ee ee 8-18
BS - BREAKPOINT SET .. 0.0.0.0... 0840850 8-14
C-COMPARE. 2... 8-15
C? - DEBUG CONFIGURATION ......28..0854. 8-16
CO-CHANGE CONSOLE ........0 000. rues 8-17
D-DUMP .. 1... 8-18
E-ENTER «2.0. 8-19
F-FILL 2... ee ee ee 8-21
G-GO Le ee 8 23
H-HEX 2. ee ee 8 - 24
I-INPUT oe 8-25
L-LIST 2. ee eee 8 - 26
M-MOVE 1... 6 ee ee 8-27
N-NAME 1... 0... ee eee ee ee es 8 28
O-OUTPUT. 2. ee ee 8 - 29
P-PROCEED .... 2.00... 002. eee ee eee 8 - 30
Q-QUIT. 2... 8-31
R-REGISTER 1.0.2... 0.0.0 ce eee eee es 8-32
S-SEARCH .. 1... 0.0... ee eee 8-33
T-TRACE 2... ee 8-35
U-UNASSEMBLE .... 0... eee ee 8 - 36
V-VERIFY 2... tt es 8-37
W-WRITH 2... ee 8 - 38

“il MOS-D191
 7-COPROCESSOR.. 1.1... eee eee ee ee 8 - 40
\-SWAP SCREEN .......0.. 00000 e eae 8-41
o_, !-SHELL 2... ee ee ees 8-42
".PAUSE 2.0.0. ee ee ee es 8-438
:-DELAY 2.0. ee es 8-44
3*-REMARK . 2... 000. 0c eee tee ee eens 8-45
?-HELP.. 1... es 8 - 46
Using .DEBUG Commands ..... 2.0. cee ee ee ne 8-47

CHAPTER 9: SECURITY

Introduction ..... rere ee 9-2

How Security Works... 1... ce es 9-2
Initiating User Security... 0. ee ee ee ee ee 9-3
Entering User Security Records ........0.050 5040s 9-4
Security Commands ........... 2.0002 ee ee eens 9-6
CLASS 2. 9-7
‘SIGNOFF 2... ee 9-9
SSIGNON 2... ee 9-10
o™ Assigning Security to YourItems............0004 9-11
Partition Level Security .........0 2.02.00 eae 9-12
Directory Level Security .......... 2.00005 ee 9-15
File Level Security .. 0.2.0.0... eee ee ee es 9-17
MOSFile Level Security and VERIFY Command .. 9-18
Precautions for Security Users ..........50020004 9-19
Advanced Security. 2 0. ee ee 9-19
The MOS Encryption Key .............004.4 9-20
The Master Password Encryption Key........... 9 - 20
Changing the Master Password ..........0.004 9-22

eo

MOS-DLOl xii
CHAPTER 10: PRINT SPOOLER

Introduction 2.6. 10-2

Print FileNames .. 1.0... . 0.00. eee eee 10-2
Print File Extensions .............050000 000 10-4
Disposition. 6. 0 ee 10-4
Priority 20. ee es 10-5
Print Class... 0. ee 10-5
MOS HOLD LPTn Commands .........0. 500004 10-6
PRINT.CTL File... oe ee ee 10-6
Print Spooler Commands ... 1... eee et et 10-7
PRINT. 0 10-8
SPOOL «6. ee es 10-11
Initiating the Print Spooler .......0... 0000 eee 10-15
Automating the Print Spooler .......0...00.00005 10-16
The Print Spooler Menus ... 0... 0. ee ee ee 10-17
Print Processor Menu... . 2... ee ee es 10-17
Spooler Menu . 1... 1 0. es 10-19
Multiple Printer Environments... . 2.6.2 eee ee 10 - 22
Print Spooler Example Batch Files... 0... 00 0. eae 10 - 22
Batch Files for Multiple Users ... 1.6... 2 eee 10 - 22
Batch Files for Multiple Printers... .....0..444. 10 - 23

APPENDIX A: WARNING AND ERROR MESSAGES ...A-1

APPENDIX B: NETBIOS EMULATION .......6004 B-1

APPENDIX C: COSTOMIAZINGTHE HELP FACILITY ..C-1

GLOSSARY 2. ee ee G-1

TINDER ce cc we ee I-1

RLY MOS-DLO1
 CHAPTER 1:
OVERVIEW

Introduction 2... 0. ce ee eee es 1-2

Special MOS Features .. 0... ce ee es 1-3

Optimization of Memory Managed Environments ....41-4

Support for Non-Memory Managed Environments .... 1-5

Video Handling .. 1... 0. cee ee es 1-6

VIDPATCH.COM .. 0... ee ee es 1-6

MOS Files... ee eee 1-8

Understanding Termsin MOS .........40.4pe 1-10

The System Administrator ......0..0. 0050s 1-12

Command Line Editing .....0.0. 00 ee ee ee ene 1-13

Command Recall Buffer .........0.. 000 uae 1-13

Command Line Control Keys .... 0... .0540 5. ee es 1-14

MOS-D191 L-i
Overview

Introduction

PC-MOSis an advanced operating system designed to provide Multi-

Tasking and Multi-User capability to personal computers. MOS con-
trols requests made on the computer’s hardwareresources, including
the central processing unit (CPU), random access memory (RAM),
disk drives, printers, serial ports, and other peripherals.

Application programs andutilities call upon MOS for communicating

directly with the hardware to obtain the desired results. As ‘a middle-
manager, MOS mustcontrol keystrokes, screen and printer output,
disk access, RAM allocations, time checks, priority changes and much
more -- for multiple programs and users, all at the same time.

PC-MOSis offered in a single-user, multi-tasking version that

provides the capability of performing multiple tasks on a single com-
puter. MOSis also available in 5-user, 9-user, and 25-user versions.
If you have a single-user version of MOS, you have the capability of
upgradingto. a 5-user, 9-user, or 25-user system. You may also
upgrade from the 5-user to the 9- or 25-user version as your process-
ing demands increase. Anyfiles or programs you are currently run-
ning should not be affected as you upgrade.

This manual explains all the commands available in MOS, and how
they may be used. If you have the single-user module, the multi-user
information in this manual will not apply, although it will give you a
preview of MOS’s full potential. All other information in this manual
applies to all versions of MOS.

am

L-2 MOS-DLO1
 Special MOS Features

The multi-tasking capability of MOSlets you maximize your com-

puterto its fullest processing capability. Youmay share your.
computer's resources amongseveral tasks. MOS provides NETBIOS
emulationas a meansof intertask communication between applica-.
tions.

The MOSkernel(or core) and the majority of the supporting device

drivers and utilities were written in assembler for compactness and
speed. MOSis modular in the fact that expansion is possible with
device driver modules, and you mayeasily replace modules to expand
the numberof users, up to 25,

MOSprovides support for monochrome, CGA and EGAvideo cards.

EGAvideo cards are supported in the CGA modefor all tasks, while
programs using the enhanced mode are supported at the main con-
sole only. Multi-user versions of MOS support monochrome and CGA
video modes at appropriate CRT terminal workstations, or computer
workstations running terminal emulation software.

You may optionally establish security with MOSat the user level.
You may securefiles or entire directories from unauthorized use, and
assign your own passwords and user ID codes. MOSsecurity lets you
selectively determine levels of access for users to individualfiles,
directories and multi-tasking partitions. An advancedsecurity fea-
ture lets you further define your own encryption key for even greater
security.

The MOS Print Spooler is available to manage your printing require-

ments. With multiple users, you may needto control the output to a
printer so that only onefile prints at a time. The Print Spooler may
also be usedto facilitate multiple printers.

An. on-line help facility is built into MOS andis always available. You
may use the .HELP commandto display a menu ofall the commands
available in MOS, or display only the correct form and an explanation
of a specific command. You may bypass the menu by entering .HELP
and the nameof the commandtodirectly display the command form
and an explanation.

MOs-DISI L-3
Overview

Optimization of Memory Managed Knvironments

It is in a memory managed environmentthat the full power and

capability of PC-MOScan be achieved.

When MOSis booting up, it must find places in memory to use for the
MOSkernel, the SMP (System Memory Pool), the disk cache and the
video save area.

Changes have been made in the way MOS relocates certain key com-
ponents of the system into high memory to free more memory for in-
dividual tasks. The MOS kernel has been divided into two discrete
segments that can be relocated independent of one another, Also,
MO$8’s initialization procedure first relocates the two MOS kernel seg-
ments into FREEMEM,then the SMP,then the commandprocessor,
then the video save area, andfinally the disk cache.

By relocating the largest itemsfirst, it is much morelikely that items

which won't fit up in FREEMEMwill be the smaller items. These
cause less encroachment into the memory available for tasks, result-
ing in larger task sizes.

You must tell MOS what type of memory management device you
have in your computerfor it to function properly. This is done with
the MEMDEVconfiguration Command Statement. The MEMDEV
statement must be part of the configuration set up in your CON-
FIG.SYSfile. The VIYPE configuration Command Statement allows
a user to control certain aspects of MOS’s memory allocation, and
thereby, task size limits. By telling MOS what type of video is being
used, certain memory not in use for video may be assigned for use as
task memory. The VITYPE statementis part of your configuration set
up. andis only possible when a memory management driver is being
used.

Whenfine tuning MOS’s memory allocation, the MOS INFO utility

command is available to report what FREEMEM was found Gf no
FREEMEMstatement was specified) and what portions of it are om
being used by each system component.

Le-4 MOS-DIOL
Support for 8088, 8086 & 80286 (Non-Memory
Managed) Environments

The memory allocation and task initialization procedures in MOSpro-

vide multi-user and multi-tasking capability even when no memory
management driver is present. This means that PC-MOSis sup-
ported on an 8088 or 8086 type PC/XT or on an 80286 AT without an
AT-GIZMO, ALL Computers CHARGECARD,or similar memory
management device. It could even be used on an 80386 system with
no extended memory board installed.

Normally, in this situation, the concept of FREEMEM does not apply

since there is no memory remapping capability to let you utilize the
upper memory areas. As a result, low memory must be used for the
foreground overhead items: the MOS kernel ($$MOS.SYS), the com-
mandprocessor ($$SHELL.SYS), the system memory pool (SMP),
andthe disk cache.

Also, when any tasks are added, they must use the same low memory
area. Note that the memory for the new task will be taken from the
top of the task from which the ADDTASK commandis issued. On a
640K system, with a moderately sized SMP (SMPSIZE=40K), two
tasks of approximately 240K should be possible.

In contrast to the memory use scheme when a memory manageris

present, non memory managed multi-user/multi-tasking uses part of
each task’s memory space for the video save area. This meansthat in
a 96K task on a CGA system, 16K of that 96K is used for the video
save buffer. A monochrome task would only need 4K.

The system driver $286N.SYSis available for use with 80286-based

machines without a memory managementboard installed. When
$286N.SYS is used in this non-memory managed environmentit
provides better interrupt handling and allowsfor part of the MOS
kernel to be relocated into extended memory, above 1 Megabyte. This
helps to increase the memory available for tasks. Note that even
though the $286N.SYS driver is installed with the MEMDEV=state-
ment, it does not provide memory management.

MOS-DLOL 1-6
Overview

Video Handling

Some applications bypass the operating system and write output

directly to the video screen in order to perform faster screen han-
dling. These applications cause video problems in a multi-user en-
vironment. Whenever an application uses this direct video RAM
addressing procedure, the screen output intended for the workstation
will appear on the host computer’s monitor. The backgroundwill
remain active, but no screen will display.

PC-MOSwill correct the video problems on 80386-based computers

without the use of any special video handling programs.

Whenrunning PC-MOS on 80286, 8086, or 8088-based computers a

memory management device, such as the AT-GIZMO or ALL Com-
puters CHARGECARDfor an 80286, is required to provide video
managementfor applications that write directly to the video memory.
(See your dealer for the appropriate memory managementdevice for
your computer.)

VIDPATCELCOM

Some applications also directly control the cursor and sound.In these
cases (on 80286, 8086 and 8088 machines) the video will be correctly
output to the background partition, but the foreground cursorwill
move and any beeps will be heard from the foreground:

To solve this, VIDPATCHis executed on the application that is direct-

ly controlling the cursor and sound,in the following format:

VIDPATCH [Menamel

where "filename" is the program file which contains the undesirable

cursor/sound handlinglogic.

‘VIDPATCHis runONLY ONCE! Once a program hasbeenfixedit

will run in the foregroundand background without any further chan-
ges, and neednotbe fixed again unless you reinstall the application.

1 MOS-DLGL
BE SURE TO SAVE THE OLD VERSION OF ANY PROGRAM
THAT YOU MODIFY WITH VIDPATCH... you will wantit for back-
up, and also to take full advantage of the application when run at the
main console.

VIDPATCHsupports only specific applications, primarily those in

most popular use. There are other less popular applications with
which VIDPATCHwill not work.

AT GIZMO and CHARGECARD users: Note that VIDPATCHisfre-

quently required for compatibility with applications runningatter-
minals or in "background"tasks.

MOS-DI91 L-?
Overview

MOSFiles

Thefiles you receive with MOS andtheir purposesare:

$$MOS.SYS This file contains the MOS kernel, the core of the
operating system, and several MOSdevice drivers.

$$SHELL.SYS The intrinsic commands provided with MOS are

contained in this file. Each time you boot MOS,
this file loads in memory and the commandsare
always available. Intrinsic commandsarelisted in
the General Commandschapter of this manual.

COMMAND.COM This file allows $$SHELL.SYSto be activated for

each partition.

.COM and .EXE Files provided with MOSthat have a .COM or

.EXE extension are the MOSextrinsic commands.
These program files load from disk into memory
each time they are invoked.A list of the MOS ex-
trinsic commands appears in the General Com-
mands chapterof this manual.

There are several special device drivers provided with MOS. These
device drivers are containedin files that are identified by a preceding
dollar sign and an extension of .SYS. They are:

$EMS.SYS This device driver will emulate the Lotus-Intel-

Microsoft Expanded Memory Specification, and is
used for bank switching "extended" memory asif
it were "expanded" memory.

$NETBIOS.SYS This device driver supports applications written

for the Network BIOS Emulation (NETBIOS)
protocol by providing software emulation of net-
work "adapter cards".

$PIPE.SYS Allows you to define character devices to buffer

and "pipe" information betweenpartitions.

MOS-D181
$RAMDISK.SYS This device driver lets you define a section of ex-
tended memory that MOStreats as a disk device.
This is sometimes referred to as a virtual or RAM
disk.

$SERIAL.SYS This device driver sets up a buffered interface to

standard serial ports. This driver is required for
MOSto recognize more than the standard serial
ports, COM1 and COM2, and must be present to
support workstation terminals under MOS.

There are somefiles that are not provided with MOS, but MOS will
recognize and usethesefiles for special processing functions. These
are files that you may create to define your own processing require-
ments and needs. Thefiles you may create for special processing func-
tions with MOSare:

CONFIG.SYS You maycreate this file to define your operating

environment, such as the devices available to
MOS, free memory available to MOS, ete. If you
don’t create your own CONFIG.S8YSfile, MOS
uses built-in defaults to define your environment.

AUTOEXEC.BAT You maycreate this file to automate the execu-

tion of programsandutilities each time you boot
MOS. You may include commandsfor application
programs or MOS utilities in this file.

$SUSER.SYS If you decide to use MOS security, you must cre-

ate this file. It contains the user records that
define a user’s ID and password, the accesslevel
each user hasto each class, and each user’s
default output class. Be sure you read and under-
stand the Security chapter in this manual before
creatingthisfile.

$$MASTER.SYS This file is necessary only if you decide to use the

master passwordlevel of security on your system.
Be sure you read and understand the Security
chapter in this manual before creatingthisfile, or
you mayfind your system unusable.

MOS-DL9I
Overview

Understanding Terms in MOS

Whenyou begin to install and set up MOS, there are a few terms you
need to understand. The following is an explanation of these terms. If
you find a term in this manual that you don’t understand,look in the
Glossary at the end of this manual.

class A class in MOS maybea security class or a print

class, and is usually identified as being one or the
other.

command A commandis an instruction that causes MOSto per-

form a specific action, such as copy a file or display a
list of files.

computer The hardware pieces that comprise your system, in-

cluding the central processing unit, disk drives, a
video display screen and a keyboard.

disk The term "disk" is used in this manual to represent

any disk media, which maybe a diskette, a hard disk,
a removable cartridge,etc.

main console The workstation consisting of the monitor and key-

board that are directly associated with the central
processing unit is referred to as the main console.

multi-tasking The ability to have several programs share the

central processing unit in your computer at the same
time is referred to as multi-tasking.

multi-user The ability to have more than one user running the
programsthat share the central processing unit in
your computeris referred to as multi-user.

operand A syntax element that further defines how a com-

mand in MOSis to perform an action is referred to as
an operand.

MOS-DILSI
 partition A partition is a portion of your computer’s memory
where a program may be processing independently of
any other program,i.e., multi-tasking. Each partition
is identified by a unique task ID number.

single-user An environment where only one user may run the

programs that share the central processing unit.

workstation A CRTterminal or reasonable substitute that is con-

nected to your computer to share the central process-
ing unit is referred to in MOS as a workstation.

oof,

MOS-D19L
Overview

The System Administrator

Because MOSprovides many sophisticated capabilities, a technically ~~

knowledgeable person should be in charge of setting up and maintain-
ing your computer. The term "system administrator" is used in this
manual when referring to anyone that performs these functions.

The functions of the system administrator may be performed by one

or more individuals. If you have a multi-user version of MOS, you
may have one person, such as your dealer, install the computer
hardware. There may be another person, perhaps someone from your
dealership or someone in your company, whosets up your operating
environment.

Someof the responsibilities of the MOS system administrator are:

* Installing MOS on your computer.

* Setting up the CONFIG.SYSfile with the $SERIAL.SYSor other —

device driver to define port addresses. Also defining, and other
drivers necessary for your environment.

* Setting up the AUTOEXEC.BATfile to define your operating en-

vironment. This file should include the .ADDTASK commands
necessary for partition support. The system administrator should
also set up the startup batchfiles for each user's partition.

* The system administrator is responsible for installing worksta-

tions, and establishing communications between the computer
and workstations.

* Establishing and maintaining the organization and structure of

directories.

* Setting up the MOS Print Spooler (optional).

oot
* Setting up and maintaining MOS Security in the $$USER.SYS
file (optional).

* Creating any necessary batchfiles.

|
¢ Maintaining a schedule for backing up your files.

1-12 MOS-DI191
Command Line Editing

When you boot MOS, the system prompt appears and MOSis ready
to accept a commandentry. Thefirst time you boot MOS, the prompt
appears on your screen similar to the following:

[AN
The underscore following the prompt is the cursor, which is posi-
tioned at the beginningof the line where you will enter all com-
mands. The cursor gives you an indication of your location on the
screen.

Whenentering commands, MOS provides some useful editing control

keys and two editing modes, insert and typeover. When youfirst boot
MOS, it is in the typeover mode and the cursor appears as a blinking
underscore. You may change to the insert mode by pressing the Ins
key andthe cursor appearsas a block. You may place the INSERT
command in your AUTOEXEC.BATfile if you always want to be in
the insert mode when you boot MOS.

Command HReceall Buffer

Each time you enter a command on the commandline, it is saved in

the MOS Command Recall Buffer. As you enter new commands, the
oldest entries in the buffer are dropped and the newest are saved.

The number of commandlines saved in the buffer will vary. If your

commandlines average about 10 characters, the buffer will hold an
average of 45 to 50 commandline entries. If your command lines
average 20 to 30 characters, there will be fewer lines saved in the
buffer. The more characters there are in the commandline, the fewer
the number of commandlines that are saved.

You may retrieve the most recentline in the buffer by pressing the
Up-Arrow key,or retrieve the oldest. line in the buffer by pressing the
Down-Arrow key. You may clear the buffer by pressing the CTRL
PgDn keys.

MOS-DI91 1-15
Overview

Command Line Control Keys

The following are the commandline editing keys in MOS:

INS Toggles between the insert and typeover mode. An un-

derlined cursor identifies the typeover mode and a
standard block cursor means insert mode.

DEL Deletes the character at.the cursor and shifts remain-

ing characters one position to theleft.

BkSp Deletes the characterto the left of the cursor and

shifts remaining characters one position to the left.
This key may appear as a left arrow on some key-
boards, but do not confuse it with the left arrow lo-
cated on the numeric key pad.

— Movesthe cursorto the left, but does not overwrite an ao

existing entry.

— Movesthe cursor to the right, but does not overwrite

an existing the entry.

CTRL -— Movesthe cursorto thefirst position of a word to the

left of the cursor’s current position.

CTRL —- Moves the cursorto thefirst position of a word to the

right of the cursor’s current position.

t Beginning with the most recent entry in the command

recall buffer, recalls one line at a time. Each addition-
al time you pressthis key,it recalls the preceding
entry. After the last entry has been recalled, the most
recent entry appears again.

1-14 MOS-DIGL
 Beginning with the oldest entry in the command
recall buffer, recalls one line at a time. Each addition-
al time you pressthis key, it recalls the next succeed-
ing entry. After the most recent entry has been
recalled, the oldest entry appears again.

CTRL PgUp Copies the current line to the commandrecall buffer

without havingto enter the line as a command.

CTRL PgDn Deletes the contents of the commandrecall buffer.

ENTER Executes the current line and adds it to the command

recall buffer.

CTRL C Aborts execution of the current command, and

or returns control to the MOS system prompt.
CTRL BRK

CTRL S Causes an output display to halt until any other key

is pressed.

CTRL P Causes data echoed to the video screen to also echo to

the printer.

HOME Movesthe cursor to the first position of the line.

END Movesthe cursorto the last position of the line.

CTRL BkSp Delete the current word at the cursor position.

CTRL END Deletes all data from the cursor position to the end of
the line.

ESC Ignores the current line and begins a new one.

CTRL PrtSe Causes data echoed to the video screen to also echo to
oo, the printer.

MOS-DI91
ot
food

ped,
a
 oN

This page intentionally left blank.

MOS-D191
 CHAPTER2:
CONFIGURATION

Emtroduction 200. 0 ee ee ee ens 2-2

Sreating a CONFIG.SYS File 2... ee ee 2-2

Jonfiguration Commands Statements ..........4- 2-3

BO0BT Le ee ee 2-4
CACHE . 1... 2-5
COUNTRY... 0. ee 2-15
DESNOW ... 0. ee ee 2-16
DEVICE & LDEVICE..........0. 0 eee eee 2-17
FREEMEM ..... 2... cee eee ee ee eee ee 2-19
MEMDEV ..... 2... ee eee ee ee ee ee 2-22
SHELL... ee 2-26
SLICE 2... ee ee es 2-27
SMPSIZE 1.0. ee 2 - 28
USERFILE . 2... ts 2 - 30
VTIYPE . 0. ee ee ee 2-31

Device Names 2... tt ee ee ew eens 2-37

Special MOS Device Drivers . 0.0.0... 0.0 eae 2 - 38

$EMS.SYS .. 0.0. ee ee 2 - 38
$MOUSE.SYS . 0... ee ee 2-40
$PIPE.SYS 2... ee ns 2-42
$RAMDISK.SYS .... 0... 00 eee ee ee eens 2-44
$SERIAL.SYS .. 0... ee ee es 2-46

MOS-DILSL 2-3
Configuration

Introduction

After installing MOS on your computer, you will need to create a

CONFIG.SYSfile to define your operating environment. The informa-
tion necessary to create the configurationfile is explained in this
chapter. Following the configuration information is an explanation of
the standard device drivers supplied with MOS, andthe special
device drivers that you mayselect to use.

Creating a CONFIG.SYSFile

The CONFIG.SYSfile contains the information MOS needs to know

about your computer's configuration. For example, what hardware
devices are available, how many cache buffers to allocate, what
memory managementdriver to use, what areas in high memory
(above 640K) are available for MOSto use, etc. The CONFIG.SYSfile
may also contain information necessary for an application program
that runs under MOS.

The CONFIG.SYSfile should always reside at the root directory on

your MOSboot disk. If MOS does not find a CONFIG.SYSfile when
you boot your computer, MOSwill use the default values for the
necessary command statements and boot up in the Real mode.In this
mode, no matter how much extended memory your system has, only
the first 640K of RAM is accessible for both MOS andyour applica-
tions to use.

It is in a memory managed environment that the full power of PC-

MOScan be achieved. On a computer with memory management
capabilities (an 80486, 80386, or an 80286 with an AT-Gizmoor
CHARGECARD installed) the MEMDEV and FREEMEMstatements
can be specified in the CONFIG.SYSfile. Once this is done, MOS will
boot up in Protected mode with memory managementactive and try
to relocate as muchofitself as possible into high memory between
640K and 1MB.This greatly increases the memory available for your
applications provides the environment necessary for MOS’s multitask-
ing and multiuser capability.

An 2 MOSs-D191
The command statements and default values that are necessary to
MOSare explained in this chapter. MOS also contains built-in device
drivers that you do not have to define in the CONFIG.SYSfile, and
some optional device drivers that you must define if you want to use
them. Thebuilt-in and optional device drivers are explained following
the CONFIG.SYSfile command statements.

You can create a CONFIG.SYSfile with the MOS system editor, .ED.
The MOSeditor lets you create a file and add, delete, or insert lines
in the file. The MOSeditor is explained in detail in a separate chap-
ter of this manual.

Configuration Command Statements

There are specific command statements in PC-MOS that you may

want to set up in the CONFIG.SYSfile. Some statements are option-
al and will depend on the type of computer you have.

The following pages explain the command statements you may want
to set up, along with any default values used when a CONFIG.SYSis
not present, or when a specific command statementis not present.
The command statements are explained in alphabetical order, but
maybe entered in thefile in any order.

MOS-D191 a-d
Configuration

8087

This command statement is only necessary if multiple applications

will be using a math co-processor (8087, 80287, or 80387) simul-
taneously.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: 8087=yes

Operands:

yes enter yes to configure your system for simultaneous use of

a math co-processor by multiple applications.

Explanation:

In order for more than one application to use the math coprocessor
simultaneously in a multi-tasking environment the 8087=yes com-
mand statement must be entered in your CONFIG.SYSfile.

The statement form is always "8087=yes" regardless of whether you

are using an 8087, 80287, or 80387 math co-processor.

Zo 4 MOS-DISL
CACHE

CACHE lets you set up disk caching to speed up file processing on

your computer.It gives you the ability to fine tune your system by es-
tablishing the size of the cache, and how often read requests are writ-
ten to the disk. Disk cachingis noticeably faster than accessing data
directly from disk since it uses the computer’s memory for storing
and retrieving data. Also, in a memory managed environment,
CACHE uses extended memory and does not take away from avail-
able base memory like a BUFFERS statement. (The BUFFERS state-
ment has been replaced by the CACHE statement.)

PC-MOSsupports hard disk partitions of greater than 32MBthat are

set up using Disk Manager” v4.02 and above by OnTrack Computer
Systems, Inc. Since the Disk Manager software changes the standard
512 byte/sector setting for large hard disk volumes, you must include
the/BPS(bytes per sector) operand with the CACHE= statement to
inform MOSof the new Bytes/Sectorvalue.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: CACHE=nnnin, {unit}, [firstw], flastw}, {drives} /BPS=nnnnn

Operands:

nnnn enter the total size of the cache in kilobytes. This is the
total amount of memory reserved for caching read and
write requests. Defaults to 16K if not specified.

unit enter the size in kilobytes of one unit of data that may be
read at one time. This is the size of each individual buffer
in the cache. Defaults to 2K if not specified.

firstw enter the maximum numberof secondsthat are to elapse

before writing data from the cacheto disk, i.e. how long
any data may be held in memory.Entera 0 (the default
value) if you do not want to use this operand.

MOS-D191
Ibo
Oe
5
Configuration

lastw enter the maximum numberof seconds to elapse after the

last write request before all data is physically written to
the disk from the cache. After the specified numberof
seconds without any write requests, all data in the cache
will be physically written to disk. However, if another
write request occurs before time expires, lastw will reset
and start timing over again before writing any data to
disk. Enter a 0 (the default value) if you do not want to
use this operand.

drives enter the letter of each drive to make use of the cache.
Use a commaas a delimiter between each driveletter, for
example: C,D,E. Leaving this operand blank causes MOS
to use caching on all available drives. (Do NOT leave this
operandblank if network drives other than LANLink
drives are active.)

/BPS=nnnnn This option allows you to specify the Bytes Per Sector
value for your hard drive when OnTrack’s Disk Manager
was used to partition the drive. The nnnn valuesare as
follows:

HardDisk _—iBytes/Sector

over 32MB to 64MB 1024

over 64MB to 128MB 2048
over 128MB to 256MB 4096
over 256MBto 512MB 8192
over 512MB to 682MB 16384

Explanation:

A CACHEstatement must be in your CONFIG.SYSfile in order for

disk caching to be active on the system. If MOS does not find the
CACHE= commandstatement (or the DEVICE= $CACHE.SYSstate-
ment used in earlier releases of MOS) in the CONFIG.SYSfile, MOS
will default to using a cachesize of 16K, a unit size of 2K, and both
the firstw and lastw operands will default to 0. The cache areawill be
available to all drives, but it will only be used by MOSfor buffers for
read and write requests without the benefits of disk caching.

MOS-DIOL
be

Oo
e
If MOSdoesnot find the CACHE= commandstatement but thereis
an old $CACHE.SYSdriver installed, caching will still be active on
the system since the DEVICE=$CACHE.SYSstatement is supported
as an internal command.Thesize operand from the $CACHE.SYS
statement will set the cache size. The old $CACHE.SYSbuffer ad-
dress operand is ignored. The remainderof the operands that would
have been specified by the CACHE= statementwill assume their
default values.

If both the CACHE= and DEVICE=$CACHE.SYSstatements appear

in the CONFIG.SYSfile, MOS will issue an error message saying
that it is using the CACHE= statement values and ignoring the old
$CACHE.SYSstatement.

The "nnnn" operand of the CACHE= statement specifies the size in

kilobytes of the cache to be used. The total memory used by caching
includesthe cacheplus a cache descriptor list. There is one cache
descriptor for each cache buffer. The numberof cache buffers is ap-
proximately "nnnn" divided by "unit". Since each cachedescriptoris
16 bytes, the memory used by the descriptorlist is 16 bytes times the
numberof cache buffers. The cache descriptorlist is always located in
the lower megabyte of memory. Thecacheitself is located in extended
memory when memory managementis available. In general, the
larger the cache, the faster the cache. Therefore, set aside as much
memory as you can afford for the cache.

The size of each individual buffer in the cacheis specified by the

"unit" operand of the CACHE= statement. This defines the largest
unit of data that maybe read at one time. For example, with a cache
size of 256K, an assigned unit size of 4K results in 64 buffers
(256/4=64). The optimum unit size, and numberof cache buffers, is
best determined by trying different values for your particular applica-
tions.

Applications that perform random readsand writes, like data bases,

generally perform better with a smaller unit size (more buffers). Ap-
plications that perform sequential reads and writes generally per-
form better with a larger unit size (fewer buffers). However, too small
a unit size (very large numberof buffers) may slow the system down,
since it may take longer to searchall the buffers for the record than
to read it directly from disk.

MOS-DLOl ya
wl
Configuration

For hard disks we suggest you start with 4K, and adjust this number
down if your processing speed does not seem fast enough. For floppy
disks we recommendyou use a unit size of at least one to two tracks
of your particular disk, as follows:

1.2M, 5.25": track size = 15K

360K, 5.25": track size = 9K
1.44M, 3.5": track size = 18K
720K, 3.5": track size = 9K

Firstw and lastw are used to specify that everything to be written to

the disk should first be written to the cache (held in memory for a
specified time), and only later physically written to the disk. Any
write to disk will clear both first and lastw,if set. Firstw and lastw
both default to 0, in which case everything is written immediately to
disk, as well as being written to the cache. The higher the values, the
faster the cache, but the more likely that there will be data lost in
memory in the event of a powerfailure.

If either firstw or lastw is used and the cached drive is a floppy disk
drive, MOS will cause the drive light to stay on from the time an ap-
plication wants to write something until everything has been physical-
ly written to disk. This is to remind you not to removethe floppy disk
from the drive until the drive light goes out, since all your data may
not have been written from the cacheto the floppy disk.

Firstw specifies the maximum numberof seconds during which some-

thing might be held in the cache without being physically written to
disk. This operand acts as a "security blanket" by insuring that at
some specified interval data will be written from the cacheto the disk
regardless of how often write requests occur or how often lastw
postpones the writes to disk. The largest number you mayenter is
1800 seconds (30 minutes). Data may be held for less time than
specified if the cache becomesfull, in which case MOS would write
the data to disk sooner to free cache space.

2-8 MOS8-D191
 Thefirstw "clock" starts timing the first time an application wants to
write something to disk. If and when the specified time expires, MOS
a,
looks through the cache andphysically writes everything to disk,
clearing firstw (and lastw,if set). Firstw will also be cleared if the
cache writes to disk because the cacheis full or because the lastw
timer expires. "Cleared" means that the clock stops timing and any
remaining time on the clock is erased. Once cleared, the firstw "clock"
will not reset until the next time an application makes a write re-
quest. "Reset" means to start timing over again from theoriginal set-
ting.

Lastw specifies the maximum numberof secondsto elapse after the

last write request occurred before it will cause all data to be physical-
ly written to the disk from the cache. This operand improvestheper-
formance of your computerby letting you postpone disk writes to
reduce the amount of head movement and total numberof writes.

The lastw "clock" starts timing EACH TIME an application wants to

write somethingto disk. If lastw expires, data is written to disk and
both lastw and firstw are cleared. Upon the next write request both
will reset and start timing again. If another write request occurs
before lastw expires, lastw resets and the lastw "clock" starts timing
over again (while firstw keeps on timing.) Therefore, if write re-
quests continue to occur more frequently than the lastw specified
time, lastw will keep resetting with each write request and never ex-
pire. In this case, firstw will eventually expire and causeall data to
be written to disk.

Thoughthe largest number you mayspecify for lastw is 1800, you

should always enter a numberthatis less than that of the firstw
operand, or lastw will be rendered inoperative. If the cache becomes
full, MOS will override this operand and write to disk to free cache
space for more data.

The "drive" operand is used to specify which drives to cache.If no

drives are specified, all drives are cached. IfS$RAMDISK.SYSis used,
MOSwill recognize and not cacheit. If any other RAMDISKdriveis
used, all drives except the RAMDISK drive should be specified by the
"drive" operand to ensure that the RAMDISKdrive is not cached.

MOS-D191
i]

ee
t
Configuration

Network drives should NOTbe cached or data corruption will result.

If LANLink drives are active, MOS will recognize them and they will
not be cached. If network drives other than LANLink drives are ac-
tive, all drives except the network drives should be specified by the
"drive" operand to ensure that the network drives are not cached.

In the following example firstw is set to 600 (10 minutes) and lastw is
set to 120 (2 minutes):

CACHE#=1024,4,600,1720,C

Upon thefirst write request, both the firstw and lastw "clocks" start
timing. If no other write requests are made within two minutes, lastw
will expire and all data in the cache will be written to disk, clearing
both lastw and firstw. Both will reset and start timing again upon the
next write request.

If another write request did occur before the two minute lastw "clock"
expired, the lastw "clock" would reset to two minutes and start timing
over again (while the firstw "clock" would keep on counting from its
original ten minute setting), If all time intervals between write re-
quests are less than two minutes, lastw would keep resetting to two
minutes with each request and never expire. If this continues, the ten
minute firstw "clock" will ultimately expire and cause all data in the
cache to be written to disk, clearing both "clocks". Upon the next
write request, both "clocks" will reset and start timing again.

2-10 MOS-D191
 Large Volume Support with OnTrack Disk Manager and /BPS

The PC-MOS HDSETUP utility can partition hard disks with 16 or

less heads and 1024 or less cylinders. Very large hard disks may have
more heads and/or cylinders.

Disk Manager by OnTrack Computer Systems, Inc. can partition

hard disks that have greater than 16 heads and/or greater than 1024
cylinders. PC-MOS supports hard disks of greater than 32MBthat
are set up using Disk Manager v4.02 and above. You can not run the
PC-MOS HDSETUP utility on drives partitioned with Disk Manager.

The Disk Manager software changes the standard 512 byte/sector set-
ting for large hard disk volumes. Therefore, you must include the
/BPS(bytes per sector) operand with the CACHE= statement. Also,
the "unit" operand of the CACHE= statement MUSTbe setto at least
the same numberof kilobytes as the BPS value for the setup to work
correctly.

oo The following are the BPS values that Disk Manageruses for various
hard disk volumes:

Hard Disk Volume Bytes/Sector Minimumcache

over 32MB to 64MB 1024 1K

over 64MBto 128MB 2048 2K

over 128MBto 256MB 4096 4K

over 256MBto 512MB 8192 8K

over 512MBto 632MB 16384 16K

For example, the CACHE statementto include in your CONFIG.SYS

file for a 200MB hard disk with a 2MB (2048K)cache size would be:

CACHE=2048,4,0,0,C,D /BPS=4096

MOS-DI191 2-11
Configuration

Note that 2048 is the cachesize, 4 is the unit size (in kilobytes) and
the /BPS=4096 sets the bytes/sector value. Note also that the two
zeros are the settings for the firstw and lastw timers, which effective-
ly disables write caching. C and D are the drives to be cached.

If you have more than one logical disk, say a 32MB, and 168MB on
the same physical hard disk you must use the Bytes/Sector value for
the largest one, in this case /BPS=4096.

Note that Disk Manager only allows one bootable partition when you
have multiple logical disks (partitions). This means that you can not
set up a dual bootable DOS and MOSsystem on one hard diskifit
waspartitioned with Disk Manager. Another Disk Manager limita-
tion is that the first logical partition can not exceed 32MB. If you re-
quire multiple bootable partitions, you must use HDSETUP to
partition the hard disk.

While HDSETUP only supports up to four logical disk partitions,

Disk Manager supports up to sixteen. Dividing a hard disk up into
several smaller partitions will save disk space as compared with
having just a few large logical drives since the cluster size is smaller
on smaller logical drives. Practically, this means that small files will
take up less space on a smaller logical drive.

For installation instructions follow the OnTrack documentation. The

installation MUSTbe performed when running under a PC-DOS or
MS-DOSversion 3.x since Disk Managerinstalls PC/MS-DOSon the
drive when it prepares the drive. Once the drive is totally functional
as a normal PC/MS-DOSsystem,install PC-MOS byfollowing the ap-
propriate "Installation" section instructions.

NO'TE: If you use Disk Manager (or HDSETUP)to set up your hard
disk and you want both PC/MS-DOS and PC-MOSto be able to read
all disk partitions, the C drive mustbe less than or equal to 32MB
and you must NOT use a DOSversion greater than 3.x. (DOS 4.x ver-
sions no longer support the samedisk partitioning structures as pre-
vious versions of DOS.)
jon
i)

S
O2
a
‘S
BS

food
bol
ft
IMPORTANT CACHING RULES;

1. NEVERopen a floppy disk drive door with the drive light on.

2. NEVERrebootor turn off your computer without first running

MOSADM CACHEOFFor being POSITIVE that you’ve waited
the lesser of firstw or lastw secondsfollowing the last time any-
thing wasdone on the system.

3. If you don’t understand items 1 and 2, or anythingelse about

firstw and lastw, always set them bothto 0.

4. NEVER cache a network drive. Only cache drives that are local to
each machine.

If there are any errors in the CACHE= statementthe following mes-

sage will appear:

The BUFFERS commandstatement is no longer used and has been

replaced with the CACHE= commandstatement. If you enter a BUF-
FERSstatement in your CONFIG.SYSfile, the following error mes-
sage will appear each time you boot your computer:

Whenwrites are postponed, critical error messages may occur when

information is physically written to disk rather than immediately
whentheaction is requested.

MOS-Di91 2-13
Configuration

If this happens,the critical error message will appear on the screen

of the partition which last updated the data that could not be written.
This will be described as a flushingerror, as follows:

Choosingretry will try to flush the data to disk again. Choosing abort
will clear the error without flushingall of your changed data to that
disk. (Abort should only be used asa last resort since all of your chan-
ges for that disk will be lost.)

If too many tasks have pendingflushingerrors, the system may be-

cometied up to the point that it can’t get any free cache buffers. If
that happens,the following message may appear:

This message mayalso occur when an operation is trying to clear out

all the cache buffers for a drive, and there is a cache buffer for that
drive waiting for a response to a flushing error.

If this error message appears, first clear as many tasksas possible

that have a pending flushing error. Then come back and choose retry
to try to clear this error message.

4-14 MOS-D191
COUNTRY

The COUNTRY commandstatement establishes the format MOS

uses for the date, time, currency symbol, and number format for cur-
rency decimal positions. MOS defaults to using 001, the telephone sys-
tem code for the USA,if the COUNTRY commandstatementis not
found in the CONFIG.SYSfile.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: COUNTRY=nnan

Operands:

nnn enter the three digit telephone system code of the country
to define.

Explanation:

The value of nnn is a three digit country code that corresponds to the
three digit telephone system code for a country. If you do not set up a
country code, MOS defaults to the USA telephone system codeof 001.
The other codes supported by MOSare:

Australia 061 Middle East 785

Belgium 032 Netherlands 031
Canada 002 Norway 047
(French)
Denmark 045 Portugal 351
Finland 358 Spain 034
France 033 Sweden 046
Germany 049 Switzerland 041
Italy 039 United 044
Kingdom
Israel 972 United States 001

MOS-DLOL
Configuration

DESNOW
oy
DESNOWcorrects a snow-like effect that appears on color video
screens with some color adapter cards. If MOS does not find the DES-
NOW command statement in the CONFIG.SYSfile, the special logic
for rewriting to the video screen is not used.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: DESNOW=yesino

Operands:

yes enter yes to use the special logic that avoids snow when
rewriting to the video screen.

no enter no if you do not need to use the special logic when

rewriting to the video screen.

Explanation: a

Somecolor adapter boards cause a snow-like display when writing to

the video screen. Using the DESNOW commandstatementwill cor-
rect this condition, but video output will be slightly slower.

216 MOS-D191
DEVICE & LDEVICE

DEVICEgives you a meansto load device drivers to install support

for non-standard devices, You can have any numberof device com-
mand statements set up in the CONFIG.SYSfile. Normally, the
device drivers are relocated up into high memory aspart of the SMP
to save memory space for applications,

However,if for some reason a device driver is required to be run in

low memory the LDEVICE statement can be used to keep it from
relocating into high memory.

You can also use theAADDDEV(add device) and .REMDEV (remove

device) commands at the MOS system prompt to add or removecer-
tain drivers without having to reboot your computer.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: DEVICE=/d:}\path|}ilename {operands}

LDEVICE=/{a:}/|path ilename foperands}

Operands:

a: enter the letter of the drive from which you wantto load
the device driver. MOS defaults to the current drive if a
drive is not entered.

\path| enter the path of the directory where the device is located.
MOS defaults to the current directory if a directory is not
entered.

ifename enter the file nameof the device driver.

operands enter any operandsthat are necessary for the driver.

Explanation:

The standard MOSdevice drivers are automatically loaded and do

not have to be entered in the CONFIG.SYSfile.

MOS-D191 aol?
Configuration

There are optional device drivers supplied with MOSthat you must
define with a DEVICE commandstatement in the CONFIG.SYSfile
if you want to use them. The standard and optional devices are ex- —_
plainedlater in this chapter.

There are also other non-industry standard device drivers that you
may need to enter in the CONFIG.SYSfile. For example, if your com-
puter has a hard disk that is not bootable with MOS, you probably
need a device driver supplied by the manufacturer of the hard disk.

If for some reason.a device driver is required to be run in low memory

the letter L can be added to the beginning of the DEVICE= statement
in your CONFIG.SYSfile to keep it from relocating into high
memory. Enter the DEVICE= statement exactly the same as you
would normally with the exception that the letter Lis added to the
beginning of the word DEVICE as shown above.

aos

2-18 MOS-DLOI
FREEMEM

The FREEMEMstatementallows the system administrator to

specify what memory address ranges between 640K and 1MB (A0000
and 100000 hex) are not used by hardware, and are free for use by
MOS.This allows MOS to remap extended memory into these ad-
dress spaces for use a task memory.

Type: Intrinsic

Form: FREEMEM=m,niN

Operands:

m enter the beginning address of the free memory range.

This must be a byte address, expressed in hexadecimal.

n enter the ending addressof the free memory range. This

must be a byte address, expressed in hexadecimal.

N tells MOS that no free memory spaceis available.

Explanation:

The memory addresses between 640K (A0000 hex) and 1MB (100000
hex) of your computers RAM is typically reserved for use by certain
hardware devices installed in your computer. Some of these are: video
adapter boards, network interface cards, and the system BIOS. How-
ever, many systems have unused blocks of memory addresses in this
space that may be used by MOS.

MOSuses these memory ranges to moveorrelocate itself out of the

primary 0 to 640K addressrange. This relocation leaves more
memory available for application program use. For example,if
memory addresses from C8000 to F0000 in your system was unused,
the following command statement in your CONFIG.SYSfile would
tell MOS that this memory spaceis free for its use.

MOS-D1L91 2°19
Configuration

If the free memory is fragmented, then up to five separate

FREEMEM commandstatements can be defined in the CONFIG.SYS
file. Ifa FREEMEM commandstatement is not found, MOSlooksat a
memory between C0000 and F0000,tries to guess which partsofit
are available, and relocatesitself accordingly.

Entering a FREEMEMENstatementis a good way to determineif

you are having any sort of address conflict with other devices in your
system. If your system doesn’t boot correctly or locks up trying to load
MOS, try entering a FREEMEMENstatement in your CONFIG.SYS
file and rebooting. If the system boots now, you probably have two
components in your system trying to use the same address space.

Video adapters typically use the area between A0000 and C8000.
VGA boards normally useall of that area, while EGA boards normal-
ly only use A0000 to C4000. Hercules mono-graphics adapters usually
use from BO0000 to C0000. CGA normally uses from B8000 to C0000.
MONOnon-graphics adapters usually use from BO0000 to B4000.
alwayscase. Check with your board manufacturer
to determine the exact addresses used by your video adapter. oN

Since many systemsload someof their system BIOSroutines from

F0000 to 100000, it is not normally a good idea to use that area as
FREEMEMsince conflicts may result.

NOTE:It is your responsibility to check with your add-in board

manufacturers to determine what addresses locations above 640K are
being used by those specific products. There is no wayfor usto tell ex-
actly what areas of high memory are already in use in your specific
computer system. If you have an EGA or VGAdevice driver, an EMS
device driver, or a RAM disk driver in your CONFIG.SYSfile, or
hardware add-ons you will need to set your FREEMEM statement(s)
to avoid a conflict of address assignments.

For example, the $EMS.SYS device driver supplied with MOS

defaults to the address E0000 to FO000 for memory paging. If you do
not define a FREEMEM commandstatementto restrict MOS from —
also using this memory address, your computerwill not function
properly.

2 BO MOS-DLOL
To be sure MOSdoesnot use this address, the FREEMEM command
statement you should enter in the CONFIG.SYSfile is:

FREEMEM=C0000,E0000

This tells MOS that the memory segments from C0000 to E0000 are
available, and MOSwill not attempt to use any memory before or
after this address range. The memory segments from E0000 to FO000
are then available for use with the $EMS.SYS device driver.

MOS-D191 ao 2a
Configuration

MEMDEV

MEMDEYVspecifies a System Driver, which tells MOS whattype of

Memory Management hardwareis in your computer system. The
MEMDEYVdriver is also used to tell PC-MOSif your hard disk re-
quires a DMA (Direct Memory Access) buffer. The MEMDEVstate-
ment must be part of the configuration set up in your CONFIG.SYS
file in order to access extended memory.

Type: Intrinsic

Form: MEMDEV=/d:}/|path\jiliename {/fi/cli/eli/m}/o}i/<){/d=nn}

Operands:

a: enter the letter of the drive from which the system driver
is to be loaded.If a drive is not specified, MOS defaults to
the current drive.

ath enter the path of the directory from which the system
3
ba

driver is to be loaded. If a path is not specified, MOS

defaults to the root directory.

filename enter the complete file name of the system driver used for
your computer system. There is no default, you must
specify the correct system driver file name. The system
drivers supplied with PC-MOSare:

$386.SYS- for 80386 and 80486 machines

$GIZMO.SYS- for IBM PC/AT or compatible with an
AT-GIZMO
$CHARGE.SYS - for 80286 machines with a
CHARGECARD
$ALL.SYS- for 8088 machines with an ALL CARD
$286N.8Y8S- for 80286 machines WITHOUT a
memory managementdevice installed

These drivers are explained on following pages. Other sys-

tem. drivers may also be used.

MOS-DL91
 enter the /f operand if you want to force the memory
check portion of the power-on self-test (POST) routine to
be done during a warm reboot (CTRL-ALT-DEL). Normal-
ly the memory check is not done during a warm reboot so
the reboot process take less time.

Whenrunning PC-MOSon the COMPAQ 386/20e, you

must use the /e operand with the $386.SYS system driver.
(This prevents the MOS Kernel segment #2 from loading
into extended memory.) For example:

MEMDEV=$386.SYS |e

Oneof the next operands is necessary only if you have a hard disk
that uses the DMA (Direct Memory Access) channel:

/é enter the /e operandif your computer system’s hard disk

requires 64K of DMA buffering, such as an Emulex hard
disk.

jm enter the /m operand if your computer system’s hard disk

requires 82K of DMA buffering.

/e enter the /p operand if your computer system’s hard disk

requires 16K of DMA buffering, such as IBM PS/2 Models
50, 60, 70 or 80.

fx enter the /x operand if your computer system’s hard disk

requires 9K of DMA buffering, such as an IBM PC-XT.

fd=nn enter the /d= operand followed by up to two digits indicat-

ing the desired DMAbuffersize in kilobytes. This allows
you to select a specific size buffer to suit your hard disk’s
needs, The minimumsetting allowed is 4 and the maxi-
mum is 64,

NOPE: If these DMA operands are needed and not included the sys-
tem may stop booting and lock up when it reaches the MEMDEV
statement. You might also receive a "cannot open $$MOS.SYSfile"
message during boot-up if your hard disk needs a DMA buffer and
one was not specified.

MOS-D191 Z- 2
Configuration

Explanation:

You must tell MOS which type of memory management you have on
your system for it to function properly. (There may be other system
drivers besides those provided with PC-MOS.) The drivers supplied
with MOSare asfollows:

$386.SYS

The $386.SYS system driver is necessary if your computer uses an

80386 or 80486 processor. An example of the correct: commandstate-
ment for an IBM PS/2 Model 80 would be:

MEMDEV=$386.SYS fp

On an 80386-based machinewith the $386.SYS system driver in-

stalled, part of the MOS kernel can be relocated into high memory
(above the 640K boundary) and the other part can be relocated into
extended memory, above 1 Megabyte. This allows users to have
larger task sizes and larger SMPs.

$GIZMO.SYS

The $GIZMO.SYSsystem driver is necessary if your computer sys-

tem has an AT-GIZMO memory expansion board. An example of the
correct command statement for a computer with an AT-GIZMOis:

MEMDEV=$GIZMO.SYS

If you have an IBM PC-AT with an AT-GIZMOand an Emulex hard

disk, you would need to include the /e operand asfollows:

MEMDEV=$GIZMO.SYS /e

$CHARGE.SYS

For users of the ALL Computers, Inc. CHARGECARD,the following

is the correct MEMDEVsyntax:

MEMDEV=SCHARGE.SYS

2~ 24 MOS-DI9I
 $ALL.SYS
oo
Users of the ALL Computers, Inc. ALL CARD should use the
$ALL.SYS system driver, as follows:

MEMDEV=$ALL.SYS

$286N.SYS

The $286N.SYS system driver is provided for use with 80286-based

machines WITHOUT a memory managementboard installed. An ex-
ample of the correct command statement for an IBM PC-AT with no
memory managementboard installedis:

MEMDEV=$286N.SYS

When the $286N.SYSdriver is used in this non-memory managed en-

vironmentit provides for better interrupt handling andallowspart of
the MOS kernel to be relocated into extended memory,above 1
Megabyte. This increases the memory available for tasks.

Hard Disk DMA Buffer Size

Your hard disk manufacturer or documentation should tell you if

your hard disk uses the DMA channel and how large a DMAbuffer is
required. The DMAbuffer has to be large enough to handle the
largest possible data transfer operation. Selecting a buffer size
smaller than the required value reduces disk performance yet using
too large a buffer reduces your available task size.

If you use a DMA buffer that is too small the disk read or write is
broken up into as many pieces as required. For example, if a hard
disk requires a 64K DMA buffer (the /e operand) but you set a 16K
buffer with the /p operand, a 52K readwill be broken up into three
reads of 16K and one of 4K. Disk operations which are broken up to
work with a smaller buffer will, of course, take more time. However,
you get more memory space for tasks.

Therefore, you must choose your DMAbuffer size with these trade
offs in mind. Too large a buffer = reduced task size. Too small a buffer
= reduced disk performance.
Configuration

SHELL
eo
SHELL is a user interface that specifies the location and name of a
user defined commandprocessor that loads in place of MOS’s com-
mand processor. MOS defaults to using COMMAND.COMif the
SHELL commandstatement is not found in the CONFIG.SYSfile.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: SHELL = fa:}/\path|ffilename

Operands:

d: enter the letter of the drive from which to load the user
defined command processor. MOS defaults to the current
drive if a drive is not entered.

\path| enter the path of the directory where the user defined
commandprocessor is located. MOS defaults to the cur-
rent directory if a directory is not entered. —_

filename enter the filenameof the user defined command proces-

sor,

Explanation:

The SHELL command statement is necessary only when a user

defined commandprocessor is used in place of MOS’s command
processor. It is important that the user defined commandprocessor
contains the same interrupt levels, intrinsic commands and batch
processor as the MOS commandprocessor.

2-26 MOS-D191
SLICE

SLICElets you define the amountof processing time a partition is

given at the timeit is added. This is a default for time slicing that
may be otherwise adjusted for each partition. If MOS does not find
the SLICE command statement in the CONFIG.SYSfile, the number
of time ticks for each partition is set to 1.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: SUGE=nnn

Operands:

nan enter a 0 if timeslicing is not to be used, or enter a num-

ber between 1 and 255 for the numberof timeticks each
task is to receive.

Explanation:

The multi-tasking capability of MOS is based on time-sharing, where

each task (partition) at a given priority level receives an equal share
of the processor’s time. The SLICE command statementinstructs
MOSto either not use time slicing, or to force the sharing of the
processor. If time slicing is not used, a task will monopolize the
processor until it makes a system call. If a program running in a par-
tition requires constant control of the processor, other partitions may
temporarily be inactive until the processoris freed.

The default for SLICE is 1. This instructs MOSto give each partition
one time tick (approximately 1/18 of a second) of processing time
before MOS movesto the next partition. Processing time is continual-
ly shared amongthe partitions in turn. For example,if there are
three partitions, 1, 2 and 3, of equal priority, MOS shares processing
time amongall three. First 1 receives one tick of processing time,
then 2 receives one tick, then 3 receives one tick, then 1 again receive
onetick, then 2,etc.

From within a partition, the.MOSADM commandlets you assign the

numberof time ticks that partition will receive during its turn, up to
255. However,4 time ticks (approximately 4/18 of a second) is a prac-
tical limit,

MOS-D191 2-28
Configuration

SMPSIZE

MOSuses a system memory pool (SMP) thatis a fixed amount of

memory to dynamically supervise all tasks and track all activity on
your computer. MOSdefaults to using 64K for the SMPif the
SMPSIZE commandstatement is not found in the CONFIG.SYSfile.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: SMPSIZE=nnank

SMPSIZE=non,nonk

Operands:

nnn enter the numberof kilobytes (1024 bytes) to allocate to

the SMP.

K you must enter a K to document that the SMPSIZEsizeis

in kilobytes.

Explanation:

Each time a file is opened or a new task is started, MOS uses memory
from the system memory poolto track the activity. When thefile is
closed or the task is completed, the memory used to track the activity
is returned to the system memory pool andis available for other
tasks.

Thevalue of nnn is the numberof kilobytes to be allocated to the sys-

tem memory pool. For example:

SMPSIZE=128K

This command statementallocates 128K bytes of memory for use by

the system memory pool.

Asplit SMP statement is available to optimize the memory allocation

process. For example,if a total of 100K of SMPis required but the
largest contiguousblock of available FREEMEMis 80K,the following
statement could be used in your CONFIG.SYSfile:

2-28 MOS-D191
 SMPSIZE=80,20K

This will result in two separate SMPblocks, an 80K block and a 20K
block. This split SMP statement will now allow the SMP to berelo-
cated up in high memory, increasing available task size. (This ex-
ample presumes, of course, that no single device driver requires more
than 80K of memory.)

If you do not specify the size of the system memory pool, MOS
defaults to 64K of memory. This is a reasonable value for many sys-
tems.

A substantially larger SMPSIZE will be required if you are:

1. Running a large numberof background tasks.

2. Loading large (or many) device drivers into the system.

3. Opening a large numberoffiles in the system.

To estimate the size of the SMP requiredfor your installation total

the following items:

1. The sum of the size of each device driver loaded with the
DEVICE= statement in your CONFIG.SYSfile.

2. The maximum numberof tasks on the system times 4K.

3. The total of all buffer space reserved by $SERIAL.SYS and

any other serial drivers such as VNA.SYS (if using IONA)or
VGNA.SYS.

4. Total the first three items and add an additional 30% forfile
handles.

Don’t make your SMPlarger than necessary since it may take away
from tasksize if it can not totally relocate itself into high memory.
The maximum allowable value for SMPSIZE varies with system con-
figuration. In a system configured to allow MOSto relocate (see
FREEMEM), the maximum SMPSIZEis 440K bytes. In systemsthat
do not allow MOSrelocation, the maximum is 360K bytes.

MOS-DI191 2-29
Configuration

UOSERFILE

USERFILE lets you define the directory where the $$USER.SYSfile

is located. This command statement is necessary only when user
security is invoked for your computer, and the $$USER.SYSfile is
not located at the root directory.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: USERFILE=d:|path|\$$USER.SYS
Operands:

a: enter the letter of the drive from which the $$USER.FILE

is loaded.

\path| enter the path of the directory where the $$USER.SYS

file is located.

S$USER.SYS you must enter $$USER.SYSasthe file name

operand for this command.

Explanation:

If a USERFILE command statement is not found in the CON-

FIG.SYS file, MOSlooks for the $$USER.SYSfile at the root direc-
tory of the boot drive when user security is active. If you create the
$$USER.SYSfile at a directory other than the root, and do not set
the path in the CONFIG.SYSfile, MOS will not find thefile.

2° 36 MOS-DLO1
VTYPE

The configuration command statement VTYPEallowsa user to con-

trol certain aspects of MOS’s memory allocation, and thereby, task
size limits. The VTYPE statementis part of your configuration set up
and is only possible when a memory managementdriver is being
used. EGA and VGA systems can NOTuse the optional F operand.

Type: Intrinsic

Form: VTYPE#7|2|314|5 {F]

Operands:

1 VGA/EGA/CGA/MONO TEXT mix. A 16K video save area

is reserved. (The area from A0000 to BO000 can be used
as task memory by using the F operand.)

MONO- TEXT ONLY.A 12K video save area is reserved.

(The area from A0000 to BO000 can be used as task
memory by using the F operand.)

CGA only. A 16K video save area is reserved. (The area

from A0000 to B4000 can be used as task memory by
using the F operand.)

CGAonly. A 16K video save area is reserved. (The area

fe

from A0000 to B8000 can be used as task memory by

using the F operand.)

HERCULES MONO GRAPHICS. A 32K video save area

is reserved. (The area from A0000 to B0000 can be used
as task memory by using the F operand.)

this optional operand can only be used in combination

with one of the previous operands. If used, the foreground
task will be filled out to the new upper memory limit by
allocating from extended memory, thus increasing the
available task size. To use the F operand , no other
hardware device (including your video adapter) can be
mappedto thefill area address space.

MOS-DLS1 2-31
Configuration

Explanation:

The VTYPE statementallows you to specify the maximum amountof

memory PC-MOSisto reserve for the main console’s video context
area and all subsequent task’s video save areas.

PC-MOSsavesthe video output from each task in their own video

save area. This allows processing to continue to take place and screen
updates to occur, even if the task is not currently being viewed. When
the task is eventually brought to view the screen will be updated with
the contents of this save area. If you are using EGA or VGAlevel
graphics adapters, and your application software is running in an
EGA/VGA graphics mode, PC-MOSdoes not save the video data
whenthetask is not in view. Instead, MOS suspends that task until
someone switches backinto the task to viewit.

The highest video mode that is saved under PC-MOSis Hercules

(mono-graphics). This mode requires 32K of RAM to save the video
graphics data.

The F operand can be usedto instruct. PC-MOS tofill in the unused

area between AO0000 and the new upper memory limit (where your
video card starts mapping) with extended memory for use as task
memory space. This will increase the size of the task available for
your applications. If you intend to use the F operand, you MUST
makesure that no other hardware devices on your system are at-
tempting to use this memory area. For example, if you have an EGA
or VGA board in your system, you can NOT usethe F operand since
these video adapters use memory space beginning at A0OOO.

The following table lists typical video adapter memory mapping ad-
dresses. the
difernt
manufacturers. Consult the manufacturer or your video adapter for
more specific information.)

Adapter Addresses
Mono-Text Only BO000 - B4000
CGA B8000 - C0000
Hercules Mono Graphics BO000 - C0000
EGA A0000 - C4000
VGA A0000 - C8000

2- 32 MOS-DI91
In a PC-MOSsystem that has a variety of video types to emulate,
select a VTYPE that will accommodate the highest video graphics
mode that is saved under PC-MOS. Thefollowing table summarizes
the various VTYPE options. A detailed explanation of each VIYPE
follows thetable.

Video F option
VTYP Save Area Task Fill
K Size Area

1 - VGA/EGA/CGA/Mono mix 16K A0000 - BOOOO

2 - Mono(Text only) 12K A0000 - BOOOO

3 - CGA only 16K A0000 - B4000

4 -CGAonly 16K A0000 - B8000

5 - Hercules Mono Graphics 382K A0000 - BOOOO

If VITYPE is NOT used, the defaults are:

The upper memory limit for tasks is available base memory (e.g.
A0000 for a 640K system).

A 16K memory area is reserved for the video save area to allow for
the largest. possible need. Even if the video adapter in the master con-
sole is monochrome, which would only require a 12K video save area,
a 16K area is reserved to handle CGA tasks which could be started
using EMULINK or a CGA type terminal. (Monochrometasksstill
only allocate 12K of extended memory for their video save buffer).

MOS-D191
Configuration

VIYPES1

VTYPE=1 is normally used on a system with a mix of VGA, EGA, —

CGA, and MONO(Text Only) workstations.

The new upper memory limit for tasks is BOOO0. This means that the
area from A0000 up to BOO00 can be used as task memory by using
the F operand(if no other hardware conflicts).

A 16K memory areais reservedfor the video save area.

VIYPE=2

VTYPE=2is used to tell MOS that only MONO (Text Only) tasks will
be active on the system.

The new upper memory limit for tasks is BO000. This means that the
area from AQ000 up to BO000 can be used as task memory by using
the F operand(if no other hardware conflicts).

Only a 12K memory area is reserved for the video save area.

If you have a monochrome adapter at the main console, and will

NEVERhave a CGA background task (using EMULINK or a CGAter-
minal) then using VITYPE=2Fwill raise the upper memory limit for
tasks and reduce the memory needed for the video save area.

VIYPE=3

VTYPE=3 can be used on systems with only CGA workstations. For

example, a CGA host computer with PC EmuLink tasks.

The new upper memory limit for tasks is B4000. This means that the
area from A0000 up to B4000 can be used as task memory by using
the F operand(if no other hardwareconflicts).

A 16K memory area is reserved for the video save area. os

This VTYPEleaves the area from B4000 to B8000 available for the
$RAMDISK.SYSdriver to use. (B4000 is the default area for this
driver. Another area may bespecified.)

2-34 MOS-D191
NO MONOCHROME TASKS(e.g. terminals using a non-graphicster-
minal driver such as PCTERM) MAY BE USED WITH THISOP-
TION SINCE THE MONOCHROME VIDEO MEMORYAT Bo000
CAN BE USED AS TASK MEMORY.

In addition, there is a possibility that certain applications will test for

memory at BO000 and B8000 to determine where they can dotheir
direct video writing. Such an application would see task memory at
BO000 and be misled into thinking it was on a monochrome system. A
system crash would mostlikely result. Anyone who wants to use such
applications will NOT BE ABLE TO USE VTYPE=3 OR VTYPE=4.

VIYPE=4

VTYPE=4 can be used on systems with only CGA workstations. For

example, a CGA host computer with PC EmuLink tasks.

The new upper memory limit for tasks is B8000. This means that the
area from A0000 up to B8000 can be used as task memory by using
the F operand (if no other hardwareconflicts).

A 16K memory area is reserved for the video save area.

The sameconsiderationshold true for this option as for VTYPE=3 (no

MONO/PCTERM tasks, etc.) with the following exception:

The area from B4000 to B8000 is NOT available as the default loca-
tion for SRAMDISK.SYS. This driver maystill be used as long as
another areais specified.

MOS-D191 2-35
Configuration

VTYPE=5

VTYPE=5is used for handling Hercules mono graphics adapters. In oN

order to select: MOS VMODE HG1 or HG2, VITYPE mustbe set to 5.

The new upper memory limit for tasks is BOO00. This means that the
area from A0000 to BO000 can be used as task memory by using the F
operand(if no other hardwareconflicts).

A32K memory area is reserved for the video save area.

The area from B4000 to B8000 is not available as the default location
for $RAMDISK.SYS. This driver maystill be used as long as another
area is specified for it.

The area from B8000 to C0000 is not available if VMODE HG?is

used, or if VMODE HG1 and CGAare both used at the same time.

VMODEHG1is suitable for applications that only require thefirst

hercules graphics page. HG2 is suitable for applications that require _
both hercules graphics pages.

2- 36 MOS-DLOL
 Device Names
vo
A device may be any piece of hardware connected to your computer,
such as a printer or CRT terminal. A device mayalso be a program
that emulates hardware, such as a RAM disk. A device driver is a spe-
cial routine or program that controls the action of the devices.

Several standard device drivers are built into MOS and you do not
haveto define them in the CONFIG.SYSfile. These standard device
drivers are:

COMn- where n is 1 to 24 to define an asynchronous channel

(only COM1 and COM2are defined by default).

CON - defines a console connected to your processor.

LPT - where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to define the available parallel

ports (LPT1, LPT2, and LPT3) normally used for printers.

AUX -same as COMI.

PRN -sameas LPT1.

NUL - defines a nuil device that discards output and appears

empty when read from.

d - where d can be a letter from A to Z that defines a disk

drive.

Several special device drivers are provided with MOS, but are not
built-in. In order to use them, they must be set up in the CON-
FIG.SYSfile with a DEVICE= commandstatement, in the same way
as the drivers supplied with non-industry standard devices. Thefol-
lowing pages explain each special device driver provided with MOS
that you may want to set up.

A list of devices actice under PC-MOScan be viewed by entering:

REMDEV

at the system prompt. Devices in the list with a preceding $$ were

loaded through a statement in your CONFIG.SYSfile.

MOS-D1L9l 2-37
SEMS.SYS

$EMS.SYS sets up a device driver for emulating the Lotus-Intel-

Microsoft Expanded Memory Specification (AMS). This driver now
supports both EMS4.0 and3.2 specifications. The memory buffer size
for paging is 64K. The actual amount of EMS memory set up for bank
switching is assigned in each task with the MOSADM EMSLIMIT
commandandis only limited by the available memory in your com-
puter. The $EMS.SYSdevice driver is loaded with a DEVICE=state-
ment. in your CONFIG.SYSfile.

Form: DEVIGE@=/o:}{path JSEMS.SYS fbufadr}

Operands:

a enter the drive letter of the drive on which the $EMS.SYS

file resides. MOS defaults to the currentdrive if a drive is
not entered.

jpath| enter the path of the subdirectory where the $EMS.SYS on™
file is located. MOS defaults to the current directory if a
directory is not entered.

butadr you may optionally enter the buffer hex address range to
be used for paging. The 64K EMSbuffer address range
defaults to E0000 (through F0000)if not entered. (The
buffer address must always be on a 4K boundary, where
the last three digits are zeros.) Be sure the default ad-
dress, or the address you specify, is not used by MOS as
free memory (see the FREEMEM command statement).

Explanation:

The $EMS.SYSdevice driver lets you access and use extended

memory for processing as though it were expanded memory. This
eliminates the need for additional hardware, such as an expanded
memory board, for products such as Lotus 1-2.3°, Rel. 2 and up, that —
may needto access expanded memory.

2-38 MOS8-D191
For example,if you want to set up the $EMS.SYSdriver to use ex-
tended memory for EMS bank switching beginning at address C0000,
and the $EMS.SYSfile resides in the PCMOSsubdirectory on the C
drive, the command statement in CONFIG.SYS wouldbe:

DEVICE=C:\PCMOS\BEMS.SYS CO000

To be sure the memory for EMSpaging is not used by MOS, you

would need to set up a FREEMEM commandstatement in your CON-
FIG.SYSfile to omit memory from C0000 to D0000 from free
memory. The FREEMEM commandstatementfor this example could
be:

FREEMEM=D0000,FO000

MOS-DI9L 2- 39
Configuration

$MOUSE.SYS

$MOUSE.SYSis used for installing a mouse on the host computer or

on a VNA or SunRiver workstation. You MUSTusethis driver in-
stead of the MOUSE.SYSdriver version supplied with your mouse.
(Youstill, however, use the MOUSE.COM program that was provided
with your mouse.)

Form: DEVICE=/d:}{|\pathJSMOUSE.SYS

Operands:

a: enter the drive letter of the drive on which the

$S$MOUSE.SYSfile resides. MOS defaults to the current
drive if a drive is not entered.

path) enter the path of the subdirectory where the

$MOUSE.SYSfile is located. MOS defaults to the current
directory if a directory is not entered.

Explanation:

The driver must be entered in your CONFIG.SYSfile as follows:

DEVICE=$MOUSE.SYS

If the driver resides in a subdirectory on your disk, you must enter

the subdirectory path with the statement, for example:

DEVICE=C:\PCMOS\$MOUSE.SYS

Since the mouse driver must be loadedafter all serial drivers

($SERIAL.SYS, SRTERM.SYS, VNA.SYS, etc.), it must be listed
after all of those device driver statements in your CONFIG.SYSfile.

Once the mousedriveris active on your system you mustinitialize

the mousein the task in which it will run. This is done with the MOS
utility command:

MOS MOUSE nf

2-40 MOS-DL91
 where "n" is the COM port numberthat the mouse is connected to
and "r" is the baudrate.
ao

The MOS MOUSE command must be entered BEFORE you run the
mouse program (MOUSE.COM) in your task to use the mouse.

The MOSutility command "MOS MOUSEoff" may be entered in a

task if it is necessary to turn off mouse support in that partition.

See the Multi-Tasking/User chapter for more information on these

MOSutility commandsandinstalling mice.

MOS:D191 2 4l
Configuration

$PIPE.SYS

$PIPE.SYS lets you define a character device to pipe information be-

tween partitions. $PIPE.SYS must be set up in the CONFIG.SYSfile
with a DEVICE= commandstatement. You can define as many of
these devices as you need, and assign the nameof the driver and the
buffer size for each one. Your only limitation is the amountof
memory available in your computer. These devices allow partitions to
communicate and share information.

Form: DEVICE=/d-}/\path|J$PIPE.SYS devname,{bufsize} {/n]}

Operands:

a: enter the drive letter of the drive on which the

$PIPE.SYSfile resides. MOS defaults to the current drive
if a drive is not entered.

\path) enter the path of the subdirectory where the $PIPE.SYS

file is located. MOS defaults to the currentdirectory if a
directory is not entered.

devname you mayassign upto 8 alphanumeric characters for each

device name, but the name must begin with an alpha
character. For example, PIPE] is a valid device name
where 1PIPEis not. The name you assign to a pipe device
must be unique; it cannot be a name assigned to any
otherfiles or devices.

bufsize the buffer size for each pipe device may be from 1 to
16384 bytes of memory, taken from the System Memory
Pool. The PIPE buffer size defaults to 64 bytes if not
entered.

/o if you use the /n operand, the pipe driver will return an

"end of file" message if a read request is sent to an empty
buffer, rather than waiting for inputto thefile.

2 = 42, MOS-DIS1
Explanation:

Whenpipe devices are defined, any user may send inputto the device
in the same manner as sending input to any other device. The device
holds the input until it is retrieved. For example:

SOPY MYFILE.DOC PIPE

This commandcopies the content of MYFILE.DOCto the device

PIPE1. The information remainsin the buffer for PIPE1 untilit is
cleared by another command.

Note that if PIPE1 has a buffer size of 100 bytes and MYFILE.DOCis
200 bytes, the first 100 bytes are output to PIPE1. MOS will halt and
wait until more space is available in the buffer to send the next 100
bytes.

If the buffer for PIPE1 is not cleared, the partition sending

MYFILE.DOC will lock in a waiting state.

Another user may retrieve the information in PIPE1 by copying from

the device. For example:

COPY PIPET REVIEW.DOC

MOSdoesnot control any locking of pipe devices. If two users are

sending data to a device at the sametime, the data will be mixed
together. In the same way, two users accessing the data at the same
time will receive scrambled data.

MOS-DL91 Zr As
Configuration

SRAMDISK.SYS

$RAMDISK.SYSis a device driver that allocates extended memory to

be used as a virtual disk, which may also be referred to as a RAM
disk. The RAM disk will take the next available drive letter identifier
by which it may be accessed.

Form: DEVICE=/d:}{\path JSRAMDISK.SYS nnnnk, {oufadr}

Operands:

a: enter the drive letter of the drive on which the $RAM-

DISK.SYSfile resides. MOS defaults to the current drive
if a drive is not entered.

ipath| enter the path of the subdirectory where the $RAM-

DISK.SYSfile is located. MOS defaults to the current
directory if a directory is not entered.

nnn enter the amount of extended memory in kilobytes, which

may be from 1 kilobyte (1K) to 16 megabytes (16384K).
Defaults to 64K if not entered.

K you must.enter a K to document that the memory size is

in kilobytes.

bufadr you may optionally enter the buffer address to be used for
paging. Defaults to address range B4000 to B8000 if a
buffer address is not entered. (The buffer address must al-
ways be on a 4K boundary, where the last three digits are
zeros.) A 16K address range is used for paging regardless
of RAM disk size. Be sure the default address, or address
you specify, is not used by MOSas free memory (see the
FREEMEM commandstatement).

2-44 MOS-D1L91
Explanation:

The memory defined in the command statement directly emulates a

disk drive, which may be accessed as any other drive. Because a RAM
disk allows data to be stored directly in the computer’s memory, data
access time is much quicker than accessing data from a physical
drive. Any data stored on the RAM disk is lost when powerto the
computeris turnedoff.

If you want to set up the $RAMDISK.SYSdevice to use 128K of ex-

tended memory beginning at address DC000, the commandstate-
ment in CONFIG.SYS would be:

DEVICE=$RAMDISK.SYS 128K,DC000

To be sure the memory for $RAMDISK.SYSpaging is not used by

MOS, you would need to set up a FREEMEM commandstatement in
your CONFIG.SYSfile to omit memory between DC000 and E0000
from free memory. The FREEMEM commandstatements for this ex-
ample could be:

FREEMEM=C0000,DC000

FREEMEM=0000,F0C00

MOS-D181 2-45
Configuration

$SERIAL.SYS

$SERIAL.SYSis a device driver that sets up a standard buffered in- ons

terface to non-intelligent serial port devices. The DEVICE= command
statement for $SERIAL.SYS must be present in your CONFIG.SYS
file to set up serial ports to support local terminals, printers, mice,
and modemsfor remote terminals.

If you are using only the standard serial ports, COM1 and COM2,
$SERIAL.SYS defaults to the standard assignments for COM1 and
COM2and you do not need to enter the driver. (Entering a DEVICE=
commandstatement for $SERIAL.SYS allows you to change the
defaults and/or define additional ports and will override the standard
assignments.)

Ports that are to be used for modems with standard DOS communica-
tions packages(like CrossTalk® and ProComm™) must NOT be
defined with $SERIAL.SYS,

Form: DEVICE=/a:)/|path JSSERIAL.SYS /AD=nn,/Bennnnn, ~ —

OB=nnnnn,AS=(NIDXIPIALIN=n,CN=LIAIT/..

Operands:

a: enter the drive letter of the drive on which the

$SERIAL.SYSfile resides. MOS defaults to the current
drive if a drive is not entered.

\path| enter the path of the subdirectory where the

$SERIAL.SYSfile is located. MOS defaults to the current
directory if a directory is not entered.

AD= the port address maybe from 0 to 8000 hex. Defaults to

03f8 (COM1) and 02f8 (COM2)if not entered.

IB= the input buffer may be from 32 to 65536 bytes. Defaults

to 64 bytes if not entered. This is sufficient for most in- ae
coming keyboard or mouse data.

2 - 46 MOS-DILS1
OB= the output buffer can be from 16 to 65536 bytes. Defaults
to 1024 bytes if not entered. This is correct for ASCII ter-
minals. PC EmuLink™ terminals should normally be set
to 16384 bytes. If you are using a serial printer that has
too small an internal buffer you could increase OB to from
2048 to about 8192 bytes (depending on the printer) to im-
prove your printer performance.

HS= Handshaking defaults to N - None if not entered, but. can

also be set to:

N - None
D - DTR (ata terminal ready, data set ready)
X - XOFF(receiver controlled on andoff)
P - XPC (receiver controlled on and off using different
characters: 65H=xon, 67H=off)
R - results in RTS (request to send, clear to send) protocols

IN= the hardware interrupt level (IRQ) may be set at 2

through 7. Defaults to IRQ 4 and IRQ 3 for ports 1 and 2
respectively. Some serial adapters that provide multiple
ports may use one interruptfor all the port’s addresses.

CN= defines communication for a local or remote terminal.

CN=L defines a LOCAL (directly connected) terminal, the
default. CN=R defines a REMOTE terminal connected
through a modem. CN=T also defines a remote terminal,
but with the TASK-RESTARToption.

m a ~ preceded by a space tells MOS that the next line is a

continuation of the attributes.

Explanation:

Data coming into non-intelligent serial port devices must be buffered

or the system will be slowed down since the computer’s microproces-
sor (CPU) must handle all the serial I/O activity. The $SERIAL.SYS
driver sets up a standard buffered interface for non-intelligent serial
ports for local terminals, printers, mice, and modemsfor remote ter-
minals.

Intelligent serial devices do not require buffering since they have

their own on-board CPUsto handle the serial I/O.

MOS-DI91 Zr Ad
Configuration

Ports that are to be used for modems with standard DOS communica-
tions packages(like CrossTalk and ProComm) must NOTbedefined
with $SERIAL.SYS. These programs write directly to the port and
wait for a response, which they won’t get if the port is buffered. In-
stead, use the MOS USEIRQ commandto reserve the interrupt for
that port before running the communications program. When done,
use the MOS FREEIRQ commandto release the interrupt.

PC-MOSdefaults to using COM1 (03f8) and COM2 (02f8) if no

$SERIAL.SYS statementis entered. If you require more than the
standard COM1 and COMa2serial ports, or need to change someof
the default settings for those ports, you should enter a DEVICE=
$SERIAL.SYS statement in your CONFIG.SYSfile to set up the
ports.

Only one DEVICE= commandstatement for the $SERIAL.SYS device

driver is entered in the CONFIG.SYSfile, followed by the attributes
for each serial port assignment. You may enter a maximum of 24 port
assignments with $SERIAL.SYS.

NOTE: You must enter a space before the forward slash in thefirst
port assignment, but not before any subsequent port assignments.

A commaor a spaceis used as a delimiter between each attribute. If

you omit an operand (accept the default), DO NOT enter a commain
place of the operand. Instead, continue the commandline with the
next operand you want to specify. For example:

DEVICE=$SERIAL.SYS /AD=03F8,IN=4

The attributes for each port are separated by the forward slash (/). If
you needto enter the attributes for several devices, the attributes
will likely wrap on several 80 column lines. To let MOS know that the
next line is a continuation of the attributes, a tilde (~) is used at the
end of the line. Always include a space before the ~. For example:

DEVICE=$SERIALSYS /AD=03/8,1B=128,OB=2048,HS=N, ~
IN=4/AD=02/8,1B=64,06=1024,HS=N,IN=3

2-48 MOS8-D1 91
IMPORTANT: Optional operands entered for one port carry over to
all subsequent ports defined unless manually changed back to the
default or another value. In the above example, the IB and OB values
for the second port would have also been 128 and 2048 had they not
been changed backto the defaults by entering the new valuesfor
those operands.

Theorder of port address assignments corresponds to the port addres-

ses you enter with the .ADDTASK command. Thefirst assignment
entered with $SERIAL.SYSis port 1, the secondis port 2, the third is
port 3, etc. For example:

Port 1 Port 2 Port 3

SSERIAL.SYS /AD=03f8,[B=64,../AD=0278,1B=.../AD=03e8,/B=...

Whenyou invoke the .ADDTASK commandand enter port numbers

for specific terminals, you must be sure the numbercorresponds to
the correct serial port assignment. The operand AD=03f8 assigns
COM1 astheserial port to which the terminal for this partition is
connected. The operand AD=03e8 would assign COMS8astheserial
port to which the terminal for this partition is connected.

Because $SERIAL.SYScontains the serial port assignments, there

may be port numberyou will never assign in an .ADDTASK com-
mand. Using the previous example, if you have a modem connected to
address 02f8, you would never assign port 2 with an .ADDTASK com-
mand. That port is reserved for the modem connection.

The "CN="operandis used to indicate whether your connection is

direct to a local terminal or through a modem to a remote terminal.
CN=L defines a LOCAL (directly connected) terminal. CN=R defines
a REMOTEterminal connected through a modem. CN=T defines a
remote terminal with the TASK-RESTARToption.

MOS-D191 2-49
For example:

DEVICE=$SERIALSYS /AD=0318,IN=4,CN=R/AD=02{8,IN=3,CN=L

defines port 1 as a REMOTE connection and port 2 as a LOCAL con-

nection. If the CN= operandis not used, the ports default to the
LOCAL definition. Remember, however, that an operand specified for
one port will be in effect for all subsequent ports, unless changed. In
the above example, port 2 would have used the CN=R definition from
port 1 if it hadn’t been changed with the CN=L entry.

Using the REMOTEoption affords better control of remote com-

munications by telling the serial driver to monitor the carrier detect
line. Whencarrier detect is off, the driver will ignore any characters
from the port. Whencarrier detect is on, the driver will accept incom-
ing characters from the port. Characters can be output to the port
regardless of the state of the carrier detect line.

The CN=T TASK-RESTARToption offers the same control as the

REMOTE option with one additional feature. If your connection is
broken andthe carrier detect signal drops, the TASK-RESTARTop-
tion will automatically restart the task. This will make it much more
likely that the modem will be properly set up to receive the next in-
comingcall, since the task wasnot left hanging in the middle of an ap-
plication. Also, if security was active in the task, restarting the task
will re-run the batch file or security commandthat establishes
security in that task. This will ensure that no onecalling in can gain
access to the task without entering the necessary user ID and
password.

2-50 MOS-D191
 CHAPTER3:
FILES AND DIRECTORIES

Introduction . 0... ce ee ee ee te ee ee 3-2

Naming Files... et ee te et ens 3-2

File Extensions .. 1... 2... eee et eee eens 3-3

Displaying File Names ..........0 0.00 ee eeee 3-3

File Characteristics... 0 te ee ee et es 3-4

File Sizes 2... es 3-4

Updated Date and Time ..........-..0582000- 3-4
File Attributes. 2... ee ee ee es 3-4
Classand UserID........... 002 ee eee eee 3-5
Creation Date and Time ..........08 2. ee eeee 8-5

Pile Sharing 2... ee ee ee 3-5

Wildeard Characters . 1... ee ee tt ee 3-5

File Maintenance 2... 0. te ee et ee es 3-7

Directories 2... te ee ee ees 3-8

Directory Structure... ee es 3-9

Directory Names 0... ee ee te ee 3-10

Organizing Directories... 0... ee ee et te te 3-11

Directory Maintenance ........ 06 e ee ee eee 3-11

Displaying a Directory... 0.0.0. eet ee ee 3-13

Displaying a Directory Structure 2.1... 2.0. cues 38-14

MOS-D191 3-1
Files & Directories

Introduction

MOSlets you maintain files as the method to store and track informa-
tion. A file may contain text, system information, programs, or com-
mands, such as those foundin batch files. You may create a file with
any text editor, a word processor, or with the MOS Editor, .ED. You
mayalso copyfiles from an application program onto your computer’s
hard disk.

You may further organize your files under MOSwith a directory

structure. The directory structure lets you groupfiles, and define a
path to where thefiles are located.

This chapter explains specific information about creating and main-

tainingfiles, and the directory structure for grouping and accessing
files.

Naming Files

The complete nameofa file consists of two elements, the file name
and an extension. The nameofthe file may contain up to eight charac-
ters, and the extension may contain up to three characters. A period
is used to separate the file name from thefile extension. For example:

Hlenarme.ext

Each file you create must have a unique name. Duplicate file names
mayexist as long as they are in different directories. You may use
any combination of alphanumeric characters for the name and exten-
sion of your file. However, you may not use any of the following char-
acters in any part of a file name.

><p]itsettyr?
The namesofthe files provided with MOSare reserved in the sense
that MOSwill "look" for them, and when foundwill execute them.
You should not namea file with the same name as a MOSfile. Unless
you are technically knowledgeable, these files should not be overwrit-
ten or modified.

3-2 MOS-DL ‘L
ei
 You should never namea file with the same nameas any of the
reserved devices provided with MOS. Someof the reserved device
names in MOSare:

AUX CON NUL

COMn LPTn PRN

File Extensions

MOSusesthe filename extension to identify several special types of

files, and will treat these files accordingly. You may choose any three-
characterstring for your file extension. The special extensions that
MOSidentifies and their uses are:

‘BAT MOStreats anyfile with a .BAT extension as a batchfile,

whichis a collection of commands. Whenthisfile is in-
voked, MOSwill execute the commands contained in the
file.

ao, .COM MOStreats any file with a .COM extensionasif it con-

tained executable machine language. Most .COMfiles are
program files, and may be up to 640Kinsize.

.EXE MOStreats anyfile with a .EXE extensionasif it con-

tained executable machine language. MOS looksfor a
headerrecord at the top of thefile that tells MOS how
and whereto load thefile. The size of these files is limited
by the size of your disk volume.

SYS MOStreats any file with a SYS extension as a MOSsys-

tem file. These files have various special purposes,

Displaying File Names

MOStracks and maintains information associated with eachfile.

This information appears with the file name when you display a direc-
tory with the .DIR command. A directory display appears on your
screen similar to the following:

MOS-D191 3-3
Files & Directories

File Characteristics

A directory will display the files along with their characteris-tics. The
following is a description of these characteristics.

File Sizes

Following the file name and extensionis thefile "size", which is the
numberof bytes thefile occupies. The size of a file under MOSis
limited by the size of the volume or media on which it resides. How-
ever, you should not makea file larger than you really need.

Updated Date and Time

MOStracks the date and time whena file is accessed and has infor-
mation written to it. The last date and time when information was
written to an existing file appears in a directory display in the "up-
dated" column. If you use MOSto merely display the file and nothing
is actually written to the file, the date and time remain unchanged.
The date displays in the format you select with the COUNTRY com-
mand statement in your CONFIG.SYSfile.

File Attributes

MOStracks several attributes for each file. These attributes also ap-
pear on the directory display in the "attrib" columns. An asterisk (*)
appears to indicate that the file has been changedsincethelast time
it was backed up with the EXPORT command. An R appearsfor a
file that has a read-only attribute, and nothing can be written to the
file. An S appears as an attribute for any securedfile. If any hidden
files exist on your computer, MOSwill display an H attribute.

be MOS-D191
Class and User TD

The "cls" column displays the class that is assigned to a file when
MOSsecurity is active. The "User" column displays the user ID of the
user whocreatedthefile.

Creation Date and Time

MOStracks the date and timea file is created. This is the internal
system date and time known to MOS,and appear on a directory dis-
play in the "created" column in the format determined by the ©
COUNTRY commandstatement in your CONFIG.SYSfile.

The creation date and timewill always be associated with thefile and
maynot be changed.If you create a copy ofthefile, the copy will
carry the same creation date and timeas the original file. If you copy
files and concatenate them,the resultingfile will show a new creation
date and time.

Note that some applications may renameordelete a file while you

are usingit, and then create a new file when you save the output
back to disk. When this occurs, MOS will always recognize the output
as the creation of a new file and assign the current date and time as
the creation date and timeofthefile.

File Sharing

Whetheror not two users can access the samefile at the same time
dependents on howthefile was opened, and the type of access, If an
application program is controlling thefile, the application controls
which users may accessthefile at the sametime.

Wildearc characters

MOSrecognizes a ? and a * as wildcard characters. You may place

either of these characters in a file name to indicate that the position
in the filename may contain any characters. Wildcards are generally
used to search for files when only a partial name is known,or to
search for files that have a common namecharacteristic.

MOS-D1L91 o-5
Files & Directories

For example, you may wantto use the directory command anddis-
play the namesofallfiles that begin with M and have a .DOC exten-
sion. The ? indicates that any character may occupy a single position.
You could enter the file nameas:

rn???222? doc

This would display a directory ofall files that begin with m and carry
a .DOC extension. The ??????? represent the positions that could be oc-
cupied by any characters. If you knew that: the 8-character name of
the file you wanted began with m and ended with t, you could enter
the file nameas:

m????? ?tdoc

MOS would display a directory of all 8-character file names that

begin with an m, end with a t and have a .DOC extension.

The * is equivalent to the numberof ?’s required to complete thefile

nameor extension. For example:

m*.doc = mv????2??.doce
abe.x* = abe.x??
a*e.xyz is net a legal filename. The "oc" js ignored.

If you enter a file nameas:

* doc

MOSwoulddisplayall files that have a .DOC extension. You could in-

clude all files on a disk or in a directory by entering thefile name to
include with a commandas:

ve We.

3-6 MOS-D191
 File Maintenance
oo,

MOSprovides several commands that you may use to maintain your

files. TheERASE commandlets you delete file from the system
whenit is no longer needed. TheRENAME commandlets you
renamea file or move it from one directory to another. The .COPY
commandlets you create a new copyof an existingfile.

You may want to periodically make back up copies of your files for
safekeeping. You should use the .EXPORT command to make your
back up copies. .EXPORTdiffers from .COPYin thatit creates a com-
pressed copy of thefile, and allows thefile to span multiple diskettes.
You mayrestore exportedfiles only with the IMPORT command.
These commandsare explained fully in the General Command chap-
ter of this manual.

MOS-D191 a-7
Files & Directories

Directories

MOSprovides a directory structure for groupingfiles. This structure

begins with a base called the root directory. From the root you may
add other directories. There are no other directories in MOS until
you create them. Each disk you use with MOS mayhaveits own uni-
que directory structure.

You maycreate a directory at the root that contains several other

directories, and those directories may also contain additional direc-
tories. However, all directories you create have a path back to the
base level of the root. The following diagram illustrates this directory
structure.

[INTERNAT
MEMO.DOC DIRECT.DOC
SALES(D) REGION(D)
DOMESTIC(D) “MAIL.DOC
(D)
(D)
ROOT(D)
NATL(D)
SHIPPING (D)
“INTERNAT.
MEMOS.DOC
OPERATNS(D) [INVENTOR
WAREHOUS(D
“ORDERS
D Directory
F = File

a-§ MOS-D191
Directory Structure

Note that we define the base level of MOSastheroot. If you never

create a directory,all files will then reside at the root. With a large
capacity disk, this would makeit difficult for you to locate a specific
file, and may take MOSa longtimefindthefile.

In our illustration, a directory name SALEShasbeen created at the

root. The root directory is the parent of SALES. The SALESdirectory
is the parent for two more directories, DOMESTIC and INTERNAT.
MOSwill recognize each level of directory only if the levels are
separated with a backslash. For example:

\SALES\DOMESTIC

The first backslash indicates that the path begins from the root direc-
tory. The second backslash indicates the path from SALESto
DOMESTIC. MOS follows this format as the path to the requested
directory. However,if you are in the parent directory (here, the root),
it is not necessary to enterthe first backslash as part of the path. For
example:

SALES\DOMESTIC

In our illustration, DOMESTICis also a parent directory to three

more directories, LOCAL, STATE and REGION.If you areat the root
and wantto access file in the REGIONdirectory, the path would be:

SALES\DOMESTIC\REGION\MAIL. DOC

If DOMESTICis the current directory, the path maybe:

REGION\MAIL. DOC

If you want to move from the REGIONdirectory to the ORDERS

directory, the path must begin from the root and must therefore in-
clude the beginning backslash. For example, the following path in-
structs MOSto return to the root (indicated by the first backslash)
and move through the OPERATNS and WAREHOUSdirectories to
get to the ORDERSdirectory:

\OPERATNS\WAREHOUS\ORDERS

MOS-DI91 3-9
Files & Directories

From the REGIONdirectory, or any directory, you may return to the

root by entering only the first backslash. For example, if you are cur-
rently working in the ORDERdirectory, the following path returns “—
you to the root.

\
You may move to a directory that is on another disk by including the
letter of the drive where the directory exists as part of the path. For
example, to move from a directory on drive A to the ORDERS direc-
tory on drive C, you could enter the path as:

GA\OPERATNS\WAREHOUS\ORDERS

Directory Names

You maycreate a directory and give it any name you want, subject.to
the samelimitations as file names. A directory name,like a file
name, may be up to eight characters and mayinclude a period and an
optional extension of up to three characters.

All the levels of directory names includedin a path from the root may
not exceed 64 characters. The numberofdifferent directory paths you
may create from the root is determined by your disk media. From any
directory level other than the root, there is no limitation to the num-
ber of different paths you can create. At the root you may create:

¢ 612 directory entries at the root of a hard disk.

* 112 directory entries at the root of a 320K or 360K double-sided

floppy disk.

* 224 directory entries at a 1.2 megabyte floppy disk.

* 64 directory entries at the root of a 160K or 180K single-sided

disk. Note that you may readthis disk media with MOS, but —
MOSwill not format or write to this media.

3-10 MOs-D191
Organizing Directories

There are three commands in MOSthatlet you make (.MD) and

remove(.RD) directories, and change (,CD) from one directory to
another. These commandsare explained in detail in the General Com-
mand chapterof this manual. The following are some general
guidelines for using these commandsto organize your directories.

The directory structure lets you groupfiles, and define a path to

wherethefiles are located. When you wantto accessa file that is not
in the current directory, you may enter the correct path to the direc-
tory wherethefile is located.

You may wantto groupspecific files by their type, or group specific

application programsandfiles separately. For example, you may
wantto place a spreadsheet program in a separate directory from a
communications program. Or, you may have a word processing ap-
plication and want to create separate directories for each users’files.

Directory Maintenance

You may makea directory with the .MD command. You may then
copy anyfiles into that directory, or create your own files. If you want
to copy existing files into a different directory, you may use the
.RENAME commandto move them. Note that the name of eachfile in
a particular directory must be unique.

Note that you can only create one level of a directory path at a time.
For example, you may want to create a MEMOSdirectory at the root,
and from the MEMOSdirectory create another level that includes
directories for each month of the year. You must first make the direc-
tory named MEMOS.For example:

.MD MEMOS

MOS-D191 Be Ll
Files & Directories

Whenthis directory exists, you may then create the next level of
directories. You may want a directory for each monthof the year.
From the root you may create a directory for January with the follow-
ing command:

MD MEMOSWAN

If you were already at the MEMOSdirectory, you could make the

JAN directory with the following command:

.MD JAN

To move from the root directory to the JAN directory, you could enter
the command:

CD MEMOSWAN

You maydisplay the path of the current directory by typing the .CD
commandwith no operands.If you were workingin the JAN directory
and entered .CD with no operands, MOS would display:

\MEMOWAN

Note that two periods are used to move from a current directory to its
parent directory. For example, if you are currently working in the
JAN directory and want to move to the MEMOSdirectory, you would
enter:

CD ..

If you madea directory for each month of the year at the MEMOS
directory, you could move from the JAN to the FEB directory by in-
structing MOSto change to the parent and then move to FEB, For ex-
ample:

CD .\FEB

3-12 MOS-D181
Whenthedirectory for January files is no longer necessary, you may
want to remove the JAN directory to free disk space. You must first
delete any files in the directory. If there are other levels of directories
from the JAN directory, you must also remove them. You may then
enter the following commandto remove the January directory:

.AD MEMOSWAN

Displaying a Directory

The .DIR commandlets you display the contents of a directory. For

example, to display the content of the current directory, your could
enter:

.DIR

The directory will appear on your screen similar to the following:

Note that the file names in the current directory appear on the dis-
play. The next directory level created at the current directory also ap-
pear. The word "directory" appears on the display to let you knowthis
is a directory name, along with the time and date the directory was
created.

MOS-D191 3-13
Displaying a Directory Structure

The .DIRMAP commandlets you display any directory structure on a

disk. You may select to includefile namesin the display, or only direc-
tory names. You mayalso begin the display from the root, or from
any level of directory.

For example, you may display the directory structure beginning at

the root by entering the .DIRMAP commandwithoutspecifying a
path. The directory will appear similar to the following:

Thedirectories appear in the map in theorder they are found on the

disk. You may use the path with the .DIRMAP commandto display
all levels of a specific directory. For example, the following command
will display the MEMOdirectory as well as the MEMO\JAN direc-
tory on the default drive:

.DIRMAP \MEMO

The .DIRMAP commandis explained in detail in the General Com-

mand chapter of this manual. om,

3-14 MOS-DISL
 CHAP”TER 4:
GENERAI

Introduction . 0. te te et te ee es 4-3

Intrinsic and Extrinsic Commands .. 06... eee eee 4-3

Extrinsic MOS Covamands... 6... we ee ee ee 4-4

Intrinsic MOS Commands .. 1... eee ee te ee ees 4-5

Invoking Commands 1.06 eee ee ee et we es 4-6

Understanding Command Comventions ..... 0.008. 4-7

Input/Output Redirection 2... 6. ee ee ee ee 4-9

General Commands... ee ee ee ee ee 4-11

sADDDEV .. 1... te ee 4-11

ALIAS 2. ee ee es 4-13
‘BREAK 2... 1. te te ee ee ee 4-16
CD... te ee eee 4-17
CLS 2 te ee es 4-19
COMMAND... 1... 0... ee eee et te tee es 4-20
-COMPFILE ....... 00 eee ee ee te tes 4 - 22
COPY 2.2. ee ee ee 4-25
DATH 2... es 4-32
DIR 2. eee ns 4-33
‘DIRMAP ..... 0 eee et ee ee ee ns 4-36
-DISKCOPY . 2... ee ee te ee es 4-38
-DISKID .. 0... ee 4-40

MOS-DI191 4
General Commands

General Commands (continued)

-ENVSIZE .. 0... eee eee eee ope eee 4-42

-ERASE 2... 0 ee ee ee ee Lee eee 4.48
“EXCEPT 2... 1... ee ee ee
“EXPORT 2... ee ee es

oot

4-2 MOSs-L AE,‘|

sd
ees
est
yo,
MOScontains many commandsthat you will use on a routine basis,
and many commandsfor specialized functions. The routine com-
mandsare explainedin this chapter. Specialized commandsare ex-
plained in other chapters along with the necessary details for using
them.

Intrinsic and Extrinsic Commands

All commands in MOSfall into one of two categories; either intrinsic

or extrinsic. Intrinsic commands are loaded into memory when you
boot MOSandare always available. Extrinsic commandsreside in
the .COM and .EXE files that are provided with MOS, andare actual-
ly programsthat load from disk when the commandsare invoked.

The intrinsic commands and the MOSbatch languageare contained

in the $$SHELL.SYSfile that is loaded into memory each time you
boot MOS. The COMMAND.COMfile also loads into memory when
you boot MOS,andprovides the methodof access to intrinsic com-
mands. You can execute an intrinsic command regardless of what
disks are available.

Extrinsic commandfiles should be loaded on your hard disk, and may

reside at the root directory, or in a different directory. You may
simplify the execution of extrinsic commandsby placing them in a
separate directory on your hard disk. For example, you may create a
directory on drive C named MOSCOM.Thencopyall the .COM and
.EXE files provided with MOSto this directory. In your
AUTOEXEC.BATfile, set the .PATH for MOSCOMsothat thesefiles
are always available, for example:

.PATH@=clmoscom

Following are the MOS commandslisted by their type, intrinsic or ex-

trinsic. Within each type, the commandsarelisted by usage, either
general commands explained in this chapter, or specialized com-
mandsthat are explained in other chapters.

MOS-DI91 An &
General Commands

Extrinsic MOS Commands

Installation Commands

sHDSETUP

General Commands

ADDDEV EXPORT -MSORT

-ALIAS .FILEMODE .MSYS
-COMPFILE FORMAT -REMDEV
.DIRMAP .HELP SEARCH
.DISKCOPY IMPORT .VERIFY
.DISKID -MORE

Multi-Tasking/Multi-User Commands

-ADDTASK
.KEYMAP
-REMTASK
.MOS(includingall utility functions)
.MOSADM(includingall utility functions)

MOSSystem Editor

.ED (and all commandsin the Editor)

MOS Debug

.DEBUG(and all commands in .DEBUG)

Security Commands

.CLASS

Print Spooler

-PRINT
SPOOL

Whe
A
Intrinsic MOS Commands

Configuration Command Statements

(used only in CONFIG.SYSfile)

8087 DEVICE SLICE

CACHE FREEMEM SMPSIZE
COUNTRY MEMDEV USERFILE
DESNOW SHELL VTYPE

General Commands

-BREAK -ENVSIZE -REL

.CD .ERASE -RENAME
.CLS EXCEPT SET
.COMMAND .MD “TIME
COPY ONLY
DATE -PATH .WVER
.DIR -PROMPT
.DOT -RD

Batch File Commands

ABORT -FOR.IN DO .PAUSE

AAUTOCD .GOTO REM
.BATECHO IF STOP
.CALL/,.RETURN INSERT -TEXT/
-ECHO KEY -ENDTEXT
.FLUSH NEXT

Security Commands

SIGNOFF
SSIGNON

MOS-D191
General Commands

Inveking Commands

With the exception of the command statements used in the CON-

FIG.SYSfile, all MOS commandsare shown in this manual with
preceding periods. When you first boot MOS, the requirement for the
preceding periods is turned off and you need not enter them.

When you enter a command, MOSfirst checks for an intrinsic com-

mandthat. is loaded in memory. If the commandis not found, MOS
then searches for an extrinsic command.If not found, the commandis
not invoked.

The .DOT commandlets you control the checking for a preceding

period with MOS commands. This commandlets you keep the MOS
command namesfrom being confused with files or executable
programs that have the same name. You may use the .DOT command
to turn on the requirement for the preceding periods. If you do so, you
should then always enter the preceding period when you enter a MOS
command.

If .DOT is on and you enter an intrinsic command without the preced-

ing period, MOSfirst looks on the current drive and directory to find
the command. MOSthen searches each directory defined in the cur-
rent path, looking for a .COM, .EXH, or .BATfile, in this order, with
the same nameas the command.If the commandis not found, MOS
will then look for an intrinsic commandleaded in memory. Invoking
an intrinsic command without the preceding period may therefore
cause a slower response.

If .DOT is on and you enter an extrinsic command without the preced-

ing period, MOSchecksfor the existence of an extrinsic command
first. If not found MOSthen looks for an intrinsic command.

DOT

Each time you boot MOS, the .DOT commanddefaults to OFF, and
MOSwill not expect a period to precede commands. MOSwill look for
intrinsic and extrinsic commandsin the correct order.

The form for the .DOT commandis:

DOT fonloff}

4~ G MOS-D191
If you want the preceding periods to be required with commands you
may enter the .DOT on command. You should then enter the period
with all MOS commands, but not the command statements used in
the CONFIG.SYSfile.

You may place the .DOT on commandin your AUTOEXEC.BATfileif

you always want the preceding period required. Enter .DOT with no
operandsto display the current setting of the .DOT command.

Understanding Command Conventions

Every command in MOShasa specific purpose, and different options

that may be used when the commandis invoked. To help you under-
stand the way commandsare presented, several conventions have
been developed. Theyare:

COMMAND all command namesthroughout this manual are

shown in capital letters. Intrinsic commandsare al-
ways in memory and never require a preceding drive
and path. Extrinsic commands require a preceding
drive letter and/or path only if not included with the
.PATH command in the AUTOEXEC.BATfile, and if
the commandis not at the current drive and/or direc-
tory.

d: the drive letter may be included before a command(in

the path) to tell MOS where the commandis located.
The d: is included with the operands of the command,
only when a drive maybe part of the command.

delimiter delimiters are used to separate a series of operands in

a command. A delimiter may be a comma, a semi-
colon, an equal sign, a tab, a space or a backslash.
The command form includes the delimiters that are
valid for that command.

dirname if a specific directory nameis required in a command,

it is represented in the commandform as dirname.

editing keys when entering a commandat the system prompt, you

may use any of the editing keys explainedin thefirst
chapterof this manual.

MOS-DLO1 4<7
General Commands

filename includesa drive letter if not the default drive, the

path if not the current directory, and the nameof the
file includingthefile extension. For example, a
filename entered as an operand could be:

DAPAYROLLIHAROLD\PRMENU.BAS

If D is the default drive and HAROLD is the current

directory, the filename could be PRMENU.BAS.

operand all available operands are shown with each command.

An operand may be a driveletter, a filename, a switch
that sets a commandto process a certain way, or
some other parameter. Some commands havea large
choice of operands. In the examples shown under
"Form:" the text of some commands may wrap to the
following line. However, when you type the operands
for a commandat your keyboard, DO NOTforce the
operands to wrap to a newline. The operands for
some commands are required with the command and
someare optional.

\path\ the \path\ is included in a command form only when

a path is required, and includesall levels of direc-
tories in the path, and optionally a drive designation.
For example, \ACCT\PAYROLL\HAROLD is the
path to access the directory HAROLD.Thepath could
also be C:\ACCT\PAYROLL\HAROLDto indicate a
drive other than the current drive. A path may or
may not require the ending backslash, depending on
the individual commandform.

wildcard wildcards may be used to represent that a position in

the filename may contain any characters. Some com-
mandsallow the use of wildcards within filenames
and some commands do not. A question mark (?) indi-
cates that a single position may contain any character
as long asall other positions match. An asterisk (*) in-
dicates that the current position andall following posi-
tions may contain any characters.

MOS-DISL
{} operands enclosed in braces{ } are optional. If an
operandis not enclosed in braces, the operandis re-
quired.

| the vertical bar indicates that there is a choice of

operandsfor a position, but. only one of those
operands may be entered. For example, on| off indi-
cates that you may enter either onor off as the
operand for that position in the command form.

means that you may repeat an operandor series of

operands in the command statement.

indicates that there are lines that follow containing

the same type of information,or that there are lines
omitted in an example that are not necessary to the
example.
Boy ok
ut Redirection

MOSlets you redirect the input or output of commands. For example,

the .TYPE commandnormally sends output to the video screen.
There may be times when you wantto redirect the output of the
.TYPE commandto a printer. This will give you a hard copy ofthefile
contents.

There are several conventionsfor redirection of input and output that

you need to understand. The term "standard input" usually refers to
input from the keyboard, but can also mean input from file or
device. The video screen is the normaldestination for "standard out-
put".

There are four ways to accomplish redirection with MOS. They are:

| This is the pipe symbol. It instructs MOSto redirect the

standard output of the commandthatprecedesit, and use
that output as the standard input of the commandthatfol-
lowsit.

< The less than symbol is preceded by a command, andtells

MOSto usethefile or device that follows the symbol as the
standard input for that.command.
General Commands

> The greater than symbolis preceded by a command,andtells

MOSto usethefile or device that follows the symbol as the
standard output for that command.If thefile specified for a
standard output does not exist, MOSwill create it. If the file
does exist, standard output will overwrite any information
the file contains.

>> Two greater than symbols redirect standard output and ap-
pendit to the information in an existingfile.If the file
specified for standard output does not exist, MOS will create
it.

There are many ways you can use redirection. For example, the stand-
ard output of the .DIR commandis a directory listing on the video
screen. The following commandwill redirect the output of the direc-
tory listing to a printer.

.IR > LPT:

The following example tells MOSto use the standard outputof the ——
directory command as the standard input for the sort command.

DIR | .MSORT

Theresult is a display of the sorted directory to the video screen. You

mayfurtherredirect the output to the .MORE commandsothat the
standard output displays 24 lines at a time. The commandsto ac-
complish this are:

.DIR | .MSORT | .MORE

Redirection lets you predefine the input for a specific command. In

the next example, redirection is used for input and output.

.MSORT < DATAFILE > NEWDATA

The .MSORT commandis using the file named DATAFILEfor stand- —

ard input. .MSORTwill sort the data in this file in ascendingal-
phabetic order, beginning at column 1 to the endof the record. The
resulting data is sent to the file named NEWDATAasthe standard
output of .MSORT. Other examplesof I/O redirection are given with
the individual MOS commandexplanations.

4-10 MOS-D1 Si
 peel
-ADDDEVlets you add a device driver at any time. You may make a
driver active on the whole system or only in a specific task.

Type: Extrinsic

Form: sADDDEYV niidevice

Operands:

n enter a number representing the amount of memory in

kilobytes that is required by this device driver to run with
MOS.(1 for 1024 bytes, 2 for 2048 bytes,etc.)

t use the t operand instead of n if you want the device to be

active only in the task in which the .ADDDEV command
is being entered.

davice enter the device driver name and extension, with any buff-
er size or other operands, as you would normally enter it
in the CONFIG.SYSfile. Include the drive and directory
if not the current defaults. (Do not include the DEVICE=
command statement with the .ADDDEV command.)

Explanation:

You may add a device at any time by invoking the .ADDDEV com-
mandat the system prompt. For example, if you want to add a pipe
device, you could enter the following command:

AADDDEYV 2,SPIPE.SYS PIPE3,2048

MOSwill check to be sure there is sufficient memory to run the

PIPES device before addingit. If not, MOS will display a message.

You mayuse the t operand to invoke a task-specific device driver,

thusisolating other tasks from theeffects of the driver. For example,
the commandform:

MOS-DLO1 4-11
General Commands

would add the device driver only in the task in which the command
was entered. Note that a separate copy of the driver must be installed
in each task that requires accessto it.
ALIAS

-ALIASlets you substitute a drive letter for a directory name. You

may find ALIAS useful as a shortcut to access directories that are
removed from the root directory by several levels. You may assign
floppy disk drive letters A: and B:, but not an existing hard disk drive
letter such as C:.

Type: Extrinsic.

Form: ALIAS of foidirname)i/o}

Operands:

a: enter the drive letter you want to substitute for a direc-

tory name. This must be a drive letter that is not used to
access a physical or logical hard disk on your computer.

a: enter the letter of the drive where the directory you are
substituting resides, If you do not enter a driveletter,
MOSusesthe current default drive in the substitution.

dirname enter the nameofthe directory you are substituting. You

may enter the complete nameof the directory from the
root, or only a portion of the directory name. If you do not
enter a directory name, MOS uses the current directory
as the substitution directory.

/a delete aliases. If an existing alias drive is specified with

the command,only that alias drive will be deleted. If no
drive is specified MOSwill ask if you wantto delete all
aliases.

Explanation:

You may use .ALIASto shortcut the access to a directory which is

several layers removed from the root directory. For example, you may
have a directory similar to the following that is four levels from the
root:

\we\mywpimyfiles\mywork

MOS-D191 4-13
General Commands

You may use the .ALIAS command to assign access to the MYWORK
directory with a drive letter. If drive letter E is not used to access a
drive on the computer, you could enter the .ALIAS commandasfol- o.
lows:

ALIAS e@: ci\wp\mywp\myfiles\mywork

If drive C is your current drive and MYWORK is the currentdirec-

tory, you could enter the following command and MOSwill use the
current drive and directory for the substitution:

AUAS @:

Whenthe substitution is complete, MOS will display a message

similar to the following:

If you enter a directory with or without a drive that MOS cannot

trace back to the root, MOS will display a message similar to thefol-
lowing:

If you attempt to assign an alias to an existing drive (other than A:or

B:), MOSwill display a message similar to the following:

eo

If your current drive is C, and your current directory is \wp\mywp,

you could enter the following commandto assign an alias to the next
level of a directory:

ALIAS F: myfiles

4-14 MOS-D1L9L
Whenthe substitution is complete, MOSwill display the complete
substitution as follows:

To see if an .ALIASis active on your computer, you may type .ALIAS

with no operands and press ENTER. If no substitution is active, MOS
displays the following message:

If one or more substitutions are active, MOS will display a message

similar to the following:

You maydelete previously assigned aliases by using the /d operand.

If an existing alias drive is specified along with the /d operand, only
that alias drive will be deleted. For example, the following command
will delete the assigned alias for drive letter E:

ALIAS E: /d

You maydelete all existing alias assignments by entering the com-

mandwithout specifying any drive, as follows:

ALIAS fd

MOSwill then promptwith:

Delete all allases? (Y/N)

Responding with Y will cause all existing aliases to be deleted.

MOS-D191 4-15
General Commands

BREAK

-BREAK instructs MOSto check for CTRL - BRK key sequencesis-

sued from the keyboard during processing. The control break key se-
quence instructs MOSto halt processing.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: BREAK onloff

Operands:

on turns on control break checking. MOSwill check for the

CTRL - BRK key sequence.

olf turns off control break checking. This is the default state
of .BREAK each time MOSis booted.

Explanation:

You may press CTRL - BRK, or CTRL - C to halt processing of a pro-

gram or a command. When .BREAK is set to OFF only a few program
calls are sensitive to .BREAK,i.e. control break checking is only done
when output is written to the screen or printer, or when input is read
from the keyboard. When .BREAK is ON, most calls are sensitive to
.BREAK,i.e. most program’s requests of MOSto carry out functions
can be interrupted by pressing CTRL - BRK or CTRL C.

You may turn .BREAK on by typing:

BREAK. ON

Typing .BREAK with no parameters displays the current setting for

-BREAK.For example:

If .BREAK is on, you have a greater opportunity to break out of a pro-

gram. However, you should note that when .BREAK is on, your sys-
tem may run a little slower because every operating system call will
check for .BREAK.

4-16 MOS-D1L81
.CD sets the directory that will be used as your default directory.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: CD ipath

Operands:

(path enter the nameof the directory to which you want to

change. You mayenter twoperiods(..) to change to the
parent of the current directory.

Explanation:

You maycreate several levels of directories in MOS. To change from

one directory to another, you may enter the complete directory name
while at the root directory as follows:

CO MYTEXT\MYFILES\LETTERS

If you are not at the root, and you want to change to the LETTERS
directory, you must enter a preceding slash with thefirst level of
directory in the path. For example:

CD \MYTEXT\MYFILES\LETTERS

If you were currently in the MYFILESdirectory, you could access the

LETTERS directory without any preceding directory levels or the
backslash. For example:

GO LETTER
©

oe

To move from the LETTERSdirectory to the MYFILES directory, you

mayenter two periods to indicate that you want to move to the
parent of the current directory. For example:

D.,

MOS-DI9L 4017
General Commands

You may moveto the root directory by entering only the backslash,
regardless of the level of directory you are in. For example, if you are
currently in the LETTERS directory, the following commandreturns
you to the root directory on your current drive:

CD \

4-18 MOS-DI91
CLS

.CLSclears the current display on the video screen, and positions the
system promptat the top of the screen.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: CLS

Explanation:

The .CLS commandclears any display currently on the video screen,

creating a clean screen. The MOS system prompt will appear on the
first line at the top of the screen.

You may want to include the .CLS commandin your

AUTOEXEC.BATfile so you always start with a clean screen when
you boot your system.If you call up a menu in your
AUTOEXEC.BAT,it is a good idea to place a .CLS command prior to
the menucall. This causes the screen to clear so that only the menu
displays when you boot your computer.

MOS-DI9L 4-49
General Commands

COMMAND

Invoking .COMMAND at the system prompt lets you moveout of the

current commandprocessor leaving it dormant, and move to a new
layer of the commandprocessor. The new layer carries a copy of the
environmentwith it. The environmentis a reference area in memory
for frequently accessed strings, such as the prompt and path. You
may find .COMMAND usefulto test strings of data that you want to
set into the environment. You may then exit from this layer of the
commandprocessor by typing .EXIT at the prompt and pressing
ENTER. You will then return to the previous layer where the com-
mandprocessor’s environment has not changed.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: GOMMAND far}/ipath} fe siring| jo}

Operands:

i
ae enter the letter of the drive that contains the new com-
mandprocessor, or omit it to use the default drive.

pain enter the directory that contains the new command

processor you want to invoke, or omit to use the current
directory.

Je string lets you pass a string that follows the /c operand and ex-
ecute that string in the new layer of the commandproces-
sor and then return to the current command processor.
The string to execute may be a commandor a batchfile.If
a batch file, do not enter the .BAT extension as a part of
the string.

/p makesthe new layer of the commandprocessorper-

manent in memory. You cannot exit back to the current
layer when you use the /p operand. You must reboot your
computer to remove this new permanentlayer. If you
want to run a startup batchfile in the new layer, you
mustfirst enter a SET STARTBAT=filename command.
The "filename" could be AUTOEXECor any batchfile of
your choice. This batch file must be located at the root
directory of your boot drive.

MOS-D1S1
domed
easy
 Explanation:

You.may type .COMMAND with no operands at the system prompt to

move to a new layer of the commandprocessor. The COMSPEC=
statement in the current environmentidentifies the new command
processorthat is loaded. Invoking a duplicate commandprocessor,
whether the current one or a new user-created processor, reduces
available memory. If you invoke .COMMAND with the /p operand,
the new layer becomes permanent.

MOS-D191 4-21
General Commands

-COMPEILE
ao
-COMPFILE comparesthe contents of twofiles on a byte-to-byte
basis. Any discrepancies in the files are displayed on the video screen.

Type: Extrinsic.

Form: SCOMPFILE filename flename

Operands:

ilename enter the nameofthefirst file you want to compare,in-

cluding the drive letter and/or path if not the current
defaults. If wildcards are used .COMPFILE will operate
on more than onesetoffiles.

fiename enter the nameofthe secondfile you want to compare,in-

cluding the drive letter and/or pathif not the current
defaults. If wildcards are usedall or part of thefirst file’s
namewill be used to form the secondfile’s name.

Explanation:

.COMPFILE lets you compare the contents of onefile to that of

anotherfile one byte at a time. You may want to comparethe con-
tents of a file you copied to be sure the copy was successful. For ex-
ample,if you copied a file from a floppy diskette to your hard disk you
could enter the following command to comparethefiles:

SOMPFILE AIMYFILE.TXT C:MYPILE.TAT

The following message displays as the comparison is running:

Aw Qe MOS-DISL
 cD
If any discrepancies are found, MOSwill display a message similar to
the following:

The position of the discrepancyis expressed as "0000000H", meaning

the hexadecimaloffset position in thefirst file. If there are no dis-
crepancies, MOS displays the following message when the com-
parison is complete:

If wildcards are used in the first operand .COMPFILE will operate on

more than onesetof files. For example:

SCOMPFILE \UTILSY.BAT TEST.BAT

will compare all batch files found in \UTILS with the file TEST.BAT
in the current directory.

If wildcards are used in the second operandall or part ofthefirst

file’s name will be used to form the secondfile’s name. For example:

<COMPFILE JEFF.LTR \WP\.*

will compare JEFF.LTR in the current directory with

\WP\JEFF.LTR.

An example in which only part of the nameis carried over may be:

SGOMPPILE ABC ??DE

MOs-DIL9l 4+ 23
General Commands

This will compare ABC with ABDEin the current directory. The ?’s
causes the corresponding charactersof the first operand to be carried
over to the second operand.

Wild card characters may be used in both operands at the sametime,

for example:

.COMPFILE \UTILS\.BAT *.*

will compare each batchfile in \UTILS with any corresponding batch

file of the same name in the current directory.

4-24. MOS-DL9L
COPY

The .COPY commandlets you create a copyof a file or a group of

files. You may copy a file and give the copy a different name, or copy
the file and give it the same nameona different drive or in a dif-
ferent directory. You may copy several files into onefile, or you may
copya file from or to a device. .COPY mayalso be used to assign or
changethe security classof a file.

Somerules apply to all uses of .COPY. Wildcards may be used in both

the original and new file names. .COPY preserves the user ID and
dates andtimesof creation and last update in the newfile. The
security class is preserved unless you include the "/c" operand in the
command,

Twooptional operands may be entered with the original and the new
file to accommodate both ASCII and binary files. The /a operandis
used with ASCIIfiles. If/a is used with the original file, MOS copies
to the endoffile character, not the physical endofthefile. If /a is
used with the new file, MOS places an endoffile character at the end
of the copy. MOS uses a CTRL Z as an endof file character, The /b
operandis used with binary files. If/b is used with the original file,
MOSignores any endoffile characters. If/b is used with the newfile,
MOSwill not place an endoffile character on the newfile.

Type: Intrinsic,

Form: COPY filename f/al/ 6] {d'\pathi}{filename} f/a| /b}

iv fel fen| /e-}

Operands:

filename enter the nameofthefile to be copied. You may include a

drive and pathif the original file is not at the current
drive or directory.

/a copies to the endof file character (CTRL Z), on the

original.

(2 copies to the physical endoffile on the original.

MOS-DI91 4-25
General Commands

d:\path| enter the drive and/or path to contain the newfile, if you
want them to be different from the current drive and/or
directory.

filename enter the name you wantto give the copy, or omit to use
_ the same nameastheoriginal file.

/@ on the new file, adds an endoffile character (CTRL Z).

/o on the newfile, omits placing an endoffile character

(CTRL Z).

iv verifies each aspect of the copy operation to be sure the in-

formation may be read from the copy.

fon enter /en, where n is a security class of A to Z, to assign a

specific security class to thefile.

[e- enter /c- to remove an existing security class, and assign

the file a blank class.

je enter /c to change the class of the file to your current

default output class.

Explanation:

You maycopya file to a different drive and directory without specify-

ing a secondfilename. In this case, MOS will assign the original
filename to the new file. For example:

COPY merne.doc d:\work\

If you specify a new directory for the copy, that directory mustal-
ready exist. If it does not, MOStreats the directory name as the
nameof the newfile.

You may copya file at your current drive and directory to another
drive and give the new file the same name with the following com-
mand:

COPY memo.doe a:

Aw 26 MOS-DILSL
You may copya file from a different drive and directory to your cur-
rent drive and directory and give the new file the same nameas the
original file. The following commandillustrates how this may be
done, using C:\ as the current drive and directory.

COPY a:letier.doc

Device Input/Output

.COPY mayalso be used to copy input from a device or output to a

device. However, do not copy input or output from serial ports be-
cause there is no control over the handshaking transmission of data.
Devices are explained in the Configuration chapter of this manual.
The commandform to copy input from a deviceis:

COPY DEV filename

DEVis the nameof the device from which you want copy input. The
device name may be CONfor the main console, PRN for a printer, or
a user defined name for a MOSpipethat allows you to copy charac-
ters from one partition to another. For example, you mayuse thefol-
lowing .COPY commandtocreate a file from keyboard input.

COPY CON testtfile.doc

When you press ENTER, the TESTFILE.DOCfile is created. Any-

thing you then type at the console is placed in the file. When thefile
is complete, press CTRL - Z to create an endoffile character. MOS
will then display:

You mayalso copy to a device with the following form of .COPY:

COPY filename DEV

In this example, DEVis treated the sameasif it were a file. For ex-
ample, you may enter:

COPY testiile.doc PRN

MOS-D191 4-27
General Commands

This will send the TEXTFILE.DOCfile to the printer. You may also
send direct keyboard input straight to the printer with the following
command:

GOPY CON PRN

File Concatenation

There is a special form of .COPY that lets you copy and combine a
groupoffiles. This is called concatenation. The command form for
COPYis:

COPY file1.doc + file2.doc + file3.doc. bigfile.doc

Note the use of the + symbol between thefiles that are to be com-
bined. The new file, BIGFILE.DOC contains the contents of the con-
catenatedfiles in the order you enter them. If no nameis specified for
the copy, MOS defaults to the first file in the command and addsthe
otherfiles to it in the order you enter them. For example:

COPY filet.doc + file2.dec + file3.doc

This commandcopies the contents of FILE2.DOC and FILE3.DOC,

into FILE1.DOC. The contents of FILE2.DOCis added at the endof
FILE1.DOC, and then the contents of FILE3.DOCis added.

Whenthe copy in the previous example is complete, MOSwill display

a message indicating the numberoffiles created as a result of the
copy. If you concatenated several files into one file, the message will
reflect that one file was created. If a new file is being created by a
user whois signed on to security, the newfile will carry the default
output class of the user who invoked the .COPY command.

You may concatenate with global file names. For example:

COPY “asm + “ist “tot

The orderof the first item in the series offiles controls what will hap-
pen during the concatenation. In this example, MOS will search for
thefirst file with an .ASM extension. If A.ASM is found, then MOS
looks for a file named A.LST.If it is found, AAASM and A.LST are
written to a file MOS names A.TOT. If MOSdoes notfind a file
named A.LST, then only A.ASM is written to A.TOT.

4~28 MOS-DIOL
 In either case, the new file named A.TOTis closed and MOSbegins
looking for the next file with an extension of .ASM. This continues
oo until MOScannotfind any morefiles with an .ASM extension.

Be careful of how you concatenate with global file names. If you enter
the following command, MOSwill copy the contentof all files with a
.DOC extension to a new file named X.BIG.

<GOPY *.doc x.big

However, the following commandcould cause problems:

.GOPY *.dee x.dec

If a file named X.DOC does not currently exist, MOS will concatenate
all files with a .DOC extension into the newfile. If X.DOC does exist,
and MOSfindsit as thefirst file, the concatenation will take place. If
X.DOCis not thefirst file found, when MOSdoesfind X.DOCit ap-
pears as an attempt to write a file on top of itself. MOS will con-
a catenate thefile, but will display the following warning message to
let you know that something strange occurred during processing:

You may control this situation by using the following commandto in-
struct MOSto use the file named X.DOCas the newfile, and to con-
catenate otherfiles with a .DOC extension into the newfile.

GOPY x.doc + "dec

Changing File Dates and Times

The .COPY command hasan operand (+,,) that lets you change the
a creation and updated date andtimeofa text file to the current date
and time. For example, you may changethe last updated and creation
date and timeof a file named CONTRACT.SAVby entering thefol-
lowing command:

COPY contract.sav +,,

MOS-D191 4-29
General Commands

You may include this operand with the .COPY commandto assign the
current date and timeto only the new copyof file. For example:

SOPY xdee+,, b

Copying ASCII and Binary Files

If the file you want to changeis not a text file, you must enter the /b
operand. For example:

GOPY help.com jb +,,

If you copy onefile to anotherfile, the /b is the default to copy the en-
tire content of a file. MOS will ignore any endoffile characters
(CTRL Z) in the file. For example, the following commanduses /b as
the default.

COPY ** As

If you concatenate files, the default is /a because MOS assumes the

files to concatenate are text files. For example, the default for the fol-
lowing commandis /a:

COPY texti.doc + texiz.doc newtext.doc

Note that you may enter /a or /b before the namesof any files in the
copy so that the option applies to all the files. For example, the follow-
ing command uses/a to ensurethatall files with an .ASM extension
are copied only up to an endoffile character (CTRL Z):

COPY fa*.asin new.asm

Whena device (CON, PRN,etc.) is used in a .COPY command, MOS

uses /a as the default. You may include /b for a target device, but not
for the source device. For example:

COPY /b CON x.dec

Because the /b operandis included with a device as the source, MOS

will display the following error message:

4 30 MOS-DI191
Copying Secured Files

Normally, you may copya file or group of files within the current
drive and directory only if you give the copy a new name. However,
you maycopya file with the same namewithin the current drive and
directory if you use the /c operand to assign a different security class
to the file.

If you enter only an original filename and the /c operand, MOS

rewrites the file back to disk using the same name,butthefile is con-
verted to the security class specified after the /c. For example, MOS
allows the following command to assign security class A to thefile:

COPY contractdoc /ca

MOS would not allow this command withoutthe /c, because it would
be an attempt to write a newfile on top of an original file. Note that
you may only copy a securedfile if you have an accesslevel thatal-
lows you to access the class assigned to thefile.

If you are currently signed on to security, you mayassign thefile

your current default class by entering the /c operand withoutthelet-
ter of a security class. For example, if your current user default out-
put class is B, the following commandwill secure the file named
FORMS.DOC with security class B:

SCOPY forms.doc js

You may change a securedfile to an unsecuredfile by copyingthefile

with a/c- operand. This operandassigns thefile a blank security
class to indicate thatthefile is not secured. For example:

COPY memo.doc jc-

Thefile named MEMO.DOCis written back to the disk in an un-

secured state.

MOSs-D191 4- BU
General Commands

DATE

-DATE sets the MOS system date in the format defined by the
COUNTRY commandstatement in your CONFIG.SYSfile. This is
the internal date that is known to MOS.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: DATE {mm-dd-yy}

Operands:

mim-dd-yy enter the date in the form used on your computer. The
default form for MOS is mm (month) dd (day) and yy
(year).

Explanation:

If your computer does not have a perpetual calendar, you may want
to include .DATE without an operand in your AUTOEXEC.BATfile.
Each time you boot your system, MOSwill prompt you to set the date.

You mayset the current date by entering the .DDATE commandat the
system prompt, followed by the correct date. For example:

ATE 10-21-87

You may type .DATE at the system prompt without any operandsto
display the current date that is known to the system, and to optional-
ly enter a new date. The date display appears similar to the following:

You may enter a new current date, or press ENTER without making
an entry to leave the date unchanged.

4 32 MOS-D191
DIR

.DIR displays the contents of a directory. There are several display op-
tions that let you list specific directories, sort by file name, sort by file
extension, sort by creation date and time,or sort by size. Only one
sort option at a time can be active. You may select to include hidden
and system files in the display. You may choose additional options for
a condensed format, or to pause between pages.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: .DIR {lpath} fdli/sni /sel /sdl/ss}fa]fw}/p}

Operands:

\path enter the complete nameof the directory to display if not

the current directory, and/or current drive.

fa includes only directories in the display.

fsn sorts the display alphabetically by file name.

/8@ sorts the display alphabetically by file extension.

{sé sorts the display by date and timelast updated, with the
oldest date and time appearingfirst,

{88 sorts the display by file size, with the smallest file appear-
ingfirst.

fa includes hidden and system files in thelist.

iw displays only the namesof thefiles in the directory in an

80-column wide format.

/p displays the directory 24 lines (one screen) at a time.

MOS-DISI 4-33
General Commands

Explanation:

You may display the contents of the current directory on the current
drive by entering the command:

.DIR

You may display the contents of a different directory by including the

directory name in the .DIR command.If the directory is on a different
drive, include the drive letter with the directory name. For example:

DIR DAWORKS

To display only the directories within the selected directory, enter the
/d operandin the command.

You mayincludeonly a specific file in the directory by entering the

nameof the file to display. You may also use the wildcard characters
to display specific groupsof files. For example, the following com-
mand will display only thefiles in the current directory that have an
extension of .DOC.

DIR *.DOC

There are four sort options you mayselect for displaying the direc-
tory. Only one sort option maybe active at a time. The following is an
example of a directory displayedbyfile size.

4-34 MOS-DIL9L
 Thefirst column displays the file name and extension. Thefile.size in
bytes is then shown. The date and timea file was last updated ap-
om,
pears next. For a directory entry, the word directory always appears
in this column.

Following the time are four columns that display the attribute set-
tings of thefile. The first column displays an asterisk if the archive
attribute is set. The second column displays an if the read-only at-
tribute is set, and the fourth column displays an for anyfile that
has a security class. If the /a operandis included in the command, the
third column displays an H if thefile is a hiddenfile.

If security is used, the next two columnsdisplay the security class as-
signed to the file, and the ID of the user who created thefile. The last
two columnsdisplay the date and timethefile was created.

The last line of the display shows the disk ID if one has been as-
signed. The total numberof bytes used bythefiles in the display ap-
pears next, along with the total numberoffiles in the display and the
remaining bytes available on the drive.

MOS-DL9L 4-38
General Commands

~DIRMAP

-DIRMAP scansa disk and displays the directories on that disk along
with the current numberoffiles and total bytes used in each direc-
tory. The directories display in the order they are found on the disk.

Type: Extrinsic.

Form: .DIRMAP f\path}{/i}{/a/

Operands:

ipath you may enterthe letter of the drive and/or the nameof a
specific directory to display, or omit this operand to begin
the display at the root directory on the current drive.

fi enter the /f option to include the namesofthefiles in each

directory in the display. Omit this option if you don’t
wantto display file names.

fa enter the /a option to includea list of only thosefiles in

the directories which have the archive attribute set.

Explanation:

Entering the .DIRMAP command without any operands displays the

directories on the default drive, beginning at the root directory. Sub-
sequent directories are listed in the order they are found on the
default drive. The following is an example of the .DIRMAP display:

4= 36 MOS-DiOl
¢
feng
o
You mayusethe path option to displayall levels of a specific direc-
tory. For example, the following commandwill display the WORK
directory as well as the WORK\JIM directory on the default drive:

.DIRMAP \WORK

To include the nameof eachfile in a specific directory on a specific

drive, the commandcould be:

<DIRMAP GCAWORKWIM ff

The /a option is useful in determining whatfiles on your disk have

been changed since the last time you made a backup copy with the
-EXPORT command. The following command:

.DIRMAP CAWORK ja

would list all files in the WORK directory of the C drive that have the
archive attribute set. (Changing a file sets the archive attribute,
while running .EXPORTclears the archive attribute.)

If you havea lot of directoriesor files to display, you may want to use
the .MORE commandto display only 24 lines at a time. An example
of the .DIRMAP command used with .MORE could be:

DIRMAP \WORKWIM ff | .MORE

MOS-DLOL 4-37
General Commands

-DISKCOPY
oo
-DISKCOPYcopies the entire contents of one diskette onto another
diskette. If the original diskette contains the boot sector, it is also
copied onto the destination diskette. .DISKCOPY workswith either a
one- or two-diskette drive computer.

Type: Extrinsic.

Form: DISKCOPY of a:

Operands:

a: enter the letter of the drive that contains the original dis-
kette you want to copy.

dy enter the letter of the drive that contains the destination

diskette on which the copy is to be placed.

Explanation:

.DISKCOPYproduces a copy of the original diskette. Thefiles and

directories on the copy appear in the sameorder as they do on the
original. If you have two diskette drives, you may copy the contents of
a diskette in one drive to a diskette in the other drive by entering the
following command:

-DISKCOPY a: b:

A message appears prompting you to place the original diskette to

copy in drive A, and to place the diskette to contain the copy in drive
B. You could copy a diskette in drive B to a diskette in drive A by
entering the following command:

.DISKGOPY b: a:

If you only have onediskette drive, you will need to swap the original
and destination diskettes in that one drive until the entire copy is
complete. The commandto copy a diskette when you have only one
diskette driveis:

DISKGOPY a a:

4-38 MOS-ID1 91
MOSwill prompt you to place the original diskette in drive A. When
you press ENTER, MOScopies as muchofthe original diskette as pos-
sible into memory, and then prompts you to removetheoriginal and
place the destination diskette in the drive. When you press ENTER
this time, MOScopies the original content in memory onto the des-
tination diskette.

If the entire contents of the original diskette could not be copied into
memory in one pass, a prompt appears instructing you to return the
original diskette to the drive. You will be prompted to continue swap-
ping diskettes until the content of the original diskette is completely
copied onto the destination diskette.

If you are copying a 360K diskette on a single drive computer,thefol-

lowing prompt appearsif the diskette was copied in one pass:

You may enter Y to make anothercopyofthis diskette. If you enter

N,or for any other type the media, the following prompt always ap-
pears:

If you want to make a copy of another diskette, enter Y. If not, enter

N andyoureturn to the system prompt.

MOS-D191 4-39
General Commands

-DISKID
ao,
-DISKID lets you assign an 11-character nameto a diskette or hard
disk. The .DISKIDis displayed by the .DIR and .VERIFY commands.

Type: Extrinsic.

Form: DISKID jatname}

Operand:

a: enter the letter of the drive that contains the disk you
want to name,if not on the current drive.

name enter up to 11 characters for the .DISKID name.

Explanation:

You may enter the .DISKID commandand assign a nameas part of

the command form. MOSassigns the nameto the disk as the .DIS- o—~
KID andthen returnsto the system prompt.

If you enter the .DISKID command without a name, MOSdisplays

whetheror not the disk already contains a name. For example,if the
disk does not contain a name,the following message appears:

If the disk contains a name, the following message appears:

&- 4D MOSs-DI91
 You may type a different name, or press ENTER and MOSdisplays a
message asking if you want to delete the current name. You must
respond with a Y (yes) or an N (no) to continue.

NOTE: Never use .DISKID,or any other method, to change the Disk
ID of any .EXPORTdisk. Doingso will render .IMPORTinoperable
and you will not be able to restore the data from that .EXPORTset.

# ™.

MOS-DI8L Am Al
General Commands

LENVSIZE

The .ENVSIZE commandlets you specify the minimum size of your

environment. You may use this commandto reserve space for your en-
vironment prior to loading any resident programs.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: -ENVSIZE nnnn

Operand:

nanny enter the numberof bytes you want to reserve for the en-
vironment. If you do not reserve the environmentsize,
MOSuses 128 bytes.

Explanation:

You must specify a size operand as part of the .ENVSIZE statement.

The normal system default for environment space is 128 bytes. Be-
cause the .ENVSIZE statement reserves the memory for your environ-
ment, it is ideally included in your AUTOEXEC.BAT.For example:

.ENVSIZE 256

-ENVSIZE mustbe specified prior to loading any resident programs,

such as .SPOOL,the resident program for the MOS Print Spooler.If
you do not specify the .ENVSIZE, you may find the space you could
reserve for your environment diminished.

You may invoke the .ENVSIZE commandat the system prompt to

replace a previously invoked .ENVSIZE. The new .ENVSIZE com-
mand will overwrite the space allocation you made with a .ENVSIZE
statement in your AUTOEXEC.BATfile.

4A MOS-DLOL
 HRASE
aosy,
.ERASEdeletesa file or group offiles from a disk.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: .ZRASE [\path} filename} {/v | /y}

Operands:

filename the nameofthefile to be erased. Include the drive and

directory if not the current defaults. Wildcards are per-
mitted in the filename.

iV displays a verification promptthat lets you select

whether or not to erase eachfile.

i enters a Wea"y" tt response to the "Eraseall files" prompt when

you delete the entire contents of a directory.
ett

Explanation:

You may use the /v option with .ERASEto display a verification

prompt andselectively delete files. For example, the following com-
mandwill find files with an extension of .BAK, and displays the
verification prompt with eachfile found:

ERASE *.BAK jv

MOSwill display the following verification prompt:

You may enter a Y (yes) to erasethisfile, or enter an N (no) to skip

this file. MOS then displays the promptfor the next file it finds with
an extension of .BAK.

MOS-DI191 4-43
General Commands

The following commanddeletesall files in the current directory:

ERASE *.*

MOSwill display the following prompt whenit finds this command:

You may enter Y (yes) to erase all files, or enter N (no) to return to
the system prompt.

You may include the /y operand with the commandto eraseall files
without displaying the verification prompt.

NOTE: You may also use the command.DELto delete files.

4 44 MOS-DL9L
HXCEPT

-EXCEPT DOlets you excludea file or a groupoffiles from a com-

mand, You may use .EXCEPT DO with a commandor with a batch
file. You may also use .EXCEPT DO with any programsor applica-
tions that use filename operands rather than operating directly on
the disk. Be careful using .EXCEPT DO becauseit offers a global
functionality with destructive commands. You may want to preview
what you'll be deleting or erasing prior to invoking the command. .EX-
CEPT CANCELmaybe used to cancel theEXCEPT command when
it is used in a batchfile, and free the file or group offiles for use with
other commands.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: EXCEPT (flename ...) DO cammand| baifile

EXCEPT CANCEL

CANCEL Ifan .EXCEPT DOstatement is used within a batchfile,

you may cancel it with an .EXCEPT CANCELstatement.
This will free the files in theEXCEPT DO group for use
with other commandsin the batchfile.

Operands:

filename enter the nameofthefile or groupoffiles without a drive

letter or directory. All filenames must be enclosed in
parentheses. Wildcard characters are permitted in the
filename. You must enter a commaor space as a delimiter
between filenames. You may enter as many filenames as
space permits on the commandline. Do not enter a drive
or a path with any file namesyou enter in the group.

cemmand enter the command you want to perform on thefiles. You

mayenter any operands associated with the command,in-
cluding the drive and pathfor thefile or groupoffiles.

batfile enter the nameof the batchfile to perform on thefile or

group of files, but do not include the .BAT extension.

MOS-DIL LL 4-
5
s©
General Commands

Explanation:

You may use .EXCEPT DO to exclude a groupoffiles from a global a

command statement. For example:

EXCEPT (MYWORK.DOC TESTWORK.DOC) BO .COPY ** A:

In this example,all files except MYWORK.DOC and

TESTWORK.DOCwill be copied onto the diskette in drive A. You
may also use EXCEPT to limit the accessto files. For example:

EXCEPT ([MYWORK.DOC) DO WORDPROG

This command statement will invoke a word processor, and let you
edit any file except a file named MYWORK.DOC.

You may also use .EXCEPT DO to invoke a new commandprocessor

andlimit the files which may be accessed when the new command
processor is active. For example:

EXCEPT (DOC, *.TXT) DO COMMAND

This statement excludes files with .DOC and .TXT extensions from
the new commandprocessor.

NOTE: Be careful when you limit access to files. You may create files
excluded from an application or a new commandprocessor that may
already exist. Although it appears as if you are creating a newfile,
the existing file may be overwritten without your knowledge.

You may also use .EXCEPT DOto excludespecific files from a batch
file execution. For example:

EXCEPT (MYWORK.DOC TESTWORK.DOC) DO CLEAN

All files except MYWORK and TESTWORKwould be included when

CLEAN.BATis invoked. Thebatch file named CLEAN.BATcontains:

.CDIWORK.DIR
ERASE *.* fy
.CD\ASM.dir
ERASE ** fy

4-46 MOS-D1Ol
 NOTE: Be careful if you invoke a globally destructive batch file such
as this one. You may want to preview thefiles you'll be deleting. To
wo
preview thefiles, you could write CLEAN.BATasfollows:

onWORK.DIR
.DIR jwfp
-ECHO Erase thesefiles in WORK.DIR?
KEY %%a IN (y,n) DO GOTO pl%%a
iply
ERASE *.* <er/y
‘pin

Theuse of .KEY requires you to respond to the prompt. The key you
press as your response,either Y or N, determinesthe action that will
be taken. See .KEY for more information.

There may be times when you want to remove the .EXCEPT limita-
tion during the execution of a batch file. For example:

EXCEPT @.doe “ixt) DO FLIST

All files except those with an extension of .DOC and .TXT will be in-
cluded when FLIST.BATis invoked. The batch file named
FLIST.BAT includes:

.DIR
TEXT This displays a limited set of files based on the group
defined in the EXCEPT DO staternent.

AN SEL Q
EXCEPT DO «statamonat the t| ime this fie was invoked,

MOGS-DILO1 4~ 4D
General Commands

NOTE: The .EXCEPT CANCELstatement permanently removes the

.EXCEPT DOlimitation. For example, you may invoke a batch file
with the EXCEPT DOlimitation, and that batch file maycall a
nested batchfile. If the nested batch file contains a .EXCEPT CAN-
CEL statement, the limitation is removed for all further processing
within the nested batch file. This carries back to any processing
within the batch file from which the nestedfile was called.

You may couple the .EXCEPT statement with a ,ONLY statement to

further limit the effect of a command. For example:

ONLY (doc) DO .EXCEPT (special.doc) DO .EXPORT * A:

In this example, SPECIAL.DOCis excluded from the .EXPORT, but
all other .DOC files are included. In a situation like this, the order of
the .ONLY and .EXCEPT commanddoes not matter. The same effect
could have been achieved with:

EXCEPT (special.doc) DO .ONLY (@.dee) DO .EXPORT *.* A:

If the groups defined in the .EXCEPT and .ONLYstatements conflict,

nofiles will be found. For example:

ONLY (xdoc) DO .EXCEPT(*.doc) DO .EXPORT ** A:

4 AS MOS-DLOL
EXPORT
.EXPORTcreates a compressed copy of one or morefiles for backup
purposes. .EXPORTis similar to the .COPY command, butdatais
compressed and a headeris placed at the beginningof the exported
file. We recommendthat you use .EXPORTfor backingupfiles. Un-
like .COPY, .EXPORTwill spreadfiles across multiple diskettes. You
may reinstate exportedfiles only with the IMPORT command.

Type: Extrinsic.

Form: EXPORT jfosipath} a: i/s} {B:mm-da-yy} f/m] {/q] fal 2]

Operands:

d:\path| enter the nameofthefile or directory to export. Include

the drive letter and directory nameif not the current
defaults. Wildcards are permitted in the nameofthefile,
Defaults to the current drive and directory.

a: enter the letter of the drive that contains the target disk
on which the exported files are to be placed. Only a drive
letter may be specified, not a subdirectory.

/s begins the export for all files in the specified or default

directory, and continues to export all files in any following
levels of directories.

/D:mrn-dd-yy export only thosefiles with file dates after the

specified date. If not entered, defaults to exportingall
files regardless offile date.

ifm exports only files which have been modified since your
lastEXPORToperation,i.e. those files with the archive
attribute set. The archive attribute indicates thesefiles
have been modified since the last .EXPORToperation.

/9 enter alone for Query Mode. This mode ignores the com-
mand line syntax and prompts the user to enter the
desired .EXPORToperation instructions manually.

MOS-D191 4-49
General Commands

fa causes the exportedfiles to be appendedto any existing

files on the archive disk(s).

f? entered alone, displays a review of .EXPORT command

line sytax on the screen.

Explanation:

You can export files to any type of drive, but removable drives, such
as a removable cartridge or diskette, are recommended. Thediskettes
(or cartridges), must already be formatted. When you invoke the
-EXPORT command, a message similar to the following appears:

You mayentera Y to erase anyfiles that may exist on the first export
disk and begin the export operation. You may enter an N to exit the
.EXPORTandthe following message appears.

You may enter the /a operand to use the diskettes "as is" without eras-
ing any existing files. TheEXPORT commandwill append data to
any existing data on the archive disks without erasing any existing
files. If you invoke theEXPORT commandwiththe /a operand, a
message similar to the following appears:

4-50 MOS-D181
 MOSprompts you to change disks when exporting data that won’t fit
on one disk. If some space is available on the disk, MOS will copy as
oo
muchof thefile as the diskette can hold and then will continue copy-
ing thefile on the next diskette in the set. The archive attribute is
automatically removed from eachfile as it is exported. (See the
.FILEMODE command.)

Sometimes the end of an exported file will coincide with the end of a
disk’s space. .EXPORTwill create a directory entry with a zerofile
length for the next file to indicate that the .EXPORT sequence con-
tinues.

When an export operation spans multiple disks, be sure to write the

sequence numberon the label of each disk, since you'll be prompted
to insert them in order when running .[MPORT.

The .EXPORT commandnormally backs up only one directory at a

time. If you don’t specify a directory, MOS defaults to the current
directory. You can export files from all subsequent levels within a
directory by including the /s operand. For example, you may have
several levels of directories as follows:

\WP\BOBWUNEST\PROJECTT

To begin the .EXPORTwith directory BOB, and includeall files from

JUNE91 and PROJECT!in the export, you would enter:

EXPORT \WPIBOB\".” /s

You may export all files on a disk by using the asterisk wildcard. If
the root directory is the current default, you could enter the following
command:

This commandwill begin the export at the root directory, and export
all files from all directories on the default drive. The nameof eachfile
appears on the screen as it is being exported. When .EXPORTis com-
plete, a message similar to the following displays:
General Commands

This message includes information on how manyfiles were backed up

andto whichdrive.

If you want to make an .EXPORTset to supplement an existingset,

you can use the /m operand to backup only thosefiles that were
modified since your last .EXPORT set was made. Of course, if you
later need to import all of these files, you will have to run multiple
-IMPORToperations- - one for each .EXPORTset. When doingso,al-
ways import the oldest set first so that the newerfiles overwrite the
older ones.

If you forget the commandline syntax for .EXPORT, you can enter oo

-EXPORT /? to get an on-screen review. If you don’t like dealing with

commandline syntax, enter .EXPORT'/q to run .EXPORTin the
manual Query mode. In this mode you will be asked a series of on-
screen questions about the .EXPORT operation you want to perform.
Once you answer the question, the .EXPORToperation will run. This
is a very easy way to use theEXPORTprogram.

Security and EXPORT

Note that .EXPORTfollows the samerules for security as any other

commands. If you export files and are not signed on, only unsecured
files are included in the export. If you are signed on, only thefiles to
which you have unrestricted access are included in the export. To cre-
ate a complete back upofall files on your computer, the user who in-
vokes theEXPORT commandshould be signed on with unrestricted
access to all security classes.

NOTE: Never use .DISKID,or any other method, to change the Disk
ID of any .EXPORTdisk. Doing so will render .IMPORT inoperable
and you will not be able to restore the data from that .EXPORTset.

4-52 MOS-D1L91
 FTLEMODE

.FILEMODElets you changethe "read-only" or "archive" attributes of

a file. The read-only attribute determines whetheror nota file may
be modified. The archive attribute is used with theEXPORT com-
mandto determine whetheror not a file has been changed since the
last time it was .EXPORTed. The .EXPORT commandclears thear-
chive attribute. You may use .FILEMODEwithout any operands to
display the current read-only setting of a file. The .DIR commanddis-
plays files along with the current setting for both of these attributes.

Type: Extrinsic.

Form: FILEMODE {+8 | -A | +4] -A} filename

Operands:

oF sets thefile attribute to read-only.

~F removesthe read-only attribute.

th sets the archive attribute of a file.

“A removesthe archive attribute setting.

filename enter the nameofthefile, including theletter of the drive

and/or directory if not the current defaults. Wildcards are
permitted in the nameofthefile.

Explanation:

You may changetheattribute of a file to read-only to prevent changes

to thefile. It also prevents thefile from being deleted. For example:

.FILEMODE +R \wo\contract.dec
Fort ee ary aad sf harrale ob: & pf

a This changes theattribute of the file, CONTRACT.DOC,in the WP

directory to read-only. You may removethe read-only attribute by
using the same commandform andspecifying -R instead of +R.
General Commands

You may display the currentattributesof a file to check the read-only

setting. For example, the following commandwill display the current
read-only setting of the LETTER.DOCfile in the WP directory: —

.FILEMODE \wp\letter.doc

The archive attribute is used by .EXPORT, which copies files for

safekeeping and compresses their data. The archive attribute serves
as a flag thatis set if the file has been changedsince thelast .EX-
PORT.

The .DIR commanddisplays the current attribute settings ofa file.

An asterisk (*) appears following the last updated time for any file
that has the archive attribute set. An R appears following the time of
last update for any file that has the read-only attribute set. The fol-
lowing is an example of a directory display:

4 ~ 54.
FORMAT

-FORMATpreparesa disk for recording information with MOS. You

must .FORMATa new disk before you can write or read information
to it. You may also use .FORMATona disk that already contains in-
formation to clear the information on the disk. FORMATwill
prepare up to 4 gigabytes of disk space..FORMATautomatically
places a boot sector on the disk.

Type: Extrinsic.

Form: FORMAT of 41/7 | /8) fa

Operands:

a: enter the letter of the drive that contains the disk to be

formatted.

ff creates a 9-sectored double-sided format on a 820K or

860K drive.

{i use to format a 720K disk with a 1.4M drive.

/é creates an 8-sectored format on a 320K or 360K drive.

ie lets you enter a disk ID of up to 11 characters.

Explanation:

This chart shows diskette format options:

Drive Operand Operand

360K 5-1/4" 860K Disk /8 for 320K Disk

1.2M 5-1/4" 1.2M Disk /4 for 860K Disk
720K 3-1/2" 720K Disk
1.4M 3-1/2" 1.4M Disk /1 for 720K Disk
Bs

Gi
oye
g
General Commands

You may use .FORMATwith hardor floppy disks. .FORMATbuilds

the logical format of the disk, creates the File Allocation Table (FAT)
for that disk and preparesthe disk to receive a directory structure. oy;
-FORMATautomatically places a boot sector on the disk. The boot
sector contains information that describes the disk to the device
driver in the CONFIG.SYSfile. (The .MSYS command maybe used
independently to place the boot sector on the disk.) You must also
copy the MOSsystem file, $$MOS.SYS, and the commandprocessor
files, $$SHELL.SYS and COMMAND.COMto the formatted disk for
it to be bootable.

Whenyou enter .FORMATfor a floppy diskette drive, say drive A,

the following prompt appears:

Place the diskette to format in drive A and press ENTER. If you are
formatting a hard disk, the following messagewill appear:

This message appears as a warning any timeyou select to format a

hard disk. Enter a Y if you want to format the hard disk. You may
enter an N to return to the system prompt without formatting the
hard disk.

As the disk or diskette is being formatted, the following message ap-

pears:

4-56 MOs-DIS1
The percentage complete is constantly updated until the FORMATis
complete. When the format is complete, MOSdisplays the total num-
ber of bytes on the disk, how manybytesare in bad sectors(if any)
and the total numberof bytes free. The following message then ap-
pears:

You may enter Y and repeat the procedure to format another dis-
kette. You may enter N to end the FORMAT commandandreturn to
the system prompt.

MOS-DI9L 4+ 57
General Commands

HELP

-HELP displays a menu of all commandsavailable in MOS. From the

menu you may select to display a help screen for a specific command.
The .HELP screen shows the commandform with all available
operands, and an explanation of the command.

Type: Extrinsic

Form: HELP fcommanc}

Operands:

cemmand you may optionally enter the nameof the commandfor

which you want to display the help screen and by-pass
the menu display.

Explanation:

You may use the .HELP commandat any timeto display an on-line
explanation of a MOS command.If you do not enter a command name
as an operand, a menulisting all the commands in MOSwill display.

At the menu, you may use the arrow keys to moveto the command
for which you want to display a help screen. Your current selection ap-
pears highlighted on the screen. Press ENTER to select the command
that is highlighted. You may press ESC at the menuto exit HELP
and return to the system prompt.

If an explanation of a commandis more than onescreen long, you

may use the arrow keysto scroll a screen up or down oneline at a
time. The PgUp and PgDn keys will scroll the screen one page at a
time. The HOME key moves you to the beginningof the present com-
mand description, and the END key movesyouto the end of the com-
mand description. When you are ready to exit the help screen, press
ESC to return to the menu.

You mayalso use the plus (+) key on the numeric key pad to move to
the next command’s help screen without returning to the menu. In
the same way, you may also use the minus(-) key on the numeric key
pad to move to the previous command’s help screen without returning
to the menu.

RE BACVS LE Ol
4, » BB MOS-Di 97
-IMPORT must be used to restore and decompressfiles that were
backed up with the .EXPORT command. .[MPORTlets you reinstate
a singlefile, a groupoffiles, a single directory or a group of direc-
tories. You may import files to any location, which need not be the
directory from which they were exported.

Type: Extrinsic.

Form: JMPORT d:ipath) folpathl) fol fa} (/s} {2}

Operands:

oeipath| enter the letter of the drive that containsthefiles you

want to import. Also enter the nameofthefile(s) to im-
port, includingall levels of a directory name to begin the
import with a specific directory. Wildcards are permitted
in the nameofthefile.

ac\path| enter the drive and path of the target directory where the
import is to begin. Defaults to the current drive and direc-
tory if not entered.

fe Indicates thatfiles already existing at the target location

are to be overwritten by any importedfiles with the same
name(s).

/g enter alone for Query Mode. This mode ignores the com-
mandline syntax and prompts the user to enter the
desired .[MPORToperation instructions manually.

{3 Restore all nested subdirectories. Restoresall levels of

subdirectories from the .EXPORTset.

f? entered alone, displays a review of .IMPORT command

line syntax on screen.
yee

ie}
O
e

ia]
bed

ey
7
General Commands

Explanation:

You mayreinstate all files from a set ofEXPORT diskettes (or

cartridges) using the asterisk wildcard character in the IMPORT
command. For example:

JAMPORT a:\*.* /s o:\

This commandwill import all files and directories beginning with the
first directory on the first .EXPORTdisk in the set, from drive A to
the root directory of drive C. You will be promptedto insert thefirst
and subsequent archive disks until the import operation is complete.

You may use .IMPORTto restore a specific file or directory, and

begin the .IMPORT withthefirst diskette in a set. IMPORTwill al-
ways prompt you for the next archive disk. A selective IMPORT may
require multipleIMPORT commands. Thefile directory structure on
the archive disk are created on the destination disk, where necessary.

If you don’t use the /o operand, any attempt to import a file over an
existing file with the same namewill cause MOSto prompt you for
verification before importingthefile:

If you forget the commandline syntax for .TMPORT, you can enter
IMPORT /? to get an on-screen review. If you don’t like dealing with
commandline syntax, enter .JMPORT /q to run .[MPORTin the
manual Query mode. In this mode youwill be asked a series of on-
screen questions about the .[MPORToperation you want to perform.
Once you answerthe question, the IMPORToperation will run. This
is a very easy way to use the .I[MPORTprogram.

NOTE: the .IMPORT commandfollows the samerules for security as

any other command.(Also see the .EXPORT command.)

4-60 MOS-DIL9L
MID

.MDlets you create or make directories. You may create as many

levels of directories as you wish so long as the full nameof the direc-
tory beginning at the root does not exceed 64 characters.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: .MD lpath

Operand:

path enter the complete nameof the directory includingall

levels of directories that precede it, and the drive letter if
not the current drive.

Explanation:

MOSlets you create multiple levels of directories, beginning from the

root directory. You may use directories to organize information.

For example, you may set up a directory called MYDIRat the root
directory of a disk, and use it to store certain typesoffiles. From the
MYDIRdirectory you may makeanotherdirectory called MYINFO in
which you store text files. From MYINFO you may makeyet another
directory called MEMOSin which you store only memos. This direc-
tory is three levels deep and the directory name is 21 characters
long, for example:

\WAYDIRAVININFO\LETTERS
oy

You may only makeonelevel of directory at a time. For example, you

must make the MYDIRdirectory first. You may then make the MYIN-
FO directory as the next directory level from MYDIR. (MYDIRis the
parent directory for the MYINFOdirectory.) You may then make the
next directory level for the directory named LETTERS. MYINFOis
the parent directory for the LETTERS directory.
General Commands

If the current directory is LETTERS, you may makea fourth levelof

directory by entering the following command:

MD CLIENTS

If the current directory is the root directory, you must enter the
preceding levels when you want to makea directory at a different
level. To add this fourth level of directory from the root, you would
enter the following command:

.MD \MYDIR\MYINFO\LETTERS\CLIENTS

4-62 MOs-DLOL
-MORE is a filter that massages standard input to produce standard
output in 24 line increments. The standard output displays on the
video screen with the message, CONTINUED..., on every 25th line.
Pressing any key causes the next 24 line increment of standard out-
put to display.

Type: Extrinsic.

Form: MORE

Explanation:

.MOREis commonly usedto filter long files or directories to display

only one screen of information at a time. .MORE uses input/output
redirection to accomplish the display. For example, you may use the
.TYPE commandto send the contents of TEXT.DOC to standard out-
put. The standard output may be redirected as standard input to the
.MORE command. .MORE filters TEXT.DOC andsendsit to the
video screen as its standard output, 24 lines at a time. The com-
mandsto accomplish this are:

TYPE TEXT.DOC | .MORE

This causesthefirst 24 lines of TEXT.DOC to display on the video

screen. Pressing any key displays the next 24 lines. You may press
CTRL- C or CTRL - BRKto stop the display and return to the system
prompt.

You may find .MOREusefulto display a long directory map. To dis-

play a directory mapone screen at a time, you would enter:

.DIRMAP | MORE

MOS-DILS 4-63
o
General Commands

MSORT

.MSORTlets you sort records in file on a field-by-field basis.

Records maybe up to 5000 bytes long, and must occupyone line with
a hard carriage return at the end of the line. You may also specify the
starting column numberof the field on which the records will be
sorted. It is not necessary to separate the fields by spaces or commas.
You maysort in ascending order or descending order. When the
-MSORTis complete, the output is written back to the video screen,
unless you redirect it to an outputfile.

Type: Extrinsic.

Form: .MSORT /| /ali/dd:lpath|}yin | /+n}i/in,nhi/m}{<iniile}

{routiile}

Operands:

ie sorts thefile in reverse order.

ja sorts characters in thefile in true ASCII order, regardless

of their use.If/a is not specified, characters in the range
of decimal 128 to 226 will be sorted in a "weighted" for-
mat. In a weighted sort, the "a" character and the "a" take
on the same value.

/dds\paih| enter /d immediately followed by the drive and/or path

where temporary work files generated by .MSORTare to
be placed, You may omit this operand to place temporary
workfiles on the current drive and/or directory.

fin enter /f followed by the numberof the column where the

sort string begins. The sort will occur through the endof
the line (record).

fen sameeffect as /fn above.

finn enter /f and the numberof the first column where the sort
string begins, followed by a comma. andthe total number
of charactersin the string.

4 G4 MOS-DILOL
fm displays several messages that you mayfind helpful
during lengthy sorts.

<infile enter the nameofthefile to sort. If you do not make an

entry, MOSdefaults to direct keyboard input.

>outtile enter the nameofthe file where the resulting data is to

be written. If you do not enter an output file name, MOS
displays the sorted output on your video screen.

Explanation:

-MSORTcreates a temporary work file to hold the sorted data. The

workfile is written to the default path and drive unless you specify a
path and drive. The resulting sorted output will display on the video
screen, unless you specify a file (the outfile) for the resulting output.

You may wantto use redirection with the .MORE commandtodis-

play the outputfile one screen at a time. .MSORTis useful for doing
multiple field sorts. For example:

.MSORT fa /de\wp\ 8,4 jm < MYFILE.DOC > DOCSORT

In this example, MOS will sort the records in MYFILE.DOCin as-

cending order, with a string of text that begins with column8 and in-
cludes 4 positions; columns8, 9, 10 and 11. Including the /m operand
causes MOSto display the following message whenthesort begins:

The nnnn in this example represents the numberof records read into
memory for the sort. If your system does not have enough memory to
sort all records in one pass, there will be multiple passes through the
file and the following message will appear:

MOS-DiS1 4-65
General Commands

Thefirst nnnn indicates the pass number, and the second nnnn is the
actual numberof records sorted and written to the temporary sort
file..MSORTwill continue until all records have been sorted, creat-
ing as many temporary workfiles as are required for thesort.
-MSORT maydisplay:

After merging the temporary files, MOS begins thefinal sort. The fol-
lowing message displays the numberof remaining temporary files
that need to be sorted duringthe final sort phase:

If the inputfile is sorted in one pass,.MSORTdisplays the following

message during its last phase:

The output in this example is redirected to the DOCSORTfile. You

may display the contents of DOCSORTwith the MOS Editor or with
the .TYPE command. Note that the performance of .MSORTis direct-
ly related to the numberof records in thefile; the more records to
sort, the longer .MSORT runs. .MSORTis disk-intensive and may
slow processing in other partitions.

4-66 MOS-DI91
-MSYS

-MSYSwrites a boot sector on a disk. This is one of the stepsin creat-

ing a bootable MOS disk. The .FORMAT commanddoesthis for you
automatically. However, .MSYS maybe run to place the boot sector
on a disk at any time.

Type: Extrinsic.

Form: AMSYS a:

Operand:

a: enterthe letter of the drive that contains the disk on

which you want to place the MOS boot sector.

Explanation:

The MOSboot sector must be placed on a disk for it to be a bootable

MOSdisk.

If you format a disk with the MOS .FORMAT commandtheboot sec-

tor is automatically placed on the disk for you. However, .MSYS can
be used separately.

For example, you can use the .MSYS commandto convert a bootable
DOSdisk to a bootable MOSdisk without having to reformat the
disk. Insert the DOSdisk in drive A and enter the following com-
mand at the MOS system prompt:

MSYS A:

NOTE: You must also copy the system file, $}MOS.SYS,and the com-
mand processorfiles, $$SHELL.SYS and COMMAND.COMto the
disk before it is truly bootable.

MOS-DL81 4-67
General Commands

ONLY

The .ONLY commandlets you limit the action of a commandor sub-

sequent sequence of commandsto a specified file or group offiles. You
may use .ONLY with MOS commandsor with batchfiles. .ONLY can
also be used with any programsor applications that do not operate
directly on the disk, but use filename operands. Be careful using
-ONLYsinceit offers a global functionality. If you use it with destruc-
tive commands, you may want to preview what you'll be deleting or
erasing.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: ONLY (filename filename...) DO command | baifile

ONLY GANCEL

CANCEL Ifa .ONLY statementis used within a batchfile, you may

cancel it with a.ONLY CANCELstatement. This will free
up thefiles in its group for operation by other commands.

Operands:

filename enter the nameofthefile or files on which you want the

commandto perform. Thefile or group offiles must be
enclosed in parentheses. Do not enter its path. Wildcard
characters are permitted. You must use a comma or space
as a delimiter between filenames. You may enter as many
filenames as space permits on the commandline. Note
that no drive or path specifications are permitted.

command enter the command you want to perform on thefiles. You

may enter any operandsassociated with the command,in-
cluding the drive and path for thefile or group offiles.

baitfile enter the nameof the batchfile to perform on thefile or

groupof files, but do not include the .BAT extension.

Explanation:

-ONLY can be usedto limit the files on which a utility commandis

performed. For example:

4» GB MOS-DLOL
 ONLY (.map “exe *.cb] *.asm) DO .ERASE *.* jv

In this example only those files with the extensions listed will be
grouped for erasure. You may also use .ONLYto limit thefiles that
may be processed within an application. For example:

ONLY (.doc *.ixt) DO wordproc

This command statement invokes a word processing application on a

system, but limits the files which may be accessed underit. If you
chooseto use this limitation, beware of anyfiles that the application
may need, For example,if you choose to place this limitation on the
MOSEditor, .ED, the DEFKEYS.EDfile, which is used to store pre-
vious assignments of function keys, will not be found unless it is in-
cluded in the .ONLYfile set.

Additionally, you can use .ONLYto invoke a new commandprocessor

and limit the files which may be accessed underit. For example:

ONLY (.doc *-bd) DO command

Within this new commandprocessor, you can only accessfiles with a

-DOC and a .TXT extension.

NOTE: Be careful when you exclude access to files. You may create
files excluded from an application or a new commandprocessorthat
mayalready exist. Although it appears as if you are creating a new
file, the existing file may be overwritten without your knowledge.

.ONLYcan also be used to create a set of files and invoke a batchfile

to perform on thosefiles. For example:

ONLY (#l.doc) DO CLEAN

This .ONLY statementwill let you invoke the batch file, CLEAN.
However, in this example, .ONLY’s exclusion properties would permit
no otherbatchfiles to be invoked from CLEAN until processingis
complete since files with the .BAT extension are not included in the
filename operand. The batch file CLEAN.BATcontains:

MOS-D191 4-69
General Commands

.CD\WORK.DIR
ERASE ** /y
.CD\ASM.DIR
ERASE ** fy
Note that this will erase all files which begin with tl and carry a
-DOC extension in the WORK.DIR and ASM.DIRdirectories. Had
you wantedto preview thefiles before erasing them, you could have
written CLEAN as follows:

CD\WORK.DIR
.DIR fw ip
ECHO Erase thesefiles in \WORK.DIR?
KEY %%a IN (yn) DO GOTO pi%%a
‘ply
.ERASE *.* fy
ipin
.CDIASM.DIR
.DIR /w ip
ECHO Erase these files in ASM.DIR?
KEY %%a IN Gn) DO GOTO p2e%%a
ip2y
-ERASE *.* fy
:pen

The use of .KEY requires you to respondto the prompt. The key you
press, either Y or N determinesthe action that will be taken. You
may couple the .ONLY statement with an .EXCEPT statementto fur-
ther limit the effect of a command. For example:

ONLY (.doc) DO .EXCEPT {special.dec) DO .EXPORT ** A:

In this example, SPECIAL.DOCis excluded from the EXPORT,but

all other .DOCfiles are included. In a situation like this, the order of
the .ONLY and .EXCEPT commands does not matter. The sameef-
fect could have been achieved with:

EXCEPT (special.dec) DO .ONLY (*.doc) DO .EXPORT ** A:

If the groups defined in theEXCEPT and .ONLY statements conflict,
no files will be found. For example:

ONLY (doc) DO .EXCEPT(doc) DO .EXPORT ** A:

4- TO MOS-D191
PATH

The .PATH commandspecifies the drives and directories MOSis to

search when you enter a command. Whenyou invoke a .PATH com-
mand, MOSplaces the .PATH string in the environment space, which
is an area of memory used to keep such items.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: PATH foi}{dirname}{:...}

Operands:

a: enter the letter of the drive that MOSis to search for an

executablefile.

dirname enter the complete directory name MOSis to search,in-

clude any levels of directories that precede it from the
root directory.

; enter the semicolon to link togethera series of drives and

directories to be searched.

any number of drive and directory entries maybe in-

cluded with the .PATH command.

Explanation:

When you invoke a command, MOSsearches the current drive and

directory for the executable commandfile. If the commandis not
found, MOSthen looksfor a search path in the environment and sear-
ches for the executable commandfile in the order of drive and direc-
tory entries.

You should place the .PATH commandin your startup batchfiles to

specify the path each time you boot MOS. You may want to organize
the orderof entries in the path with the directories of your mostfre-
quently used commandsfirst. This will cause MOSto locate the ex-
ecutable commandfile quicker, and give youa little faster
performance. For example, the .PATH for a commandthat invokes a
word processing application you frequently use could be:

MOS-DL91 4-7
General Commands

.PATH o:\mos;e:\work\wordproc;c:\mywork

You may enter .PATH at the system prompt without any operands to
display the current path setting.

You maydelete the current path by entering .PATH ; (the space and
semicolon after .PATH are necessary parts of the command).

Entering a new .PATH commandwill delete any current path in the

environment andreplace it with your new entry.

An T2 MOS-DLS1
PROMPT

-PROMPT lets you change the appearance of the MOS system

prompt. The default promptis [d:\], which is the current drive and
directory enclosed in brackets. You may use any of the following
operands and/or anycharacters to create a different prompt. Note the
use of the $ that serves as a special delimiter for thePROMPT
operands.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: .PROMPT[$5}{Sc}{Se}{SqH{Bh}{SIHSIHSn}{Sp}{$q}{$t}
(Su}{Sv}H{S_HEEH Sx]ftext}
Operands:

$b displays the | character.

$d displays the system date in the format chosen by the

COUNTRY commandstatement in your CONFIG.SYS
file.

$e displays the ESCapecharacter; primarily used with the

ANSI modeofoperation.

$g displays the > character.

&h sends a destructive backspace to the current prompt.

$i displays the numberof the current partition (task ID).

$l displays the < character.

$n displays the letter of the current default drive.

$p displays the current default drive and directory.

$q displays the = character.

St displays the system time in the format chosen by the

COUNTRY commandin your CONFIG.SYSfile.

MOS-D191 4-%3
General Commands

gu displays the user ID of the user signed on in the current

partition, if any.
oo,

gv displays the operating system name and version number.

$_ ends current prompt line and continues the prompt on the

next line.

$$ displays a single $.

$x To include leading delimiters in the prompt, enter $ and

an x or any other character not used as the second charac-
ter in the previous operands.

text you may enter any text in the prompt that you want.

Explanation:

You may set the .PROMPT for partition 0 in your AUTOEXEC.BAT

file. You may set the .PROMPT thatwill appear for each partition in oo.
the startup batchfile that is invoked from the .ADDTASK command
for that partition. You may also modify the prompt display at any
time with entries at the system prompt. For example, to set the
prompt of the current partition to display the system time, enter the
following at the system prompt:

PROMPT St

The promptat the current partition will display:

The brackets display only with the default prompt, unless you enter _—
them as text in your .PROMPT command. To display only the hours
and minutes in the prompt, you may include the $h operand six times
to backspace over :ss:hh and omit them from the prompt. For ex-
ample:

PROMPT $t$h$h$h$h$h$h

a- 74 MOS-D191
ks sss
jem:
&
 If you want your display to include the word TIME anda colon prior
to the time, you could enter:

.PROMPT TIME:$t

To return the promptto its default, enter .PROMPT in thepartition

without any operands.

Thefirst entry with the .PROMPT commandcannotcontain a

delimiter, such as a space, a comma, etc. You may create a null or
blank position in your prompt by typing a $ followed by a character
that is not used as the second characterof a valid operand.

For example, $x is not a valid operand, but can be enteredasthefirst

operand in the PROMPT command. Any characters, including
delimiters may follow this operand. For example, the following com-
manddisplays three blank spaces, and then JOE> as the prompt.

PROMPT $x JOES$g

You may use any combination of operands for a prompt display. For
example, the following creates a prompt that displays the current
drive and directory ($p), the greater than symbol ($g), the characters
JOE, and anothergreater than symbol($g):

PROMPT$p$gJOE$g
The prompt may appear similar to the following:

Note that .PROMPT producesa string which is stored in the environ-

ve ment (an area of memory used to hold frequently called items).
General Commands

RD

-RD lets you remove an empty directory from the system. The direc-
tory to remove cannot contain anyfiles, and cannot be a parent to
anotherlevel of directory.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: .RD \path

Operand:

ipath enter the complete name of the directory, including the

letter of the drive and/or any precedinglevels of direc-
tories.

Explanation:

Before a directory may be removed, you must delete all files in the
directory, or use .RENAME to move them to a different directory.
You cannot delete a parent directory that contains any otherlevels of
directories.

You may only remove onedirectory level at a time. For example, you
may have a directory named \MYTEXT\MYFILES\LETTERS. In
order to remove the MYFILESdirectory, you must first remove the
LETTERS directory.

Normally, you must specify all levels of directories that precede the
directory you want to remove. For example, you could remove the
LETTERS directory with the following command:

AD \MYTEXT\MYFILES\LETTERS

If MYFILESis the current directory, you could remove the LETTERS

directory with the following command:

.AD LETTERS

Note that you cannot remove a directory that is your current direc-
tory, nor can you removea directory that is currently being used by
someone in anotherpartition.

4-16 MOS-D1L91
REL

-REL creates a display on the video screen of the release of MOSthat

is currently running on your computer.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: JREL

Explanation:

Entering .REL at the system prompt displays the current release of

MOSthatis on your computer. The display appears similar to the fol-
lowing:

MOS-D191 4-77
General Commands

REMDEV

-REMDEYVlets you removea device driver. You may enter this com-
mandat the system prompt to removethe device.

Type: Extrinsic.

Form: -REMDEV devname

Operand:

cdevname enter the device driver you want to remove.

Explanation:

You may use the .REMDEV commandat any time to remove a device
that is no longer necessary. For example, you may have a pipe device
defined that you want to remove to free memory for other uses. If the
pipe device name is PIPE4, the commandyou would enter to remove
it is: o—™

-REMDEV PIPES

There may be devices on your computer that are active or are re-
quired. If you attempt to remove one of these devices, MOS will dis-
play a message stating that the device cannot be removed. (Also see
the .ADDDEV command and the DEVICE= commandstatement.)

4-78 MOS-D1L9l
RENAME

-RENAME lets you change the nameof file or groupof files and op-
tionally move them to a different directory. You may also use
-RENAME to relocate or change the nameof a subdirectory.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: RENAME. name name f/m]

Operands:

name enter the nameofthefile or directory you want to rename

or move. You mayincludetheletter of the drive and/or
the directory nameif not at the current defaults.
Wildcards are permitted with file names but not with
directories.

name for renames enter the new nameofthefile or directory.If

not specified, MOSdefaults to the current directory.If
you want to movethefile(s) to a different directory, enter
the nameof the directory wherethefile(s) are to be
moved. When movinga directory, you must enter the com-
plete path namefor its new location. You may rename
and move at the same time. Wildcards are permitted
with file names but not with directories.

fm you must enter this operand if you want to move the

file(s) or directory.

Explanation:

-RENAME is useful for changing the nameofa file. For example, you
may want to temporarily change the contents of a batchfile, without
altering its original contents. You can renametheoriginal batchfile
with a different extension, for example:

RENAME AUTOEXEC.BAT AUTOEMEC,SAV

MOS-D19l ~ 9S
oo
General Commands

You can then create a new AUTOEXEC.BATto use when you boot
the computer. When you wantto revert to the original file, delete the
new AUTOEXEC.BATand then rename AUTOEXEC.SAVwith the —
.BAT extension.

You mayuse an asterisk or a question mark as wildcard characters to

rename or move a group offiles. For example, you may have several
files in a directory with an extension of .BAK, and you want to
change the nameofall these files to contain an extension of .DOC.
You mayenterthe following commandto renametheentire group of
files and leave the group in the current directory:

-RENAME “BAK *.DOC

You can also movea file or a group offiles to a new directory. How-
ever, .RENAME cannot movefiles from one drive to anotherdrive.
The new directory must exist on the samedrive as the original direc-
tory. To move the groupof .BAK files to a different directory without
changingthe file names, you could enter the following command:

RENAME \MYDIRY.BAK \NEWDIR /m

To movefiles to a different directory, you must include the /m

operand in the command. You mayalso givethefile or files that you
are movingto a different directory a new name, for example:

RENAME \MYDIR\LETTER.TXT \NEWDIR\FORM.TXT /m

-RENAMEis also useful for renaming and movingdirectories. For a

renameonly, the second operand defaults to a directory with the
samepath asthefirst operandif not specified. For example, the fol-
lowing command would rename the \SALES\JAN directory to the
\SALES \JANUARYdirectory:

RENAME \SALESWAN JANUARY

When moving a directory, the second operand must specify the com- _~,
plete path namefor the new location of the directory that is being
moved. For example, the following commandwill move the LETTERS
directory from its present location in the root to a new position as a
child of the WP directory:

4- 80 MOS-D191
 RENAME LETTERS WP\LETTERS /m

Note thatall files and subdirectories within the LETTERS directory

are carried along with it. This makes it possible to easily restructure
an entire disk, since whole limbsofthe directory tree structure can
be prunedfrom one location and grafted onto another.

In all previous examples the commands were entered at the root

directory of the C drive, [C:\]. The next commandis entered at the
\WP subdirectory prompt, [C:\WP], as follows:

“RENAME \DOCUMENT MANUAL/m

In this example DOCUMENT is presently a subdirectory off of the

root. Since the second operand (MANUAL) doesnot start with a'"\",
the current directory (\WP) is assumed and the \DOCUMENT direc-
tory is moved and renamed to \WP\MANUAL.

Whenusing .RENAME with directories the operands must be specific

directories by name, no wildcards can be used. The root directory, of
course, cannot be renamedorrelocated. A directory cannot be relo-
cated to be a child of itself. You also cannot rename and/or relocate a
directory if that directory is presently the current directory of any
task or if it is a parent of the current directory of any task.

MOS-D181 4-81
General Commands

SHARCH

-SEARCHsearches one or morefiles to locate a specific string of char-

acters. If a filename is not specified, then .SEARCH reads from stand-
ard input as filter to produce redefined output.

Type: Extrinsic.

Form: SEARCH fnli/vivelyil “string” {filename ...]

Operands:

fa causes the numberof the line that matches the character

string to display on the output device along with the char-
acter string.

Vv causes the lines where the character string does not

match to display on the output device.

/e counts and displays on the output device the total num-

ber of lines in which the character string is matched in
each specified file. The /c option overrides the two pre-
vious options.

fi causes the search to ignore upper or lowercase.

"string" string is the characters to locate. The string must be

enclosed in double quotes. If a double quote (") appears
within a character string, MOS will read it as the endof
the string. You may, however, enter two consecutive
double quotes("") and MOSwill recognize them as one
double quote within the character string. For example,
the string "the "command" name"is not valid, but "the
"command" name"is a valid string.

MOSwill find only character strings that match explicit-

ly. For example, "text" and "text" match, while "Text" and
"text" do not match because of capitalization. The
.SEARCHwill find strings contained within words.

4- BS MOS-DI9L
filename enter the nameofthefile to search, including the drive
letter and/or directory if not the current defaults. Wild
cards are not permitted in thefile name.

multiple filenames maybe present in the command. A

space must be used between eachfilename.

Explanation:

Besides searching for character stringsin a file,SEARCH can also

be usedasa filter. For example, to find all files created or last
changed on a specific date, you can use the SEARCH commandasfol-
lows:

DIR | SEARCH /n "10-05-87"

Thefirst commandtells MOSto display the directory on the current

default drive. The pipe symbol(}) tells MOS to treat what is on each
side of the symbol as separate commands, but to use the standard out-
put of the commandonits left (.DIR) as the standard inputfor the
commandonits right (SEARCH). The result is a display to the video
screen of only thefiles in the directory created or last updated on 10-
05-87.

.SEARCHwill locate a specific character string in multiple files. If

the files are on different drives, or reside in different directories, then
the drive letter and directory must be specified. In the following ex-
ample, MOSwill locate and display all occurrences of the word "ter-
minal"in the twofiles that reside in different directories.

SEARCH “erminal” \wp\doc’ .bd \wp3\glos.txt

MOS-D19i 4-83
General Commands

SHT

The .SET commandlets you place character strings for specific vari-
ables in the environment space, which is a reference area for frequent-
ly accessed strings of information. A copy of the information
contained in the environment is made available to all programs.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: SET varilable=string

Operand:

varlable= enter the name of the environment variable you want to

set. Although you may enter any variable string, the most
commonly used environmentvariables and their uses are:

COMSPEC- tells MOS where the Command Processoris

located so it knows where to look to reload the command
processor after a program has overwritten it in RAM.

PATH tells MOSthe drives and directories to search

when you invoke an executable file. Executable files carry
an extension of .COM, .EXE and .BAT. MOSsearchesfor
executable files in that order. The .PATH commandis an
alternative to SET PATH=.

PROMPT - defines the prompt that will be displayed for

the partition in which the .SET commandis invoked. The
-PROMPT commandis an alternative to .SET PROMPT=.

string enter the valueto set for the variable.

Explanation:

When you boot MOS, it automatically sets COMSPEC=C:\COM-

MAND.COMinto the environment, which is approximately 127 bytes
in size. PATH and PROMPT are automatically set into the environ-
ment space whenthey are invoked from a batchfile or at the system
prompt. The .SET commandlets you change any of these values.

&~ BA MOS-DLS1L
You may display the current variables that are set in the environ-
ment by entering the SET command without any operands. MOS will
display the current settings similar to the following:

You can delete items set into the environment by entering the .SET
command,the variable name, an equals symbol and then pressing
ENTER.The following example would delete the promptsetting for
the currentpartition:

SET PROMPT=

Although the environmentis approximately 127 bytes in size, it may

grow larger with each .SET command. Whenyou install a resident
program, the environmentis restricted from any further growth.In-
voking a nested batch file may also restrict further growth of the en-
vironment while the nested batchfile is active. For these reasons, you
should invoke all .SET commandsprior to installing a resident pro-
gram or invoking a nestedbatchfile.

NOTE: You may want to include all .SET commandsatthe begin-

ning of your AUTOEXEC.BATfile to be sure there is no restriction on
the environment growth while variables are being set. Do not invoke
a resident program or a nested batchfile from the AUTOEXEC.BAT
file prior to entering a .SET command.

You may also use the .ENVSIZE commandto specify a minimum size
for your environment. .ENVSIZE lets you reserve the space for your
environmentprior to loading any resident programs.

MOS-DL9L 4-86
General Commands

LIME

-TIME lets you set or display the MOSsystem time. The formatfor
timeis defined with the COUNTRY commandstatementin your
CONFIG.SYSfile. The .TIME is the internal time that is known to
MOS.You will need to set the system time immediately after booting
MOSif your system does not have a perpetual clock. The .TIME file
was created and last updated appears with eachfile when a directory
is displayed.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: TIME {hh:mmi:ss/hA}})

Operands:

Abwnm enter the hour (hh) and minutes (mm)for the correct time.

28s enter the numberof secondsfor the correct time.

Ah enter the numberof hundredths of a secondfor the cor-

rect time.

Explanation:

If your system does not have a perpetual system clock, you may want
to include .TIME in your AUTOEXEC.BATfile. This will cause MOS
to prompt you to enter the current time when you boot your computer.

You mayset the current time by entering .TIMEat the system

prompt, followed by the current hour, minutes, seconds and
hundredths of a second.

You may type .TIME at the system prompt, without any operands, to
display and optionally reset the current time. The display appears
similar to the following:

4= 86 MOS-DLSI
You may press ENTERto leave the current time setting, or you may
enter a different time. The format for time is hours (hh), minutes
(mm)seconds(ss) and hundredthsof a second (hh).

MOS-DIL9OL 4-87
General Commands

“TYPE

-TYPE displays the contentsof a file on the video screen. You may
use the /h option for a display in a hexadecimal form.

Type:

Intrinsic.

Form: TYPE filename {/h}

Operands:

filename the nameofthefile you wantto display.

fn displays the file in a hexadecimal form.

Explanation:

If you select to display a text file, it appears on the video screen

similar to the following example:

If you choose the hexadecimal form, the actual hexadecimal codes for
the contents of the file display. If the file is a text file, or any text ap-
pearsin thefile, the hexadecimal codes will appear and their "text
equivalents" will be displayed to the right. The following is an ex-
ample of a CONFIG.SYSfile displayed in hexadecimal form.

4-88 MOS-D191.
Note the periods that appear in the text equivalent column to the
right. Periods represent actual periodsin thefile or letters in the
ASCII character set that could not be translated into hexadecimal
codes.

If the file you are typing is very long, you may want to use the MORE
commandto display thefile one screen at a time. For example, thefol-
lowing commandwill type the contents of the MYFILE.DOCto the
-MORE command. The .MORE commandwill display thefile one
screen at a time.

TYPE MYFILE.DOC | MORE

MOS-D191 4-89
General Commands

VERIFY

.VERIFY is a diagnostic commandthat verifies a disk by checking for

file allocation errors. You may select to display any errors found,dis-
play non-contiguousfiles or automatically fix the errors. .VERIFY
checksforallocation errors; it is not a surface analysis. It is wise to
run .VERIFY if your system fails due to a power outageor other
cause. .VERIFY displays the allocation status showing the numberof
lost clusters, and any cross allocated clusters (allocated to more than
onefile). .VERIFY should be run from task 0 with all other tasks
removed.

Type: Extrinsic.

Form: VERIFY farce} | ih}

Operands:

ad: enter the letter of the drive that contains the disk to be
checked, or omit to check the current drive. _

fe displays any non-contiguousfiles as they are being check-

ed.

jt fixes the lost allocation clusters by combining them into

files named LOSTDATA.nnn. The nnn in the file name is
a consecutive numberassigned to each newfile as it is
created.

fv displays the directory path and file names on the disk as

they are being checked.

jp displays a help screen for the .VERIFY command.

Explanation:

.VERIFY should be run from task 0 with all other tasks removed. oom,
.VERIFY may be run on any type of disk. If you include the /c
operand, anyfiles with non-contiguous clusters display on the screen
as they are being checked, for example:

4-90 MOS-Di9i
If you specify /v, the file and path nameson the drive being checked
appear on the screen. The .VERIFYallocation status display notesin-
correct file sizes by comparing the actual file size to the numberof
clusters it occupies, for example:

If you specify /f, .VERIFY writes the data in the lost file allocation
clusters into files. These files are named LOSTDATA.nnn,and are
numberedin the order in which they are encountered. You may then
display and check thefiles to decide whetheror not they should be
deleted. Deleting thesefiles will free their disk space for other uses.

A sample allocation status display appears on the screen similar to

the following:

MOS8-DL9L A- OL
General Commands

MOS SECURITY and VARIFY COMMAND CAUTION

When using MOS SECURITY forfile level security, care must be ex-
ercised when using the VERIFY commandto checka disk forfile al-
location errors! ONLY users with "level 3 - unrestricted access"
assigned for ALL file classes should be allowed to run VERIFY!(This
level of access is usually reserved for someone at the system ad-
ministratorlevel.)

CAUTION:If the user running VERIFY does not have level 3 access
for all file classes, VERIFY will not.be able to properly read the disk.

* WARNING * Ifthe user runs VERIFY with the ff operandto fix

lost allocation clusters, there could be some disk corruption if they do
not have level 3 access assignedforall file classes!

4-92 MOS-D191
WVER

.WVERcauses any subsequent disk writes to be verified. Note that

the verify function may slow processing as a verification check is per-
formed with each operation.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: WVER fon | off}

Operands:

on turns on the verification check.

off turns off the verification check.

Explanation:

The default status of .WVERis off when you boot your computer. You
maydisplay the current status of .WVERby typing the commandat
the system prompt without any operands. This will display a message
similar to the following:

When .WVERis on, MOS performsa checkofall output sent to a disk

to be sure it is identical to the copy still in memory.If the original in
memory and the output on disk are not the same, MOSdisplays a
critical error message similar to the following:

MOS-D191 4 - 93
You may enter an A to abort the current function and return to the
system prompt, or enter an R to retry. If an error appears while
.WVERis active, you may have a problem with your disk or a pone,

hardware problem with your computer.

A= 94. MOS-DLS1
 CHAPTER5:
MULTI-TASKING / MULTI-USER

Multi-Tasking Concepts .. 0.0.0.0... 0 eee ee ene 5-4

Multi-Tasking Processing .. 10.0.0... ce eee eee 5-7

Multi-User Concepts 0.0. ee ee 5-7

Multi-User Processing .. 10... eee ee ee 5-8

Time Sharing 0... tee ee ees 5-8

Rebooting Tasks... 0... ee 5-9

Multi-Tasking and Multi-User Commands ........ 5-10

sADDTASK . 2.6... ee ee et es 5-11

s-REMTASK .. 20... eb ee ee ee eee es 5-18

Partition Access . 0... ee ee eee 5-19

Partition Access Keys... 1. ee ee ee 5-19

SWITCH Command .......... eee een . 5-20
Turning Partition Access On and Off ........... 5 - 20

MOS Utility Functions ,. 0... ee 5 - 20

MOS-D191 5-1
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

The MOS Utility Commands .......0-080 00 bee 5-21

‘MOS MAP ... 1... cee ee ee ee es 5 - 22

“MOS DIS. 2... 5 - 23
‘MOS NODIS .. 0... tee ee ee 5-23
‘MOS USEIRQ ........ 2.000 eee ew ee es 5 - 23
“MOS FREEIRQ.. 1 6. ee 5 - 26
“MOS IRQ 2... ee es 5 - 27
“MOS WAIT 2... we ee ee es 5 - 28
*MOS VMODE..... 1... ee et tt es 5 - 29
-MOS SERINIT ........ 2.0.0 ce tue ee eens 5 - 30
-MOS ROUTE (COMn) .. 1.2 ee ee ee 5-31
‘MOS ROUTE (LPTn).. 1... ee ee 5-31
‘MOS ROUTE TERM ........ 004 pe eee eee 5 - 82
-MOS ROUTE NOTERM ...........2.50 20806 5 - 82
-MOS RESIZE . 0.6 ee ees 5 - 32
“MOSINFO .. 0... be ee ee es 5 - 33
‘MOS DSPORT .....5.. 0.000 + eeu eee eens 5-35
“MOS MOUSE... 2... ee es 5 - 36
‘MOS KEYB .. 1... ce ee es 5 - 38
Foreign Keyboard Drivers ..........+6.08.4 5 - 39
MOS FILES... 1. ee ee ee ee es 5 - 40
“MOS HOLD LPTn ..........0 020+ ee eee 5 - 40
‘MOS TSR... 1. 5-4l
MOS ANSI... 6 2 ee 5-42
MOS DOSVER ........ 0. eee eee ee bene 5 - 42

The MOSADM Utility Commands .......50.000.- 5 - 43

-MOSADM SLICE... . 0.2.0.0 00 eevee eens 5 - 44

-MOSADM PRI ... 1... eee ee et 5-45
-MOSADM CACHE ......... 2.0020 peewee 5 - 46
-MOSADM SWITCH .........0 epee ee ene 5-46
-MOSADM TMFACTOR ......... 00000 eee 5 - 46
-MOSADM HOLD LPTn ..-.. 0.2.0.8. 0 ee eee 5-47
-MOSADM VIRQ . 1... ce 5 - 48
MOSADM RESET... 1... 2... ce ee ee ee es 5-48
MOSADM TIME ....... 0. eee wet ee eens 5-49
MOSADMEMSLIMIT ..........02.500 50220 5-49

5-2 MOS-DISL
Connecting Terminals and Workstations ......... 5 - 52

Terminals vs Workstations .........00.0050008 5-52

Serial Ports ......0.. 0. ee eee eee eee ee 5 - 53
Cable Connections ....... 0:00 ee eee ne eee 5 - 53
Modem Cable Connections ........00580004 5 5 - 54

Terminal and Workstation Device Drivers ........ 5-55

Terminal Display Differences ........56068000. 5-57

Escape Sequences for Non-PC Type Terminals ..... 5 - 58

Escape Sequence Chart 2... 0. eee eee ee eee 5-61

KEYMAP 2... ee ee ee tt ee 5 - 62

Modems . i.e ee ee ee ee ew ns 5 - 64

MODEM.COM.......0. 0000 eee een eee ene 5 - 64

Defining Modem Types .. 2.6 6. ee ee ee ee ens 5 - 65

SunRiver Terminal Driver... . 0. ee ee ee ee 5 - 66

MOS System Monitor... 0. ee ee tn 5 - 68

MOS-DIL81 5-3
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

Multi-Tasking Concepts

Thefirst time you boot your computer with MOS, the command
processor loads andall remaining base memory (memory below 1
megabyte) is available in a single-tasking environment. MOSgives
you theability to allocate the available extended memory (memory
above 1 megabyte) into partitions to create a multi-tasking environ-
ment. A partition in MOSis a portion of memory which is given
processing time for running programsor functions.

By dividing your computer’s memory into partitions, you can simul-

taneously run more than one program. Thefollowingillustration
shows how your computer’s memory is organized before multi-tasking
is set up, with only MOSloaded on your computer.

1 Megabyte
BIOS
MOS
Video Card
640K

BASE
MEMORY

(Partition 0)

Reserved for MOS

MEMORY BEFORE ADDING PARTITIONS

B- 4 MOS-D191
This diagram showsthefirst megabyte of addressable memory, which
is contiguous RAM that wecall base memory. The base memory is
typically 640K, but depending on your system can often be less, and
sometimes can be as much as 704K.

The upper portion of this first megabyte from 640K to 1MBis called
high memory andis typically used for BIOS, the MOS command
processor, video card memory and other add-in board memory.

Note that a small portion of low base memory is used by the MOS
command processor, and about another 16K is reserved for use by
MOS. Sometimes more than 16K is reserved for MOS if FREEMEM
space is not large enough. (See FREEMEMin the Configuration chap-
ter of this manual.)

Thefirst time this computer is booted with MOS, most of the base
memory is available for processing in a single-tasking environment.
This area of base memory is referred to as partition 0. Only one pro-
gram or function can be active in partition 0 at a time.

MOSlets you create additional partitions from the available extended

memory (or base memory) in your computer. Each partition you cre-
ate can run programs andfunctions separate from any otherparti-
tion. The .ADDTASK commandis provided with MOSto let you add
tasks (which wecall partitions), and define the amount of memory to
allocate for each partition. TheAADDTASK commandis explained in
detail later in this chapter.

For example, you could add two additional partitions in the extended
memory of this computer. Each partition is identified by a number.
The twopartitions we add will be partitions 1 and 2. The following
diagram illustrates the memory divisions for multi-tasking.

MOS-DL9I BB
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

1 Megabyte
BIOS
MOS
Video Card
640K

BASE
MEMORY

(Partition 0)

Reserved for MOS

MEMORY AFTER ADDING PARTITIONS

When you load MOS, a portion of the commandprocessoris available

for sharing amongthepartitions. When you add a partition, the por-
tion of the commandprocessor that cannot be shared loadsin the
memory allocated for that partition.

The commandprocessor will occupy a small portion of memory in

each partition you add. You may set up as many partitions as the
amount of memory in your computer will accommodate.

5-6 MOS-D191
 Multi-Tasking Processing

There are many advantages to processing in a multi-tasking environ-

ment. For example, you may be working in partition 0 and process a
lengthy report. While the report is runningin a single-tasking en-
vironment, you can do nothing but wait.

With multi-tasking capability, you could switch to partition 1 and

load and process a spreadsheet. While both partitions 0 and 1 are ac-
tive, you can switch to partition 2 and perform any other type of
processing you desire.

If you have a modem, you may set up one partition that does nothing
except transmit and receive files. While the modem is active, you may
be processing in other partitions.

Although processing maybeactive in several partitions, you may ac-

cess and display the processing in only one partition at a time. You
may easily switch from one partition to another by pressing the ac-
ae
cess keys that are assigned to each partition.

To access and display more than one partition at a time requires a

multi-user environment.

Muiti-Oser Concepts

The multi-user versions of MOSlet you connect either terminals or

workstations to the host computer so that more than one user has ac-
cess to the resources of your computer. Each workstation functions in
a similar manneras the main console.

Terminals communicate with the computerthroughserial ports. The

-ADDTASK commandlets you assign the serial port to which each ter-
minal is connected, and the terminal type and baud rate for com-
munication.

Workstations consisting of PC monitors and keyboards connect to the

computer through additional hardware and add-in boards. The .AD-
DTASK commandis used to assign the logical port number to which
each workstation is connected and the workstation type.

MOS-DL9L ~7
a
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

A user at any workstation or terminal can access any partition set up

on the computer. The users are sharing the computer’s processing
powerandall available devices; disk drives, printers, etc. Each user
appears to be processing as if they were a separate computer,al-
though they are sharing the same computer’s resources.

Multi-User Processing

The multi-user capability of MOS provides many advantages. For ex-

ample, while one user is running a word processing application,
another user may be working with a spreadsheet application. With
an accounting application, one user may be entering orders while
another user is printing invoices and another user is entering inven-
tory receipts.

If you run an application in a multi-user environment, you should be

aware if the application was written to facilitate record andfile shar-
ing. If not, you maycorrupt your files if two or more users attempt to
write to the samefile at the sametime.

There are many features in MOSthat let you define the processing
environment. Security lets you restrict a user’s access to partitions,
directories and files. Security may be set up for only a few users, or
for all users. You should review the Security chapter in this manual
to determine whether or not you want to use security on your system.

The MOSPrint. Spooler provides a method to control the printing

operations of your computer. If two users send output to the same
printer at the same time without spooling, the output will be garbage.
The spooler intercepts printer output and sends onefile at a time to
the printer.

Time Sharing

The multi-tasking capability of MOSis based on the principle of time

sharing. The SLICE commandstatement in the CONFIG.SYSfile
controls the amountof time each partition receives. If your computer
has only partition 0, then partition 0 is using all the processing time.
If you add partition 1, then processing timeis shared between the
twopartitions.

5-8 MOS-D191
When you first boot your computer, the default value for the SLICE
command statementis one time tick, which is approximately 1/18 of a
second. MOSconstantly gives each partition in turn an equal share of
the processing time. Partitions that are waiting, or "at rest" always
give up their turn.

As you add more partitions or more users, you may notice slightly
slower processing time in each partition. This is because the more ac-
tive partitions there are, the longer it takes MOSto get to each parti-
tion to give it processing time.

There are several utility functions in MOSthat let you control the
processing time allocated to each partition, as well as whether or not
a specific partition is to use disk caching. The commandthat provides
these functions isMOSADM.

There is also a .MOS commandthatprovides utility functionsto let

you control keyboard checking, the use of IRQ’s, the initialization of
serial ports, the video mode and several other necessary utilities. You
mayalso use a utility function in the .MOS commandto adjust the
size of a partition.

Rebooting Tasks

Multiuser partitions may be rebooted independently of the host com-

puter by pressing the CTRL - ALT - DEL keys at the same time on the
workstation’s keyboard.

The workstations own task MUSTbe displayed on the screen before

pressing the keys to reboot, i.e. you may not have switched out of
your task to view another task’s display. If you have switched outof
your own task, pressing CTRL - ALT - DEL will have noeffect. To
reboot, switch back into your own task andpress the keysagain.

Workstations viewing a rebooted task on their monitors will be

switched back to their own task upon reboot of the viewed task.

As usual, pressing the CTRL - ALT - DEL keys simultaneously on the

host computer keyboard will reboot the entire system. In addition to
rebooting the host partition (task 0), this is of course the only way to
reboot any multitasking background partitions on the host computer.

MOS-D191 a-9
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

Multi-Tasking and Multi-User Commands

The .ADDTASK commandlets you create a partition for multi-task-

ing capability. If you have a multi-user version of MOS, you mayin-
clude the appropriate operands to define the environmentfor
communicating with a workstation or terminal.

The .REMTASK command may be used to remove any partitions that

are currently defined.

The .SWITCH commandallows you to switch to a specific partition

with a commandline entry rather than with the ALT - number key
partition access method.

The following explains the ADDTASK command, .REMTASK com-

mandandpartition access in detail.

oo

-16 MOS-D191
ot
ADDTASK

The .ADDTASK commandlets you create a memory partition (task).

If you have multi-user capability, you may assign a terminal ID, port
numberand baudrate or workstation numberfor the partition. The
-ADDTASK command maybeincluded in the AUTOEXEC.BATfile
to automatically add a task when you boot your computer. You may
also enter an .ADDTASK commandat the MOS system prompt from
a workstation or the main console to add a task at any time.

Type: Extrinsic.

Form: AADDTASK memsizeK | MAX,ftask ID}, {classj, {startup},

fterm 1D}, (port,baud rate} | {workstation number}

Operands:

memsize enter the amount of memory you wantto initially allocate

to the task, which must be at least 32K. The maximum is
determined by the amountof free memory that is remain-
ing on your computer, and cannot be larger than ap-
proximately 640K. The exact maximum depends on your
system configuration. The memory size should be large
enoughto facilitate whatever applications are to be run in
the partition.

K you may enter.a K to document that the memory size for

the partition is in kilobytes. However, the K with the
memory size in the.AADDTASK commandis optional.

MAX entering MAX instead of a memory size will add a task of

maximum possible size for your system configuration.

task ID enter up to two digits for the task numberto assign to the
partition. Zero is reserved for the partition in base
memory. The number entered correspondsto the access
key(s) by which the partition is accessed. If not entered,
MOSassigns thefirst available task number in sequence.

MOS-D191 5-1i
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

class enter the security class to assign to the partition.

Defaults to a blank classif not entered. (If security is
used you must create the file $$USER.SYSin your root
directory to define security parameters for each user. See
the Security chapter in this manual.)

startup enter up to eight characters for the name of a startup

batch file for the task. The startup file must be on the
root directory of the drive from which the .ADDTASK com-
mand is invoked. Enter only the file name without a drive
identifier, directory name or .BAT extension. If a nameis
not entered, MOS does not use a startup batchfile. (This
file is similar to the host computer’s AUTOEXEC.BATfile
in that it is used to customize the path, prompt, or other
variables for the task.)

term {D in a multi-user environment, enter up to eight characters

for the file name of the terminal or workstation device
driver for the partition. Enter the file name without the
.SYS extension. All drivers must be defined with the
DEVICE= command statement in your CONFIG.SYSfile.
The following are the terminal/workstation device drivers
provided with MOS:

PCTERM for PC type terminals, Ampex 232, Falco

5500, Kimtron KT-7 PC and KT-70, Link
Technologies MC1, MC3, MC5 and
PCTerm, TeleVideo PCS1, Wyse Wy-60
and Wy-150.

SH - for MaXtation SH-4/M workstations

VNA - for Video Network Adapter workstations

TITERM for Teletype type terminals

AVTERM - for ADDS Viewpoint type terminals

3ATERM -ADM3A

TITERM - Televideo 910

MOS-D1 OL
 52TERM - DEC VT-52

31ITERM -IBM 3101

19TERM_ - Zenith Z-19

TVTERM Televideo 912C, 920C, 925

EXTERM - Excel 42/44

ANTERM - ANSI terminals

ATTERM - AT&T 605 Business Communications

Terminal

ELTERM - for EmuLink Terminal Emulation

Software.

SRTERM_ - SunRiver Fiber Optic Workstation

port The logical port numberof the serial port through which
the terminal for this task is connected to the host com-
puter. This port numberis based on the orderit is listed
in the $SERIAL.SYS statement in your CONFIG.SYS
file. For example, 2 represents the secondserial port ad-
dress listed in the DEVICE=$SERIAL.SYSstatement.
See $SERIAL.SYSin the Configuration chapter.

NOT: Other add-in serial port devices may also be used

to connect terminals, such as a Maxpeedintelligent serial
port board. If so, the port addresses are assigned sequen-
tially as the various drivers are listed in the CON-
FIG.SYSfile. You can use the MOS INFO commandto
display a list of the serial drivers loaded on the system
and whatlogical port numbers have been assigned to
each device.

baudrat® in a multi-user environment, enter the baud rate at which

the terminal and the host computer communicate. You
may set the baud rate at up to 115,200. However, most
terminals work reliably only when the baudrate is set at
9600, 19200or 38400.

MOS-D191 “13
ar
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

workstation Enter the numberof the workstation, e.g. 1 for the first
number workstation, 2 for the second, etc. (This operand is used
for hardware-based workstations like VNA and Ma- —
Xtation workstations, and replaces the "port" and "baud
rate" operands used with terminals.)

Explanation:

Whenyou boot MOSthefirst time, only partition 0 in base memory is

available. You must add each additional partition you want on the
system by using the .ADDTASK command.

To add a multi-tasking partition, only the memory size or "MAX"is re-

quired with the command. For example:

ADDTASK MAX

This will add a background task of maximum size with the next se-
quential task ID number,a blank security class and no startup batch
file for customizing the path, prompt, or other variables for that task. —~

You may add tasksof a specific size by including the memory size, in
Kilobytes, with the command. For example:

ADDTASK St2

If other than the default settings and/or a startup batchfile is

needed, they can be entered with the command. You must enter a
comma in the commandline as a delimiter between the operands.
You may omit an operand in the .:ADDTASK commandby entering a
commain place of the operand. For example, to add a partition and
assign only a memory size the startup batch file TASK.BAT,the com-
mandis:

ADBTASK 256,,,TASK

Note that a commais entered in the positions for the task ID and —
security class. You do not need to enter any commasafter the last
operand in the commandline.

5-44 MOSs-D191
 You must use the partition access keys associated with the task num-
ber to access the partition. Partition access keys are explained follow-
ao,
ing these commands.

If you add three partitions with task numbers1, 2 and 3, and then
use the .REMTASK (remove task) command to remove task 2, only
tasks 1 and 3 are defined. If you then add anothertask and do not as-
sign a task number, MOSwill assign the new partition task number
2, which is the first available number. For better control, you may
want to specify a task number, for example:

-ADDTASK 256,5

The class operand is used only when user security is active on your
computer. Each partition may have one class assigned to it. Only
users that are allowed access to that class can access the partition
after they sign on. The access keys to a partition that a useris
restricted from accessing will not work for that user. See the Security
chapter of this manual for more detail.
oo

The startup file is a batch file that you must create prior to invoking
the .ADDTASK command.Thefile must be located on the root direc-
tory of the boot drive. MOS will automatically invoke the batchfile
from the .ADDTASK commandas a nestedbatchfile. The startup
batch file may contain any commands you want to automatically in-
vokefor a partition.

For example, you may want to assign the system promptin each par-
tition to display the task number. In a multi-user environment, you
may want to have the promptdisplay a user’s nameorinitials or the
task ID number.

The startup file may also contain a .PATH commandfor a specific

user, or automatically bring up a menu on the videoscreen at a user’s
workstation.If security is active, the startup file must contain a .SIG-
NON commandto bring up the partition with the signon screen.

For example, the startup batch file TASK.BAT mightcontain the fol-
lowing commandsto customize the environmentfor that task:

MOS-D191 5-15
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

TASK.BAT

BATECHO OFF
PATH=CACAPCMOS
PROMPT=(TASK $1] $P$G

NOTE:The $I operand causes the task ID numberof the task to ap-

pear in the prompt. This allows users to easily determine what task
they are presently in.

Terminal ID’s are required only in a multi-user environment when

terminals or workstations are connected to the main console. MOS
must know whatdriver to use for communicating with each terminal
or workstation.

If a terminal or workstation does not function properly with one of

the device drivers supplied with MOS,refer to the documentation
that came with the workstation to identify and define the correct
device driver.

MOS must also know which port a terminal is connected to, and the
baudrate for communications. There is no default for these two
operands. The $SERIAL.SYSdevice driver that defines serial ports
mustbe defined with a DEVICE= command statement in your CON-
FIG.SYSfile.

For example, the following command:

ADDTASK 572,1,A,USER1,PCTERM,2,58400

would add task number 1 with a 512K memory size, security class A,
andstart-up batch file USER1I.BAT. PCTERM.SYSwould be theter-
minal driver used for communication, The terminal would be con-
nected to port 2, the second port defined with your $SERIAL.SYS
statement. The baud rate for communications would be 38400.

-16 MOS-DL9L
Or
Workstationsdiffer slightly from terminals. The ADDTASK com-
mandto add a 600K task for a MaXtation SH-4/M workstation with
the next sequential task ID number,a blank security class and the
startup batch file TASK1.BAT mightbe:

ADDTASK 600,,,TASK1,SH,1

where SH.SYSis the device driver, and 1 represents the first Ma-
Xtation workstation.

NOTE: Notice that for workstations the "workstation number"

replaces the "port" and "baud rate" operands normally usedforter-
minals.

A user that is working in a partition may invoke theAADDTASK com-

mandto add up to 99 other partitions, limited by available memory.
After addingthepartition, the user may use the partition access keys
to access the new partition.

If user security is active, a user may also change the security class of
the partition in which the user signed on, or may changethe default
output class that is assigned to anyfiles or directories the user
creates in that partition. See the .CLASS commandin the security
chapterof this manual.

MOS-D191 5-17
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

REMTASK

-REMTASKlets you remove a memory partition from the system.

You may use .REMTASKto removepartitions added from the
AUTOEXEC.BATfile when you booted your computer, or partitions
that you have added at the system prompt.

Type: Extrinsic.

Form: JREMTASK task ID | {ALL}

Operand:

task ID enter the task numberof the partition to remove.

ALL entering ALL instead of a task ID number removesall

tasks (except task 0)

Explanation:

You may tse .REMTASKto remove any task to which you have un-
restricted access, except partition 0. Partition 0 is absolute and may
never be removed. To removea partition with a task ID of 4, you
would enter:

-REMTASK 4

Entering the following commandwill removeall tasks on the system

(except task 0):

REMTASK ALL

NOTE: The REMTASK ALL commandcan only be run from task 0.

When you remove a partition, the task ID of that partition is then

available for assignment to anotherpartition. If you then add a parti-
tion without specifying an ID, MOS will automatically assign the oo
first task number available.

5-18 MOS-0191
 For example, you may have partitions 1, 2, 3 and 4 set up on your sys-
tem. You use .REMTASKto removepartition 2. You then add
anotherpartition without specifying a partition number. The new par-
tition then becomespartition 2.

You can remove a partition in which only one useris currently

processingif you have unrestricted access to that partition. If more
than oneuser is currently accessing a partition, MOS will not allow
you to removeit, even if you have unrestricted access.

When you remove a partition, MOSclosesall files that are open in

that partition. If the partition you remove is running at a worksta-
tion, the workstation is rendered inactive. You can even removea par-
tition in which you're currently processing, but to do so will render
your workstation inactive, and you will not be able to access any
other partitions.

You may reactivate any inactive workstation by addinga partition for

that workstation from the main console or from any other active
workstation.

Partition Access

Partition Access Method (PAM switching) allows a user to switch into

any partition from the main console, or from any workstation.If parti-
tion level security is active, users may only access the tasks that they
have the propersecurity class for.

Partition Access Keys

The ALT key and the numbers on the key are used to
switch between tasks. To switch tasks, hold down the ALT key, type
the number(s) of the task ID for the partition you want to access, and
then release the ALT key. (The task ID numbersare assigned by the
.ADDTASK commandand can be viewed with the MOS MAP com-
a,
mand.)

To access the partition assigned task ID 12, hold down the ALT key
and type a 1 and then type a 2 on the numeric keypad, then release
the ALT key, for example:

MOS-D191 5-19
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

ALT 1 2

To return to the host partition (task 0) hold down the ALTkey,type 0

on the numeric key pad, and then release the ALT key.

SWITCH Command

The .SWITCH commandallows you to switch to a specific partition

with a commandline entry rather than with the ALT - number key
Partition Access Method. The commandform is:

SWITCH {task ID}

where task ID is the numberof the task to which you want to switch.
This is helpful for use in batch files. If you do not specify a task num-
ber, you will be switched to the next task number in sequence.

Turning Partition Access On and Off

Whenyoufirst boot MOS, partition access is on. If the ALT and

numeric key pad sequenceconflicts with an application program’s use
of the keyboard, you may turn off partition access. To toggle partition
access off, hold down the ALT key and type the nine on the numeric
key pad three times. For example, press ALT 9 9 9 to turn off parti-
tion access. When you need to turn partition access back on, you may
then press ALT 9 9 9 again.

MOS Utility Functions

There are several utilities in MOS that you mayfind helpful in a

multi-tasking or multi-user environment. There are two commands
that invokethe utilities. The .MOS commandprovides several
utilities that should be available to all users. The .MOSADM com-
mandallows several additional utilities that should be reserved for
the system administrator.

5-20 MOS-D19%
The .MOS Utility Command

You maydisplay a list of the utility functions available in .MOS by

entering .MOSat the system prompt. The display appears on your
video screen similar to the following:

These functions are invoked at the system prompt from within a par-
tition by typing .MOS, followed by the function and any necessary
operands. To invoke the MAP function, you would type .MOS, a
space, MAP,and then press ENTER. For example:

MOS MAP

MOS-D191 &- 21
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

Only thefirst three characters of a function are required to invoke

the function. For example either form of the following will invoke the
.MOS FREEIRQ function:

.MOS FRE 2 or .MOS FREEIRQ 2

A utility function is active only for the partition you are in when the
function is invoked.If there is a function that you always want to
have active for a partition, you may wantto includeit in the startup
batch file for that partition.

The following explains each utility function along with any operands
that must be entered with the function.

MOS MAP

The MAP function displays a map of statistical information about the

partitions set up on your computer, and then returns control to MOS.
You may not changeany of the statistical information with this func-
tion. The mapdisplay is similar to the following:

An asterisk (*) appears next to the task ID numberfrom which the

map wasloaded. "Start" indicates the memory address wherethis
partition starts in memory. "Size" is the memory size of the partition.
"Video" displays the current video modefor each partition.

If a user has signed on to a partition with a user ID, it is displayed.

"Program" displays the program currently being executed. The cur-
rent port and baudrate appear in the next two columns if the task is
a multiuser task for a terminal; if not, "N/A"is displayed.

= 22 MOS-D191
"Pri" is the priority assigned to each partition. "Slice" is the number
of time ticks assigned to each partition. "Files" displays the number
of files currently open in each partition. "Status" displays whether
the partition is active or in a waiting state.

The bottom of the display shows how much system memory is avail-
able, how much expanded memory has beenassignedto the task if
any, and how much memory hasbeenassigned/used for the System
Memory Pool (SMP).

MOS DIS

The DIS function lets you disable anything runningin a partition

that constantly takes processor time just to check for keyboard input.
The constant checking for keyboard input may take processing time
away from other programs that actually require use of the processor.

Invoking the .MOS DISfunction in a partition will speed throughput

by freeing the processor until an actual keyboard requestis issued.

Note that DIS cannot be used for all applications because they may
be disabled when you don’t want them to be. Sometrial and error is
needed to determine when DIS is appropriate. ,

MOS NODIS

The NODISfunction returns keyboard checking back to its normal

state under MOS. This function is necessary only when a previous
DIS function has been invoked.

MOS USEIRG n {hhh}

An IRQ is a hardware interruptline or vector. The USEIRQ com-

mandlets you reserve control of an interrupt vector or optionally a
port specific interrupt vector, where "n" is the IRQ number and
"hhhh"is a four digit hexadecimal number representing the address
of a serial communicationsport.

MOS-D191 D- 23
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

Serial port COM1 normally uses IRQ 4 as its default, and COM2 nor-
mally uses IRQ 3 as its default. Some applications and hardwarere-
quire the use of a specific interrupt vector, which may be 2, 5, 6 or 7. _
If a specific interrupt is required by the application or hardware
product, it will be explained in the documentation that comes with
the product. The valid IRQ numbers you mayreserve are 2 through 7.

For example, many tape backup units require the use of IRQ 6, which
is normally used by the system floppy disks. Before using such a tape
backup unit you should reserve IRQ 6 with the MOS USEIRQ 6 com-
mand. When your backupis finished, enter the command MOS
FREEIRQ6 to return use of IRQ 6 to the floppy disks.

Thereare three different entities that can be associated with an IRQ

reservation: a device driver, a task, and a task/port combination.
Each has a different action and effect. on the system.In thefirst two
cases an IRQ is specifically reserved by a device driver or a task. In
the last instance one IRQ maybe split between more than one task
based on theuseof different serial ports.
om"
When an IRQ is reserved by a device driver such as $SERIAL.SYS,
no other reservation can be made for that same IRQ, and the device
driver will always receive control when that IRQ occurs.

When an IRQ is reserved by a task in a general, non-port specific

manner, no other reservation can be made for that same IRQ. For ex-
ample the command:

MOS USEIRG 3

entered in a task would mean that task will always receive control
when an IRQ 3 occurs.

MOSwill respond with the following message if the requested inter-

rupt vector is available:

5 - 24. MOS-D191
If the interrupt vector is already assigned to another task or device,
one of the following messages appears:

When an IRQ is reserved by a task in a port specific manner, no other

type of reservation may be made except another port specific one. For
example,if the following command was enteredin task 0:

MOS USEIRQ 5 06A0

when an IRQ 5 occurs, MOS will test the serial port at address O6A0
to see if it caused the IRQ to occur. If it did then task 0 will receive
control.

MOSwill respond with the following messageif the interrupt vector

and port requested aboveare available:

If you then tried to makea general reservation for IRQ 5 by entering:

.MOS USEIRQ &

the following message would appear:

indicating that a port specific IRQ reservation was already on record.

MOS-D1L9i 5-25
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

Although you could make morethan oneport specific IRQ reservation

in the sametask, the typical case would be for separate tasks to
share an IRQ based on different serial ports. o—~

For example, if you now entered the following commandin task 1:

MOS USEIRG 5 06A8

when an IRQ 5 occurs,if the serial port at address 06A8 caused the
TRQ,then task 1 would receive control.

Using this method you could provide for multiple mouse support.
Each mouse would communicate using the same IRQ but through a
different port. (Note that your mouse software would have to be able
to be configured for IRQs and ports that are available in your specific
hardware environment.)

MOS PIREEDRG n (bhhh}

The FREEIRQfunction lets you release an interrupt vector whenit is ~

no longer required for use in a partition.

You can only release an interrupt vector while in the partition where
it was originally reserved. For example, if the release of IRQ 3 is suc-
cessful, the following message appears:

If the release is not successful, one of the following messages may ap-
pear:

a“ \.

5 - 26 MOS-DI9L
 In orderto free a port specific IRQ reservation, the port must be
specified along with the IRQ. For example:

MOS FREEIRG 5 06A0

If the release is successful, the following message will appear:

If that port was not previously reserved, the following message will
appear:

—,

MOS IRQ

The IRQ function will display the status of the interrupt vectors and
ports that are currently reserved on the system. For example:

If a device driver is using an IRQ thereis no task or port association

so no entry appears in those columns and the message: (reserved by
device driver) appearsto the right.

MOS-DL8I 5-27
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

For general IRQ reservations, the port column hasno entry and the
message:(non port specific reservation) appears.

The asterisk by task number0, indicates that task #0 is the task in

which this IRQ listing is being done (the same as with the MOS MAP
display).

Interrupt vectors that are still available for use will not appear in the
display. From our example display you can tell that interrupt vectors
6 and 7 are available for use.

MOS WAIT nnnnn or .MOS WAIT mm-dd-vy hhiummiss

The WAITfunction lets you instruct MOSto wait for an event before
continuing. The event may be a numberof seconds (nnnnn)up to
99999,or a specific date and time that must be enteredin the form
mm-dd-yy hh:mm:ss. The date is optional and may be omitted to set
only a specific time. The hh:mm:ssis the time known to the computer
wherehhis 0 to 24 for the hour, mm is 0 to 60 for the minutes, and ss
is 0 to 60 for the seconds.

For example, you may wantto set up a batchfile that will export files
to a back up device late in the evening when there is no one on the
computer. You may include .MOS WAITin a batchfile with the .EX-
PORT commandso that the export occurs at a specific time. You may
invokethe batchfile at the end of the day, and the export will be com-
plete the next morning.

Whenthe WAITfunction is active, the following message displays on

the video screen of the workstation where the function was invoked:

Any user may cancel the wait function by pressing any key. Aborting
the WAITfunction sets an error level one. If the WAIT function is
processing from within a batchfile, control returnsto the next state-
ment in the batch file. You may wantto set the next statement in the
batchfile for errorlevel checking.

5-28 MOS-DL91
MOS VMODE mode

The VMODEfunction lets you change the video mode to meetthere-

quirements of an application program. This function may be used at
any workstation, and affects only the workstation whereit is invoked.
There are somerestrictions on using certain modesas explained
below. The values you may enter for mode are:

MONDO- monochromecard
CGA - 80column color graphics adapter
C40 -40column color graphics adapter
HG1_ - 32K Hercules type 1 support
HG2_~ - 64K Hercules type 2 support
E43 - 48 Line EGA Main Console
EGA - Multi-tasking EGA graphics - 80 column
E40 - Multi-tasking EGA graphics - 40 column
VGA - Multi-tasking VGA graphics - 80 column
V40 - Multi-tasking VGAgraphics - 40 column

If you run a program at a terminal and the program "sees" a graphics

card, the terminal may attempt to use graphics mode. This will cause
undesirable results if the terminal does not support graphics.

You may use the VMODEfunction at a workstation to make an ap-

plication think you have monochromecard. For example:

MOS VMODE MONO

You may have a color monitor attached to the main console. Manyter-
minals will not support color. If an application that runs in color
causes problems with the video display at a workstation, you may
need to change the mode at the workstation to monochrome before
running the application that causes the problem.

HG1 and HG2 set the video mode to recognize and work with a her-
cules type video card.

E48 sets the video display for 43 lines in graphics mode instead of 25
lines. This mode will require at least 256K of memory in each task
whereit is set. The resolution of some graphics applications may re-
quire the 43 line display.

MOS-DI981 5» 29
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

EGA, E40, VGA and V40set the video modeto recognize a graphics
adapter card, and will require at least 256K of memory in each task
where they are set.

VGA and V40are basically the same as the corresponding EGA

modes, except that they use a new technology introduced with the
IBM Personal Series/2.

Note that you may set up EGA and E40 on any computer, but you can
only switch in and out of EGA tasks on an 80386-based computer or
greater (80486, etc.). VGA and V40 can also be set up on any com-
puter, but the 80386 requirement for task switching does not apply.
Also, these four multi-tasking modeswill only work at the main con-
sole, not at terminal workstations. When you switch out of any EGA
or VGAtask, any active processing in that task is suspended. The
.MOS MAP display will show a status of "HOLD"for all suspended
tasks.

MOS SERINIT n,r,p,),s,h

This utility lets you initialize a specific serial port by the port number
defined with the $SERIAL.SYSdevice driver, and define the at-
tributes for the port as follows:

n - the port number

r - the baud rate for communications
p - the parity may be n (none), e (even) or o (odd)
b - the numberof data bits
s - the numberofstop bits
h - handshakingprotocol

The handshaking "h" operand can be set to:

N - none
D -DTR
X - XON/XOFF
P-XPC
R- RTS

These are the same handshaking protocols that are used with the
$SERIAL.SYS driver. See $SERIAL.SYS in the Configuration chap-
ter for more information.

5 - 30 MOS-Di91
 For example, you may have a modem and needto initialize a serial
port to set up the mode for communications, The commandto initial-
“—~ ize a port with its attributes could be as follows:

.MOS SERINIT 4,19200,n,8,1,¢

This utility commandwill initialize port 4 at a baud rate of 19,200

with no parity, 8 data bits and 1 stop bit, and DTR handshaking..

MOS ROUTE LPTn jto} COMn

This utility lets you redirect printer output that is sent to an LPTn
device so that it will be sent to a COM port. This can be LPT1, LPT2
or LPT3. The COMport for redirection can be COM1 or COM2. This
is useful if you have a serial printer.

For example, the following command will intercept any printer out-
put sent to LPT1 anddirect the output to COM2, wheretheprinteris
actually connected to the computer:

MOS ROUTE LPTT TO COM2

The "TO"in the this commandis optional. You could also enter this
commandas:

MOS ROUTE LPT? COM2

MOS ROUTE LPTn (to} LPTn

This utility lets you redirect printer output that is sent to an LPTn
device to a different LPTn device. This is useful to redirect printer
output that an application sends to LPT1 to a different print device
(LPT2 or LPT3).

For example, the following commandwill intercept any printer out-

put sent to LPT1 anddirect the output to LPT2.

MOS ROUTE LPT? TO LPT2

The "TO" in the this commandis optional. You could also enterthis
commandwith only a space between LPTn and LPTn.

MOS-D191 5-3
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

MOS ROUTE LPTn (to} TERM

This utility lets you redirect printer output that is sent to an LPTn
device to a printer attached to your terminal. This is only true for
most of the PCTERM terminal types. Your terminal must have a
serial or parallel port for the printer connection. For example, if you
have a printer connected to your terminal, the following command
redirects output normally sent to LPT1 to the locally attached printer:

.MOS ROUTE LPT1 TO TERM

If a previous .ROUTE commandhas been invokedto redirect printer

output to a COMn device, the COMn device will override the redirec-
tion to a terminal. The "TO"in this commandis optional.

MOS ROUTE LPT {to} NOTERM

This commandwill cancel a previous commandthat redirected output

to a printer. For example, to cancel the redirection of printer output
in the previous example, the command would be:

MOS ROUTE LPT1 TO NOTERM

Anyprinter output for this partition will then be directed to the pre-
viously defined LPT1 device. The "TO" in this commandis optional.

MOS RESIZE nnn

This utility lets you adjust the size of your partition at any time. The
nnnK represents the size of the partition in kilobytes (K). This size
maybe from a minimum of 32K to a maximum of 640K, depending on
your available memory. You must enter the K after the size to docu-
mentthatit is in kilobytes.

You may adjust the size of your partition at any time. For example,if
you need to increase the size for a partition before you can run an ap-
plication program, you could enter the following command:

MOS RESIZE 2561

This utility will adjust the size of only the partition you are currently
workingin.

5-32 MOS-D191
MOS INFO

The .MOS INFOdisplay indicates specifically where in memory cer-

tain key components of the system are loaded. When you make a
change in the memory ranges available for use by MOS with the
FREEMEM commandstatement in your CONFIG.SYSfile, this dis-
play will show you what has beenable to relocate to high memory.
This is useful when trying to maximize your application task size.

If memory managementis present on the system, entering .MOS

INFO at the system promptwill bring up a display similar to the fol-
lowing:

If memory management is NOT used, a display similar to the follow-

ing will appear:

MOS-DIS1 5» 33
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

With memory management,the location where the cache is mapped

into low memory is listed in the display for "Disk Cache". With no
memory management, the actual location of the cacheis listed.

Additional information will be shown in the MOS INFOdisplayif

necessary to indicate which communication ports are being controlled
by MOS’s $SERIAL.SYSdevice driver and which ports are being con-
trolled by other serial drivers such as the SunRiverserial driver or
the Maxpeedintelligent serial board driver. This information will ap-
pear at the bottom of the MOS INFOdisplay, similar to the following:

In this example thefirst three COM ports are undercontrol of the PC-
MOS $SERIAL.SYSdriver. There are three PC-type terminals con-
nected to the host computer through these ports. There are also four
SunRiver workstations installed. Since there are two serial ports on
each SunRiver workstation, the first SunRiver workstation’s serial
ports are therefore COM4 and COMB,the second SunRiver
workstation’s are COM6 and COM7, etc. You need to know these oo,
numbers whenspecifying the port number "n" with the MOS MOUSE
commandto initialize the mouse for the task.

MOS-D1L91
&
Gt
&
Also note in this example that the FREEMEMstatements conflict
with the default location of the SRTERM.SYSterminal driver’s
workspace at £4000 to E8000. Either the FREEMEM statements
would have to be changed to avoid using that address range, or the
SRTERM.SYSdriver’s workspace would have to be located at a dif-
ferent address.

If an eight-port Maxpeedserial port board was installed for terminal

connections instead of the SunRiver workstations, the eight ports on
it would be COM4 through COM11.

MOS DSPORT n

Sharing a port between $SERIAL.SYScontrol and use by a com-

munications package can be accomplished with .MOS DSPORTn.

Whenthefollowing statement is used in the CONFIG.SYSfile, 03f8

becomeslogical port number1 of the serial driver:

DEVICE=$SERIAL.SYS /AD=03f8,IN=4/AD=06a0,IN=3/AD=06a8

If you connect a modem to this port and set it up for auto answer and
add a task for port 1, you would then have a multi-user environment
in which a remote dumb terminal and modem could dial in to access
the host machine.

However, if you occasionally wanted to use the modem from the

master console with a communications package, such as CrossTalk,
to call up a bulletin board service you couldn’t. Since port 03f8 is
under $SERIAL.SYS’s control it would not permit serial communica-
tions to work. You would have to edit your config.sys file, remove 03f8
from the $SERIAL.SYS statement, and re-boot the machine.In fact,
on some machinesif you try to use CrossTalk without disabling the
port, it will lock up the system.

To address this inconvenience, the .MOS DSPORT n command has

been added to the MOSutility to tell $SERIAL.SYS to temporarily
disable a port in such a way that a communications package can use
it. For port 1 the command would be:

MOS DSPORT 1

MOS-DIS1 5» do
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

The requirements for successful use of this command are that

$SERIAL.SYS(or a similar serial communications driver) be in-
stalled, that the specified port number bea valid port, and that the
irq associated with that port not be shared by any other ports defined
with the serial driver. Also, the port must not be in use as the AD-
DTASKport of any task,i.e. the port that is used by a terminal which
is the console of a task.

Once a port has been disabled with .MOS DSPORTit can be used
again later for a dumb terminal workstation by initializing that task
with the .ADDTASK command. Whena call is made to $SERIAL.SYS
to initialize a port, as .ADDTASK does when a port is specified,
$SERIAL.SYSreverses the effect of the disable action. This could be
done with either a local direct cabled workstation or a remote
workstation via modem.

If you intendto use a port with a modem onit for a remote LANLink
connection, you must re-initialize the port with .MOS SERINITto
reverse the effects of the disable command before running LAN ON.

MOS MOUSE

Once the mouse driver $MOUSE.SYS(see the Configuration chapter)

is active on your system you mustinitialize the mousein the task in
which it will run. This is done with the MOSutility command:

MOS MOUSE n{r

where:

n= the COM port numberthat the mouse is connectedto. (1 for

COM1, 2 for COM2,etc.) Can be obtained from the Com-
munications Driver Description list in the MOS INFO display.

jv = the baud rate at which the mouse will communicate. Defaults

to 1200. You must include the commaif you specify a baud
rate.

For example:

MOS MOUSE 71,2400

5- 36 MOS-D191
will initialize a 2-button mouse on COM1 at 2400 baudfor the task in
which the commandwasentered.

The commandcan be entered manually in each partition or invoked

automatically from a startup batch with the .ADDTASK commandfor
each partition. A startup batchfile for a partition is similar in func-
tion to the AUTOEXEC.BATfile on the host computer. See your MOS
User Guide for more information on this command and on usingstar-
tup batch files with the .ADDTASK command.

The MOS MOUSE command must be entered BEFORE you runthe

mouse program (MOUSE.COM) in your task to use the mouse.

Finally, enter the command "MOUSE"to run MOUSE.COMin the

task to start the mouse session. (Note that with applications with
their own mouse logic, such as Windows/286-based applications, you
don’t need to execute MOUSE.COMsince it is loaded and executed
automatically.)

For example, to install one mouse in the foreground task on the host
computer usingthefirst serial port (COM1), the following com-
mands/statements would be necessary:

CONFIG.SYSfile:

DEVICE=$SERIAL.SYS /AD=03F8,IN=4
DEVICE=$MOUSE.SYS

(Note that the $MOUSE.SYSdriver must be listed after all other

serial drivers in the CONFIG.SYSfile.)

AUTOEXEC.BATfile:

MOS MOUSE 14,2400

MOUSE

(This will initialize the mouse on thefirst serial port with a 2400
baud rate and then run MOUSE.COMto start the mousesession.
The commands mustbe in this order.)

MOS-D1L91 S- 37
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

Rememberthat these are the additional commandsand statements

that are requiredto install the mouse. Others mayalreadyexist in
either of thesefiles.

The MOSutility command:

MOS MOUSEoff

maybe enteredin a task if it is necessary to turn off mouse support

in that partition. This might be necessary for some unusual applica-
tion software. Once turned off, you must re-enter the MOS MOUSE
commandin the task to re-initialize the mouse for further use.

MOS KEYB

In order to use one of the foreign keyboard drivers you must inform
the system of the physical type of keyboard that is connected to the
workstation. The keyboard type is defined with the following com-
mand:

MOS KEYB. ATIPCIENISBILB

where:

AT = AT-Style keyboard
PC = PC-Style keyboard
EN = Enhanced keyboard
SB = Small type-ahead Buffer
LB = Large type-ahead Buffer

The default condition is for the Enhanced keyboard.If, for example,

an AT-Style keyboard was attached to the workstation you must
enter the following commandin that workstation’s task:

MOS KEYB AT

The MOS KEYB commandalso includes "type-ahead" buffer size

operands. The "LB", or large type-aheadbuffer is the default condi-
tion. When "SB"is used, the type-ahead buffer that MOS uses is
made smal] to match that of DOS.

5+ 38 MOS-DI91
 The type ahead buffer allows you to start typing your next command
while the current one is executing. However, under DOS,if you type
more than 15 characters ahead, you will hear a beep. This is because
the type ahead bufferis full.

Within a system which is running under DOS, this buffer is located

at a standard memory address. Under MOS,the type ahead buffer
was enlarged to 127 characters. In order to do this, the memory loca-
tion of this buffer had to be changed.

Someapplications programs set themselves up to interact with this

buffer and have been designed to expect the buffer to be in its stand-
ard memory location. Since there is a defined way to tell where the
buffer is, this is more of a weakness in the design of these applica-
tions rather than a problem with MOS.

In order to support such applications, MOSwill need to be able to

switch back to using the same SMALL type-ahead buffer that DOS
does and use the same memory location. This is what the MOS KEYB
~~, SB commandisfor.

The following commandshould therefore be entered in the task

where a small type-ahead buffer is required:

MOS KEYB SB

This change is task-specific and reversible (enter MOS KEYB LB).

Foreign Keyboard Device Drivers

The following device drivers can be used to remap or change the key
assignmentsof the standard U.S. English keyboard to those of the re-
quired national keyboard layout:

$KBBE.SYS- Belgium (Flemish) $KBNO.SYS- Norwegian

$KBDK.SYS - Danish $KBPO.SYS- Portuguese
$KBFR.SYS- French $KBSP.SYS - Spanish
$KBCF.SYS - French Canadian $KBSV.SYS - Swedish
$KBGR.SYS - German $KBSF.SYS- Swiss French
$KBIT.SYS- Italian $KBSG.SYS - Swiss German
$KBLA.SYS - Latin American $KBUK.SYS - United Kingdom
$KBNL.SYS - Netherlands

MOs-D191 5- 39
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

Enter the appropriate driver in your CONFIG.SYSfile with a

DEVICE= statement and reboot your computerto install the new key-
board driver. For example:

DEVICE=$KBFR.SYS

If it is necessary to switch back to the U.S. English keyboard layout

for some reason, press the CTRL - ALT - F1 keys at the sametime.
Whenyou are readyto return to the installed foreign keyboard layout
press the CTRL- ALT - F2 keys simultaneously. (Note that these are
system drivers, not task-specific drivers.)

MOS FILES on| off

The MOSutility command MOSFILESis used to place an upper

limit (20) on the numberoffiles that may be openedin the task in
which the commandis entered. The default is "off" since PC-MOSit-
self does not set any limit on the numberoffiles that may be opened
on the entire system. (A present application package that requires
the use of this command is ENABLEv3.0.)

Enter the following commandto set this limit:

MOS FILES on

To remove the limit, once set, enter:

MOS FILES off

MOS HOLD LPTs {nmnn) | OFF

The "MOS HOLD LPTx nnnn" commandcan be used to automatically

reserve a printer for use by a specific user for a specified length of
time. "x" specifies the printer, and "nnnn" specifies the reservation
time in seconds. The maximum is 9999 seconds (about 166 minutesor
2 & 3/4 hours).

This automatic reservation prevents other users from using the

printer for the specified time after the reserved user has accessedit.
This scheme allows both direct printing and spooled printing on the
system.

&- 40 MOs-DL91
If a user accesses a printer that is not in use by any other task (by
printing or checking the status), the printer will be reserved for that
user for 15 seconds. Any other user will receive a busy status from
that printer while it is reserved. The time between access and release
of the device (reservation time) can be set with the "nnnn" operand.

For example, entering:

MOS HOLD LPT1 60

only sets the reservation time for the LPT1 print device to 60
seconds.It does not actually access the printer, and therefore, does
not reserve the printer.

Entering:

MOS HOLD LPT

will then access the LPT1 print device and display the results of the
access and reservation.

Entering:

MOS HOLD LPT1 OFF

will release any reservation of the LPT1 print device.

Also see the "MOSADM HOLD task LPTx nnnn" commandfor the
system administrator. It is similar in function except it can set the
reservation time or release a printer for another task.

.MOS TSR on | off

The MOS TSR on commandcan be used to improve the performance

of some applications, particularly certain Terminate and Stay Resi-
dent (TSR) programs. If an application appears to pause/not process
for periods of time, or a TSR program will not pop-up reliably, enter
the following commandat the system prompt:

MOS TSR on

MOS-D191 5-41
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

To removetheutility, enter:

MOS TSR off

MOS ANSI onj off

This commandis used to turn on or off the emulation of ANSI.SYS.

With ANSI support turnedoff terminal screen handling is much im-
proved. The default state of the ANSI emulation support is ON.

MOS DOSVER 3.2/3.3

This commandis used to "tell" applications what version of DOS they

are running under. Since you are running PC-MOSyouare actually
fooling the application into thinkingit is running undera certain ver-
sion of DOS.This is necessary for some application to run properly.
For example, Microsoft Windows/286 v2.10 and 2.11 require DOS ver-
sion 3.2 to run properly.

The form for the commandis:

MOS DOSVER - Displays the current DOS version

supported.
MOS DOSVER 3.2 - Sets DOS version supported to 3.2
(Default)
MOS DOSVER 3.3 - Sets DOSversion supported to 3.3

5-42 MOS-D191
 The .MOSADMUtility Command

The .MOSADM commandprovides several additional utilities that

you may not want to makeavailableto all users. You may assign the
-MOSADM.COMfile a security class to allow only the system ad-
ministrator access to theseutilities.

You maydisplaya list of the utility functions available in.MOSADM

by entering .MOSADMat the system prompt. The display appears on
your video screen similar to the following:

These utility functions are invoked at the system prompt from within
any partition by typing .MOSADM,followed by the function and any
necessary operands.As in the .MOS command, you may invoke any of
these functions by entering only their first three characters.
wantin

MOS-DI181 5-43
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

MOSADM SLICE n {task}

The SLICE commandstatement in the CONFIG.SYSfile instructs

MOSto give each partition in turn an equal share of processing time.
The default for SLICE is one timetick, or approximately 1/18 of a
secondof processing time for each partition in turn.

The .MOSADMSLICEutility lets you give a partition more of the

processor’s time by increasing the numberof timeticks the partition
receives during its turn. The system administrator may include the
task ID numberto change the numberoftimeticks for a specific par-
tition. If you do not enter a task ID number,the numberof timeticks
will be changedfor the current partition. For example, you may issue
the following utility function while in a partition:

«MOSADM SLICE 3

MOSwill now give this partition 3/18 of a second processing time

during its turn. Becausethe partition has moreof the processor’s
time, any processing that occurs in the partition will be faster, but
the processing in other partitions will be slower.

You may also issue the following utility function to change the num-
ber of time ticks for a specific partition.

.MOSADM SLI 3 12

MOSwill now give the partition assigned task ID number12, 3/18 of

a second processing time during its turn.

The maximum numberof time ticks you may define with the SLICE
utility is 255, howeverthis is not a practical limit. A practical limit
for assigning timeticks is 4. Note that if you enter 0 for the number
of timeticks, it will disable the partition.

5- 44 MOS-DL9L
MOSADM PRI n {task}

The .MOSADM PRI(priority) function also lets you control the

amountof processing time for a partition, but is absolute where
SLICEis relative. Each partition has a priority of 2 when you boot
MOS. The PRIfunction lets you change thepriority level for a parti-
tion to a numberin the range of 0 to 7, with 7 being the highest
priority.

The system administrator may include the task ID numberto change

the priority for a specific partition. If you do not enter a task ID num-
ber, the priority numberwill be changed for the current partition. For
example:

MOSADM PRI 7

This commandwill change the priority for the current partition. The
following commandwill change the priority to 5 for the partition as-
signed task ID number2:

.MOSADM PRI 5S 2

The partition(s) with the highest priority will always get processing
time before any partition(s) with a lowerpriority.

In real practice, a word processor running in a priority 7 partition

will be given all the processing time until it no longer needsit.
Processing timeis then passed on to lowerpriorities.

If the partition with a priority of 7 is processing a program that re-

quires continual access of the processor, no other partitions can do
any processing.In effect, processing stops in other partitions. As soon
as the partition with a priority of 7 releases the processor, MOS
returns to giving theother partitions their timeticks for processing
in turn.

MOS-D191 5-45
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

MOSADM CACHE on] off

The CACHE configuration command statementsets up a cache of

memory for storing and retrieving data. A CACHE= statement must
be in your CONFIG.SYSfile for disk caching to be active on the sys-
tem. You may then use the .MOSADMutility command to turn disk
cachingon oroff for the entire system. For example, you may turn off
disk caching with the following command:

.MOSADM CACHE OFF

Turning off disk caching will cause everything in the CACHE to be

written to disk. This is a very good way to makesure that everything
has been physically written to disk before turning the system off.

If you later want to turn disk caching back on, you may enterthefol-
lowing command:

MOSADM CACHE ON

MOSADMSWITCH on] off {task}

The .MOSADM SWITCHutility lets you turn on and off the

capability to switch in and outof a partition (task), You may use this
feature for security purposes, or for better handling of video cards
that are not currently supported under PC-MOS. If you do not specify
a task number, the commandis invoked for the current task.

MOSADM TMPFACTOR [n}

The TMFACTORutility lets you adjust MOS’s timeslicing rate by

changing the value of one time tick to an amount less than the
default of 1/18 of a second. The command maybe entered when tasks
are busy. This utility causes MOS’s timeslicing rate to be increased
by a factor of "n".

For example, entering the command:

MOSADM TMFACTOR 2

5-46 MOS-DI9L
will change the value of one timetick to approximately 1/36 of a
second(1/18 divided by 2). This means that each task will in tun
receive 1/36 of a second of processing time rather than 1/18 of a
second. In other words, MOSwill switch tasks twice as often.

The effect of increasing the timeslicing rate is to improve the visual

smoothnessof scrolling displays and the response time between enter-
ing keystrokes and seeing the data appear on the screen.

NOTE: Usethe lowest value for "n" that gives satisfactory results
since using a larger multiplier than necessary will introduce extra
system overhead and reducethe overall system throughput. Values
for "n" in the range of 1 to 20 should work best in most cases. The
maximum allowable valueis 40.

Entering MOSADM TMFACTORwithout any numberwill cause the

current value to be displayed, for example:

To reset the time slicing rate back to the default value, enter:

MOSADM TMFACTOR 4

This returns the valueof one time tick to approximately 1/18 of a

second, and each task will in turn receive 1/18 of a secondof process-
ing time.

MOSADM HOLD task LPT= {nnann}) | OFF

The "MOS HOLD task LPTx nnnn" commandcan be used to automat-

ically reserve a printer for use by a specific user for a specified length
of time. "task" specifies the task numberfor which the reservation
will be made. "x" specifies the printer, and "nnnn" specifies the reser-
vation time in seconds. The maximum is 9999 seconds (about 166
minutes or 2 & 3/4 hours).

MOS-D191 5-47
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

This commandis similar in function to the MOS HOLD LPTn {nnnn}

command except that it can set the reservation time or release a
printer for any task. See the "MOS HOLD LPTs {nnnn}" commandin on
this chapter for information on how to use this command.

MOSADM VIR@ on | off

The MOSADM VIR@Qutility command changes the way asynchronous

task switches are done in orderto provide different types of mouse
support and prevent a PAMswitch from interfering with communica-
tions.

Whenmultiple mice are supported through the INT 14 method using

$MOUSE.SYSonly the task RAM and context area are switched and
there is no need for the PAMswitching process to disable interrupts.
As a result, IRQ’s are not lost. Therefore, if your system will involve
the use of task-based IRQ handlers (e.g. telecommunications
programs such as CrossTalk and ProComm) you should use the
default. condition (MOSADM VIRQ OFF) andinterface any mice
through the INT 14 method. ao

Patched mouse driver type of multiple mouse support (such as that

under VNA using MOS USEIRQ and SETMOUSE.COM) requires the
switching of video buffers during a task switch. If you require this
type of multiple mouse support you should issue the command:

MOSADM VIRQ ON

This will effect the changes to the task switching procedures required
for patched mouse driver multiple mouse support.

MOSADM RESETon| off

This command allows the system administrator to turn on andoff the

CTRL- ALT- DELtask restart option at the workstations. The com-
mandform is:

MOSADM RESET onloff ftask#}

where {task#} is the numberof the task for which the option will be
set.

5-48 MOS-DLO1
 MOSADM TIME on| off

This commandallows the system administrator to turn on and off /O

protection of the timer chip. The default condition is ON. It is recom-
mendedthat you enter the MOSADM TIME OFF command when
your application uses the timerchip to control the speaker and the
soundis too slow or not right. One example is when using the FIRE
PHASER command whenlogging onto a Novell server.

MOSADM EMSLIMIT size {handles} | OFF

This commandis used to add LIM EMS3.2 or 4.0 memory to tasks

that will run applications that need expanded memory. The
$EMS.SYSdevice driver must be loaded in your CONFIG.SYSfile in
order to use this command.

The commandhas two formsas follows:

Form: MOSADM EMSLIMIT sizeK fhandies}

MOSADM EMSLIMIT OFF

Operands:

size enter the amount of extended memory in kilobytesto allo-

cate for the task. This may be from 64K to a maximum of
8192K (8MB) per task (limited by the amountof available
memory in your computer).

K enter a K to documentthat the memory size is in

kilobytes.

handles defaults to 32 handles. This is the numberof blocks of

memory required by an application. 32 is sufficient for
mostapplications. If your application requires more hand-
les, enter the numberof handles required as specified in
at, your application’s user manual. Handles may beset to a
value from 16 to 255,

off If you enter OFF as the only operand with the command,
the amount of EMS memory previously set for the task
will be de-allocated and returned to available system ex-
tended memory.

MOS-D191 - 49
cat
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

The MOSADM EMSLIMIT commandis used to reserve a specified

amount of EMS expanded memory for an application. The command
is task specific. That is, it must be entered in each task that will run ~~
an application that requires EMS memory. The amount of memory
reserved with the command maybedifferent.for each task that it is
enteredin.

For example, if you were going to run Ventura Publisher 3.0 in task 1
on your system, you would first switch into task 1 by pressing ALT- 1
and then enter the following commandat the system prompt:

MOSADM EMSLIMIT 256K

This would assign 256K of expanded memory to task 1 which can

then be used by Ventura or any other application that is run in that
task.

If you had anotherapplication that required 512K of EMS memory

and 64 handles, that you intended to run in task 0, you would proceed
as follows. First press ALT - 0 to switch back into task 0, and then —
enter the following commandat the system prompt:

MOSADM EMSLIMIT 512k 64

The MOS MAP commanddisplay shows how much EMS expanded

memory is assigned/available in each task. Remember that the
amount of EMS memory assigned to each task can be different - so
you must enter the MOS MAP commandin each task to see how
much EMS expanded memory has been assigned to the various tasks.
(The amountof system extended memory will always display the
same amount regardless of which task you enter the MOS MAP com-
mandin.)

For example, if you enter the MOS MAP commandin task 1, the last
two lines of the MOS MAP display mightbe:

2196K of 4096K Memory Available 256K of 256K Expanded Memory Available

58K of 80K SMP Aliocated

5-50 MOS-D191
In this example the total amount of memory available on the system
is 4096K, or 4MB. Presently, 2196K of thatis still available as sys-
tem extended memory. Also, 256K of EMS expanded memory has
been assigned to task 1, the task in which this MOS MAP command
was just entered. All of the EMS memory is available since we had to
exit the application to enter the MOS MAP command.

If you nowenter the following commandin task 1:

MOSADM EMSLIMIT OFF

the 256K of extended memory will be de-allocated and returned to

available system extended memory. This can be verified by entering
the MOS MAP commandin task 1 again, which will now display:

2452K of 4096K Memory Available

58K of 80K SMP Allocated

Notice that the available system extended memory increased by 256K

to 2452K and that the EMS expanded memory portion of the display
no longer showsatall, indicating that no EMS expanded memory is
assigned to task 1.

Task Reboot with EMS memory

Pressing CTRL - ALT - DEL in your task performs a warm reboot of

JUSTthat task. Any EMS memory assigned to that task. will be de-al-
located. You must then re-enter the MOSADM EMSLIMIT command
in the task to re-assign the amount of EMS expanded memory
needed. Placing the MOSADM EMSLIMIT commandin the startup
batch file for the task will eliminate this inconvenience.

MOS-D191 6B» 61
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

Connecting Terminals and Workstations

In a multi-user environment, there are hardware considerations for

workstation support. You must be sure you have the correct terminal
or workstation device driver, serial port device driver, and the right
cable connections for the host computer and workstation or terminal
to communicate.

You must also be sure any workstation options are set up correctly
for use under MOS. Some terminals may require the use of ESC key
sequences for communication with the processor. The next sections ex-
plain the necessary details for the proper installation and set up of
terminals and workstations.

Terminals vs Workstations

Terminals are normally connected to the host computer through

serial ports on the computeror on add-in serial port boards that you
can install in your computer. The connection and use of terminals are
explainedin detail in the following sections.

Workstations are different than terminals in some important ways.

Workstations normally consist of regular PC monitors and PC key-
boards that are connected to the host computer through somespecial
hardware designedspecifically for that purpose. These hardware
based workstation solutions offer increased speed over terminals and
also the capability of supporting graphics applications at the worksta-
tions.

The special hardware usually consists of an add-in expansion board

that installs in your computer plus some additional external junction
boxes and necessary cabling to connect the workstations to the host
computer.

Be sureto follow the installation instructions that come with your

workstation hardware when adding workstations to a PC-MOShost
computer.

~ 82 MOS-D19i
HN
Serial Ports

Terminals are connected to a serial port on the host computer or on

an add-in serial port board that you have installed in your computer.
This connection maybedirectly to the host computer, or indirectly
with a modem.

The serial ports are normally the standard type that uses the NSI
8250 UARTor equivalent. MOSis also capable of supporting a
variety of workstation communication links. You must use a driver
that replaces $SERIAL.SYSfor the communication link. Special
ports that have synchronous communications capability may not be
compatible.

If your computer does not have enoughserial ports to support the

numberof terminals you want to connect, you may need a serial
adapterboard that will support multiple serial ports. Such a board is
available from your dealer.

The $SERIAL.SYS device driver provided with MOS must be defined

with a DEVICE= commandstatement in your CONFIG.SYSfile. This
driver identifies the address assignmentof each port, and supplies
MOSwith specific information about the communications capability
of the port.

Cable Connections

To connect a terminal directly to the host computer, you need a "null

modem”or "crossover" cable. You may use a standardcable if you at-
tach a null modem adapterto one endof the cable. If you want to
make your own cable, you need three wires. The pin connections for
these wires are:

Host Computer Pin Terminal Pin

DB-25 Connector DB-25 Connector

2 3
3 2
7 7

MOS-D1 91 5-53
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

Host Computer Pin Terminal Pin

DB-9 Connector DB-25 Connector

2 2
3 3
5 7

Host Computer Pin Terminal Pin

DB-9 Connector DB-9 Connector

2 3
3 2
5 5

Modem Cable Connections

You mayalso need to run a cable to a modem from either the host
computer or a terminal. For either of these, use a standard modem
cable includingthe following pin connections.

Main Console or
Terminal Pin Modem Pin

2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
20 20

5 o4 MOS-DL9L
 Terminal and Workstation Device Drivers
“as
MOSsupplies the terminal device drivers for most standardter-
minals. All terminal device drivers that you use mustbe set up and
defined in the CONFIG.SYSfile with the DEVICE= commandstate-
ment. The terminal device drivers included with MOSare:

PCTERM.SYS - for PC type terminals, Ampex 232, Falco 5500,

Kimtron KT-7 PC and KT-70, Link Technologies
MC1, MC3, MC5 and PCTerm, TeleVideo PCS1,
Wyse Wy-60 and Wy-150.

VNA.SYS - for Video Network Adapter (VNA) workstations

SH.SYS - for MaXtation workstations

TITERM.SYS - for Teletype type terminals

AVTERM.SYS - for ADDS Viewpoint type terminals

38ATERM.SYS - ADM 3A

TITERM.SYS - Televideo 910

52TERM.SYS - DEC VT-52

31TERM.SYS - IBM 8101

19TERM.SYS - Zenith Z-19

TVTERM.SYS - Televideo 912C, 920C, 925

EXTERM.SYS - Excel 42/44

ANTERM.SYS - ANSI terminals

ATTERM.SYS - AT&T 605 Business Communications Terminal

ELTERM.SYS - for EmuLink Terminal Emulation Software.

SRTERM.SYS - SunRiver Fiber Optic Workstation

MOS-D191
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

These terminal device drivers must be defined in the CONFIG.SYS

file with the DEVICE= commandstatement before you can include
them in an .ADDTASK command. of

PCTERM.SYSsupports almostall of the attributes of an IBM

monochrome monitor. AVTERM.SYSsupports inverse video only.
Soundis not supported by any of the terminal device drivers.

There may be other terminals that are not included with the MOS
standard terminal drivers that will also work with MOS.

The basic requirements for any workstation terminal are:

¢ 24 line by 80 column screen or larger

° ability to directly position the cursor

* ability to erase from cursor to end of screen

° scrolling capability

* control codes to move the cursor up, down, right andleft ~~

Most terminals have an array of switch settings, and some combina-

tion of hardware and keyboardselected options. You normally have a
choice of option settings when you install a terminal workstation. You
should review these options in the documentation that comes with
the terminal to be sure it conformsto the following requirements.

* The total numberof data, start, stop and parity bits must add up
to 10.

* Configure the terminalfor full duplex operation, using either 8

data bits and 1 stop bit, or 7 data bits and 2 stop bits.

* If given the option, select not to use parity checking.If a terminal

requires a parity bit, then select either "space" or "mark" parity
with 7 data bits and 1 stop bit. oo

Do not use any special features of a terminal, such as smooth scroll-

ing or automatic generation of line feeds. If given the option, make
sure that the terminal will automatically scroll up when the cursor
moves down from the bottom line.

5- 56 MOSs-DI91
Terminal Display Differences

The video screen on the main console has a 25 line display. The video
screen on some terminals may haveonly a 24 line display. With ap-
plications that require the use of 25 lines, you may needto scroll the
video screen on the terminal up or down to display thefirst or last
line of a screen.

For example, some applications use the 25th line as a control line.
While you are workingat a terminal, only lines 1 through 24 appear
on the video screen.

Whenyou needto see the 25th line, you mustscroll the screen up so.
that line 1 no longer displays, but line 25 does. You maythenscroll
the screen back down so that lines 1 through 24 again display.

Somekeys on a terminal may not be immediately usable with MOS.

Directly supported are the character keys (ASCII character set) ESC,
SHIFT, CTRL, BKSP, ENTER, cursor movement (arrow) keys, and if
present, the HOME key.

MOSprovides escape sequences that emulate certain PC-style keys

at non-PC style terminals. This allows the terminal to emulate all the
keys on the main console.

MOS-D1LOl 5-57
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

Escape Sequences for Non-PC Type Terminals

a
Escape sequences are invoked by pressing the ESC keyfollowed by
pressing one or more otherkeys. The following explains the ESC se-
quences you may use at a terminal to emulate scan codes for the key
strokes from the main console. Following the detailed explanationsis
a quick reference chart listing only the ESC sequences andresulting
keystrokes that are emulated.

ESC T

Press ESC and then a to refresh thefirst 24 lines of the display

on the video screen of a terminal. The main console generally has
a 25 line display, where some terminals have only a 24 line dis-
play. At this point, line 25 does not appear on the video screen of
a terminal.

NOTE:If the cursor belongs on line 25 when you press ESC T,

then it will be placed in the same column online 24 ofthe ter-
minal, and anything you type will move the cursor, but will not
display until you press ENTER.

ESC B

Press ESC and then a B to refresh the bottom 24 lines (lines 2

through 25) of the display on the video screen of a terminal. If the
cursor belongs online 1, the it will appear on line 2 of the current
screen.

If you turn on the terminal after MOShas been booted, use ESC
T or ESC to refresh the display on the video screen.

ESC C

Press ESC and C to turn on use of CTRL-key combinations sent

to the processor. Otherwise, CTRL-key combinations can be con-
fused with the same codes sent by the HOME andcursor move- om
ment keys. This is necessary for programs that use CTRL-key
combination for special functions, such as many word processors.
Turning on the CTRL-key combinations will disable the HOME
and cursor movement keys.

~ 58 MOS-D191
Or
ESC N

Press ESC and N to turn off CTRL-key combinations and enable

normal use of the HOME andcursor movement keys.

ESC A char

Press ESC and A to send a scan code emulation for the ALT key,
then type a character which maybe letter (A to Z), a digit (0 to
9), a hyphen, or an equal sign. For example, to emulate ALT X
from a terminal, press ESC A X.

ESC S H/E/U/D/I/X/P

Press ESC and S followed by oneof the letters defined to send a

scan code emulation for several special keys found on the numeric
keypad on the main console’s keyboard. The emulation sent for
each defined letter is: H - HOME, E - END, U - PgUp, D - PgDn, I -
INS, X - DEL, and P - SHIFT PrtSc. For example, to send a PgUp
scan code emulation from a terminal, press ESC S U.

ESC Z H/E/U/D

Press ESC and Z followed by one of the defined letters to send a

scan code emulation for several CTRL-key combinations. The
emulation sent for each defined letter is: H - CTRL HOME, E -
CTRL END, U-CTRL PgUp, D- CTRL PgDn. For example, to
send a CTRL PgUp scan code emulation from a terminal, press
ESC Z U.

ESC n

Press ESC and a number between 0 and 9 to emulate the scan

code for the function keys F1 to F10 on the main console. ESC 0
translates to F10. For example to send an F3 scan code emulation
from a terminal, press ESC 3.

MOS-DLS1 5-59
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

ESC F nn

Press ESC and F followed by two numbers between 0 and 9 to

emulate the scan code for the function keys F11 to F40 on the
main console. At the main console, SHIFT F1 sends a scan code
for F11, CTRL Fi sends a scan code for F21, and ALT Fi sends a
scan code for F31. To emulate ALT Fi from a terminal, press
ESC F 3 1.

ESC K

Press ESC and K to send the scan code emulation from a terminal
for the CTRL BREAK key function on the main console. Use of
the break key may be disabled when running some application
programs.

ESC M nn

Press ESC and M followed by up to two numbers between 0 and 9,

then press ESC and M again. This switches you into the new task
identified by the numbers you entered.

ESC ESC

Press ESC twice at a terminal to send the emulation scan code for
the ESC key (hexadecimal code 1B) on the main console.

NOTE: If you are using the DEC VT-52, IBM 3101, or Zenith Z-
19, do not use the ESC key. Instead, use the key combination that
generates the hex code 1C. On the VT-52 or VT-100, this would be
CTRL and backslash (CTRL\), on the 3101 (US keyboard) use
ALT and equals (ALT=).

-60 MOS-DIL9L
ot
Escape Sequence Chart for Non-PC Type Terminals

First Second Third Fourth

Key Key Key Key Emulated

ESC T refresh top 24 lines on screen

ESC B refresh bottom 24 lines on screen
ESC Cc enable CTRL key combinations;
disable use of HOME and cursor
movement keys
ESC disable CTRL key combinations;
Z

enable use of HOME andcursor

movement keys
ESC ALT key combinations
N
>
ONNNNDNNAHHNNYS DP DP

ESC ALT key combinations

VammuMa*oahmi' &

ESC ALT key combinations

ESC ALT key combinations
ESC HOME key
ESC END key
ESC PgUp key
ESC PgDn key
ESC INS key
ESC Number Lock Key
ESC DEL key
ESC SHIFT-PrtSe
ESC CTRL-HOME
ESC CTRL-END
ESC CTRL-PgUp
ESC CTRL-PgDn
ESC function keys F1-F10 (ESC 0 for F10)
= HRM ©

ESC 0-9 function keys F11-F40

a a»

ESC CTRL-BREAK
ESC sc ESC
ESC 0-9 Toggle Task Switch
©
>

MOS-D1L9l 5-61
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

-KEYMAP

-KEYMAP is an extrinsic commandthatlets you assign strings of

data to selected keys. You may save the key assignmentsin file so
they may be used again at a later time. KEYMAP lets you assign an
escape sequenceto a specific key, or create your own macros. For ex-
ample, if a word processor uses CTRL K D to save file, you could as-
sign the string CTRL K D to the F1 key. The following is an example
of a key assignmentsession that is invoked by entering .KEYMAP at
the system prompt:

Enter input filename (Return if none): ENTER

You may enter the name of an existing key assignmentfile to use as

initial input, or press ENTER to start a newfile or add to the existing
assignments that are in use but not savedin file.

Translate from?. *

Enter up to four key strokes as the new key and press ENTER. If pos- —.
sible, use only one key stroke. If you enter multiple keys, enter them
rapidly or they will not translate. Non-ASCII keys display on your
video screen as an asterisk (*), such as in this example for the Fi key.
If the ENTER keyis part of the string, enter $ R, which will appear
as a slash (/). You may enter $ $ to include a $ as part of the string.

Translate to? CTRL K D

Enter the string, which has no practical limit, and press ENTER. If
the key has been assigned to a different string, you will be askedif
you wish to replace it, and you may enter either Y or N. A prompt "Is
the above entry correct?" then appears. Enter Y if the assignmentis
correct. If not, enter N and you return to the MOS system prompt.

Translate from’?

You may continue to enter new key assignments, or press ENTER os,
without an entry to end the .KEYMAP session. A prompt, "All
finished?" will appear, and you mayenter either Y or N. A responseof
N returns you the "Translate from?" prompt.

Enter output file name (Return if none): SAMPLE. KEY

5 - 62, MOS-D1L91
You mayenter the nameofa file to store your assignments, or press
ENTERif you do not want to save the assignments in a file. You
should use a file extension of .KEY to help you identify these files. If
you save the assignments, you mayrecall thefile to use the key as-
signments at a later time. For example, the commandto use the as-
signments in the SAMPLE.KEYfile is:

.KEYMAP SAMPLE.KEY

If you have more than onefile of key assignments, always load the
largest onefirst. If you load a small file and then load a largerfile,
the smaller file is overwritten. Depending on the numberof key as-
signments you set up, the .KEYMAP function will use a small
amount of memory in a partition, usually about 2K.

You mayfind it useful to create an empty key assignmentfile for

removing key assignments in a partition. You may use the .KEYMAP
command and enter only the outputfile name, such as NULL.KEY,to
create the empty key assignmentfile. You may load the NULL.KEY
file to remove the current key assignments in a partition.

MOS-D191 &- 63
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

Modems

MOSwill support a remote workstation via the use of modems. Since

modems usethe phonelines, you can have a workstation as far away
as you can makea long distance phonecall. The connection is the
same as any other workstation, except that there are two modems
and a telephoneline as part of the connection.

The .ADDTASK command should be the sameasfor any other

remote workstation. Include the terminal device driver, the port num-
ber where the modem cable is connected (based on theorderit is
listed in the DEVICE= $SERIAL.SYS statement in your CON-
FIG.SYSfile), and the baudrate.

MODEM.COM - Modem Initialization Utility

This program allows you to initialize a modem for incoming remote

terminal communications or remote LAN connections under PC-
MOS.This must be done BEFORE you add the task that controls the
modem. This could be done in your AUTOEXEC.BATfile by entering om
the appropriate commandbefore the associated ADDTASK command.

To initialize a modem with MODEM.COMlogonto the drive and

directory which contains the MODEM.COMprogram and enter the
following command at the system prompt:

MODEM x y

where "x" is the port number from the ADDTASK commandfor the
partition that controls the modem, and "y" is the modem type from
the following table:

0 - for Hayes 300 baud

1 - for Hayes 1200 baud
2 - for Hayes 2400 baud
3 - for Hayes 9600 baud

5 - 64 MOS-D191
For example, the commands:

MODEM 7 2
ADDTASK 384,1,,USER1,PCTERM,1,2400

wouldinitialize the first port listed in your DEVICE=$SERIAL.SYS

statement to a Hayes 2400 baud modem. The modem would then be
active in the partition activated by the ADDTASK command which
specifies port 1 as the serial port for remote communication.

Defining Modem Types

MODEM.COMcan also be used to edit the modem initialization

strings and/or define six additional modem types.

To edit or define modem types log onto the drive and directory which
contains the MODEM.COMprogram and enter the MODEM com-
mandat the system prompt with no operands,as follows:

MODEM

A menuwill appear that shows you the proper syntax for using the
MODEMcommandto initialize a modem plus the existing modem
types, followed by:

Enter 1 to edit modem initialization strings.

Enter 2 to return to MOS.

Press 1 at that time to bring up the modem type editing menu.

Then use the UP or DOWN arrowkeysto position the cursor on the

modem type you wish to edit/create, and press ENTER.Keyin the
new modem speedandinitialization string, pressing ENTER after
each. Repeat this process for each modem type that you want to
define.

When youfinish your edits, press F3 to save the information and

then press ESC to exit, or you may press ESCfirst to exit without
saving the changes.
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

SunRiver Terminal Driver

PC-MOSsupports the SunRiver Fiber Optic Workstation. The ter-

minal driver SRTERM.SYSis providedfor this purpose. This driver
can only be used in a memory-managed environment.

Follow the instructions provided with your SunRiver terminalto set

up andinstall the associated hardware. It is recommended that you
set the SunRiver host adaptor card to operate on interruptlevel 5 or
7 when used with PC-MOS. If one of these twolevels in not available,
try interrupt level 12 or 15 next.

The terminal driver must be defined in your CONFIG.SYSfile with a

DEVICE= commandstatement, as follows:

DEVICE=SRTERM.SYS E4000

Theonly optional operand is the memory addressfor the driver’s

workspace, The default address is E4000. (The driver actually loads
into the SMP, while the memory space that it requires out of the
FREEMEMareais a workspace for the driver.) This workspace
takes up 16K of memory,e.g. in this case the driver’s workspace loads
in memory from E4000 to E8000. (Rememberto avoid using this ad-
dress space whenspecifying your free memory with the FREEMEM=
statement.)

Once the DEVICE= statement is set up in your CONFIG.SYSfile,

you. may use SRTERM asthe terminal ID in the ADDTASK com-
mand to establish a multiuser partition in which to run the SunRiver
terminal. See the instructions on the ADDTASK commandin this
chapter.

The SunRiver terminals and the host monitor MUSTall be installed

as EGA monitors. The SunRiver host adaptor card can co-reside with
most available EGA boards that you might use to run the host
monitor. A list of those tested should be provided with your SunRiver
hardware installation instructions. cms

-66 MOS-D191
oe
Also, only one task at a time may view anyparticular display screen.
For example,if the host computeris viewing its own display screen
(task 0), no other user may press ALT-0 to switch tasks and view that
screen at the same time. Multitasking partitions at the host do not
present the same problem. As such, the system administrator may
want to turn task switching off in multiuser partitions by using the
MOSADM SWITCH OFFcommand.

A practical limit of one to four SunRiver workstations per host com-

puter is recommended. Processor-intensive applications and the addi-
tion of mice at the workstations will additionally affect system
performance. Your own limits will be determined by your specific ap-
plication/hardware environment plus the level of system performance
you feel is acceptable.

MOS-D191 5-67
Multi-Tasking / Multi-User

MOS System Monitor

The MOS System Monitor is a terminate and stay resident (TSR) pro-
gram that provides a dynamic status screen for viewing and changing
your system’s multitasking/multiuser environment. It can be thought
of as an interactive MOS MAP display.

While the MOS MAP function only displays a map of statistical infor-
mation about the partitions set up on your computer, the System
Monitor program provides a menu interface with MOS whichallows
you to dynamically add and remove tasks without returning to MOS
and using the ADDTASK or REMTASK commands.

The System Monitor program also interfaces with the MOSADM

utility functions SLICE, PRI and CACHE.This allows you to change
the timeslice or priority values for tasks, or turn caching on andoff,
all from within the System Monitor program.

These capabilities provide an easy and convenient way to monitor

and change the system environment to suit your processing needs.

To use the System Monitorfirst load the program into memory by

entering the following commandat the system prompt:

MONITOR

The following message will appear:

5-68 MOS-DI191
The hotkey combination CTRL SPACE is use to activate the System
Monitor once loaded. Pressing CTRL SPACEwill bring up the Sys-
tem Monitor display, similar to the following:

With the System Monitor display on the screen press ENTERto bring
up the Command Window. The Command Windowis a function sub-
menu that is superimposed over the System Monitor display, as fol-
lows:

Use the function keys to select the desired function from the Com-
mand Window. Whenyouselect a specific function, messages or
prompts will appear in the bottom half of the Command Window to
assist you with the operation.

MOS-DL9l 5-69
NOTE:Someof the functions in the Command Windoware task
specific, i.e. the operation will be performed on a specified task. To
specify a task for modification you must use the cursor keys to high- oo
light the desired task in the System Monitor display BEFORE press-
ing ENTERto call up the Command Window.

Any task specific functions you select will then be performed on the
selected task. These include: remove a task, restart a task, change
priority, change slice, change keyboard status, and task switching
ON/OFF.

To perform any of the remaining non-task specific functions it does

not matter which task is highlighted when you press the ENTER key
to call up the Command Window.

If you are using a color monitor you may press TAB from the Com-
mand Windowto changethe color of the window.

Press ENTER to return to the System Monitor display from the Com-
mand Window.If you made any changestheywill be immediately up- om
dated on the System Monitor display. You may optionally press ESC
from the Command Windowto exit the System Monitor or press F10
to exit and remove the System Monitor from memory.

Ifthe CTRL SPACE keystroke combination conflicts with other ap-

plications on your system, you may use F9 to change the hotkey to
another keystroke combination.

For more complete information on the various functions that can be

performed with the System Monitor see the specific section of this
User Guide that explains each function or command.

5-70 MOS-DISL
 CHAPTER6:
BATCH FILES

Introduction 2.0... ee ee ee ee ee ee ees 6-2

Batch Pile Features... et te ns 6-2

Creating Batch Files 2... 0. ee tt te ee es 6-3

Batch File Commands .... 0... ce eet ee ee es 6-3

“ABORT 2... ee tee tt ee ns 6-4

“AUTOCD 1... 2... et ee ee te ee ee 6-5
-BATECHO ...... 2... eee eee ee ee ee es 6-6
.CALL/,RETURN ... 20... 2.0 ee eee te ee es 6-7
“ECHO 2. te ee ees 6-9
“FLUSH ... 2... eee te et ee te es 6-10
FFORINDO ....... 0.002 eee ete ee ee eee 6-11
GOTO .. 2.2... ee ee te ees 6-13
IF oe te ee ee ee ee 6-14
INSERT... 1... et te ee 6-17
KEY 2. ee ee ees 6-18
NEXT 20 ww ee es 6 - 21
PAUSE 1... ce ee ee eee 6 - 22
REM... . 2. ee te eae 6 - 23
STOP . 2... ew ee ee es 6 - 24
TEXT/ENDTEXT .........00 02 evenness 6 - 25

Batch Pile Processing 2... 0c ee ee ee ee 6 - 29

Automated Batch Files ......... 00008208 eee 6 - 29

Nested Batch Files . 1... 0... eee eee eee ens 6 - 33
Replaceable Operand Files ...........-2.+0005 6 - 34
Compatibility .. 6... ee ee ee ee 6 - 36

MOS-DI91 6-1
Batch Files

Introduction
—,
ooo,
Batch files let you group commandsin file to create your own spe-
cialized processes. For example, you can create a batch file that will
copy several files into one large file,EXPORTthe largefile, and then
erase the original files.

MOSrecognizes batch files by their .BAT extensions. In the previous

example, the nameof the batch file could be EXP.BAT. To execute the
batch file, type the file name, EXP, at the system prompt withoutits
.BAT extension and press ENTER.

Any command maybe used in a batch file. However, MOS contains

several intrinsic commandsthat are designed just for use in batch
files. They are:

ABORT
AUTOCD
.BATECHO
.CALLL RETURN “~
ECHO
FLUSH
FOR IN DO
GOTO
JF
INSERT
KEY
NEXT
PAUSE
REM
STOP
TEXT/.ENOTEXT

Batch File Features

Several features in MOSlet you create very powerful batchfiles. You —,

may nest batchfiles to permit one batch file to invoke another,
process it, and then return to processingin the originalbatchfile.
With this feature, you can use onebatchfile to call another, which
calls another, to create and execute complex command sequences.
 You mayalso create a batch file with replaceable operandsthatlet
you use different data each time you execute it. These operands are
placedin thefile, and serve as variables. They will be replaced by the
values you enter on the commandline each time you execute thefile.

Another feature in MOSlets you streamline the startup of your sys-

tem with automated batch files. Every time MOSis booted,it checks
for a batch file named AUTOEXEC.BAT,and executes the commands
it contains.

For example, you may have several applications on your system, but
always want to load the same application at startup. You can include
the path andfile namethat load the application in your
AUTOEXEC.BATfile. Each time the system is booted, it will then
automatically arrive at that application. This can be useful in estab-
lishing partitions and signons. Automated batchfiles are discussed in
this section.

Creating Batch Files

oa

You may use the MOSsystem editor, .ED, to create batchfiles in the
same wayyou create otherfiles. A batch file is an ASCII text file con-
taining a group of commands as they would be entered from the key-
board. .ED lets you easily create a batch file and later add, delete, or
insert lines. Refer to the Editor section of this manual for more infor-
mation about creatinga file.

Batch File Commands

The following pages contain an explanation of each batch file com-

mandandhowit is used. A section detailing the use of the special
batch file features follows the command explanations.

MOS-DIOL 6-3
Batch Files

ABORT

.-ABORTstopsall processing within a batch file. This commandis use-

ful as a safety measuresince batchfile processing will be completely
terminated regardless of any nested batchfiles.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: ABORT

Explanations:

ABORTis generally used with the .IF command. You may use the
.IF commandto test for various conditions, which must be true or
false for processing to continue. In the example that follows, the condi-
tional .IF statement is testing the value of an errorlevel, which is set
by the processing of a command.Errorlevel.2 indicates that process-
ing was unsuccessful. For more information about error levels, refer
to the .IF commandinthis section.

-REM BACKUP BATCH FILE

EXPORT CAS" As ly
JP ERRORLEVEL 2 .ABORT
EXPORT GAWPFILES\* A: /a /y
JP ERRORLEVEL 2 .ABORT

If any step in the export process were to fail and generate an error-
level 2, this batch file and anyfiles that it may be nested from would
be aborted.

oA MOS-DL9L
&
AUTOCD

-AUTOCDrecovers the current drive and directory that was saved

with redirection to an output file from within a batchfile. You may
find this commanduseful with utility batch files or applications that
call for a change of drive and directory.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: AUTOCD filename

Explanation:

The example batch file which follows, FINDFILE.BAT,is a simple

utility that streamlines the search for a file and changesdirectories
several times.

CD>CADIRTSAV
CD
.DI RB os, 4

CD WORK
DIR %i1
GD WORK\TEMP
DIR %4
CD \WORK\TEMPASAVE
JR Yt
AUTOCD CADIRISAV

To execute FINDFILE,type the nameofthefile you wantto find at

the prompt, and press ENTER. That file name will replace the %1
operand as explainedlater in this chapter. When FINDFILE ex-
ecutes, the current drive and directory will be output to the
DIR1.SAVfile. Then when the .AUTOCD commandis encountered at
the endof thefile, that output will be retrieved, and drive and direc-
tory will be changed back to that which was current when FINDFILE
was invoked,

Note that if you break out of FINDFILE by pressing CTRL BRK

before the .AUTOCD commandis encountered, the directory will not
be changed back to the original directory.

6-
CH
Ss
at

MOSs-D)
Batch Files

-BATECHO

-BATECHOcontrols the initial state of .ECHOin batchfiles. .ECHO

on is the default state of ECHO when MOSboots. This meansthat all
commandsin the batchfile will be displayed on the video screen, as
they are being executed. You may turn .ECHOoff at the beginning of
a batchfile by entering .ECHOoff as thefirst statement. However,if
you use a .BATECHOoff statement, for example, in your
AUTOEXEC.BATfile, .ECHO will automatically be off when you
start any batchfile.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: .BATECHD an| off

Operands:

on leaves .ECHOonas the default for batch files.

off turns .ECHOoff in batchfiles.

Explanations:

Entering .BATECHOwith no operand displays the currentstate of

.ECHO. Unless .BATECHOoff is issued, the default is .BATECHO
on. An example from an AUTOEXEC.BATfile follows:

BATECHO OFF
DATE
JTIME
PROMPT $P$G
CLS

This file prompts you for the system date and time, and theninitiates
a prompt. It then clears the screen and only the prompt will display.
Any batch files that may be executed after this file has executed will
have .ECHOoff.

If.BATECHOis off you maystill display the commands within a

batch file when it executes by using an ECHOon statement.If a
nested batchfile is then invoked, .,BATECHOoff will prevail for the
nested batchfile. (Also refer to the .ECHO command.)

6-6 MOS-D191
 CALL/RETURN
a

-CALL statements let you redirect the order in which commands ex-
ecute within a batch file. You may redirect processing to a specific
line within thefile if it is preceded by a label. When a .CALL com-
mandis encountered, execution proceeds with thefirst statementfol-
lowing the specified label. When a corresponding .RETURN command
is found, processing is redirected back to the commandfollowing the
-CALL statement.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: CALL label

label

-AETURN

Operand:

label a unique character string which maybe upto eight char-

acters long. You must use a colon before the label when it
precedesa line to which processingis directed. However,
do not use a colon with the label in the .CALL statement.

Explanation:

-.CALI/,.RETURNlets you create subprocesses within a batchfile.

Subprocesses may be nested up to the capacity of your available
memory. Each .CALL statement must have a .RETURN statement,
or the file will not execute properly. In the following example, the
.CALL/.RETURN statement redirects processing from the statement
-ECHO PLACEDISK #1 IN DRIVE A: AND BACKUP DISK#1 IN
DRIVE B:, to the .COPY statement. The .GOTO statementis ex-
etn
plainedlater in this chapter.

MOS-D1L91 6-7
Batch Files

GOTO START
(MOVE
PAUSE
COPY A:*.* B:
.-ERASE A:*.*
RETURN
‘START
.ECHO PLACE DISK #1 IN DRIVE A:
.ECHO AND BACKUP DISK #1 IN DRIVE B:
CALL MOVE
.ECHO PLACE DISK #2 IN DRIVE A:
ECHO AND BACKUP DISK #2 IN DRIVE B:
CALL MOVE

If no label is specified processing halts. Note that the label never dis-
plays during execution of a batchfile.

6-8 MOSs-DI191
ECHO

When .ECHOis on, the batch file statements are displayed on the
video screen as they execute. .ECHOoff prevents this display, but
does not inhibit the display of any messagesin thefile.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: ECHO on | off

.ECHO message

Operands:

on turns .ECHO on.

off turns .ECHOoff.

message enter up to 121 characters to display on the video screen

when thefile is executed.

Explanations:

MOSdefaults toECHO on whenit is booted. If you’re uncertain

about the state of .ECHO, type .ECHO with no operand and press
ENTER. MOSwill indicate whetherit’s on or off.

-ECHOis also useful in sending messagesto the video screen. For ex-
ample:

ECHO OFF
CLS
ECHO THIS IS A LIST OF BATCH FILES
DIR *.BAT

Also refer to the .BATECHO command.

MOS-D1L91 6-9
Batch Files

FLUSH
oo
.FLUSH mimics the action of pressing CTRL PgDnto clear the key-
board save buffer of entries. This prevents someone from viewing
your previous keystrokes.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: FLUSH

Explanation:

MOScontains a commandrecall buffer that lets you retrieve your pre-

vious entries. You may use the up arrow to retrieve entries beginning
with the newest entry in the buffer. Use the down arrow to retrieve
beginning with the oldest entry.

SIGNOFFautomatically clears this buffer. However,if you’re not

signed on under MOSSecurity, you may use .FLUSHtoclear this
save buffer. You mayfindit useful to includeit in a batch file you in-
voke when you finish working in MOS. For example, look at the
QUIT.BATfile which follows.

-FLUSH
CLS

To quit working in MOS, just type QUIT. Because you've cleared the
buffer and cleared your screen, no one can retrieve your keystrokes to
see what you were workingon.

6-10 MOS-Di91
FOR IN DO

.FOR IN DOlets you repeat the execution of a commandfor each

member of a user-defined group. The membersof the group are
processed sequentially. The group may contain commands,file
names, replaceable operandsor any constants you specify.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: FOR % %character |N (group) DO command!% %eharacter}

Operands:

% %eharacter replaced by a memberof the group and must be

preceded by %% when usedin a batchfile. A single
character in the range A-Z should be used. If the com-
mandis entered at the system prompt instead of ina
batchfile, only one % is necessary.

(greup) a set of parameters or a single parameter enclosed in

parentheses.

cemmand any MOS commandthat you want each memberof the

group to execute.

Explanation:

Membersof the group will be processed sequentially for the command

specified. If the group is comprised of filenames with wildcards, the
sequence of execution will occur in the order in which files matching
the wildcard definition are encountered. An example follows.

FOR %%A IN (.asm “doe *ist) DO .COPY %%A B:

Note the use of a space as a delimiter between the items that com-
prise this group. In this example, the files that carry an .ASM, .DOC,
and .LST extension make upthe group. Each file with one of these ex-
tensions is a memberof the group and each will be executed as an
operand with the .COPY command.Theposition in %%A will be
replaced by eachofthefiles in the group.Soif three files, MOSCOM,
MOSATS, and MOSXOM,carrying the .ASM extension were en-
countered the execution would occur asfollows:

MOS-D191 6- il
Batch Files

COPY MOSCOM.ASM B:

Files copied: 1

COPY MOSATS.ASM B:

Files copied: 1

COPY MOSXCOM.ASM B:

Files copied: 1

The group members in this example could have been any typeoffiles.
Note that replaceable operands could be used as group members. To
execute thefile, the real operands would be entered on the command
line.

G-12 MOS-DISL
GO po
-
a

.GOTOredirects processing within a batch file to the line immedi-

ately following a specified label. Processing within the file continues
from that point.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: GOTOlabel

Operands:

label a unique character string which maybe upto eight char-

acters long. You must use a colon before the label in the
file, when it precedes a line to which processing is
directed. However, do not use a colon with the label in the
.GOTO statement.

Explanations:

Commandsare executed beginning with the line after the .GOTO

label. A label is never displayed duringthe batchfile’s execution. For
example:

-EXPORT*“DOG AS

ABORT
ROR
.ECHO AN ERROR WAS UNTERED
This batch file checks for errors during the .EXPORTand,if an error
was encountered, reports it. Note the redirection of processing to the
sERRORlabel. If no label were specified, the batch file execution
would stop when it encountered the .GOTO commandanddisplay the
message, "Label not found."

MOS-DIS1 6-13
BatchFiles

AF {NOT}

.IF permits conditional processing, where a condition must be met for

processing to occur. The three types of conditions that .IF allows are:
error levels, character strings, and EXIST statements.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: JP {NOT} condition command

Operands:

{NOT} tests for the opposite condition.

conditien must be an errorlevel, a character string, or an EXIST

statement.

command any commandis permitted.

Explanations:

You mayuse .IF to set up true/false processing.If a statement is true

processing occurs;if it is false, it does not. This applies to all three
types of conditions. You may also use the NOT operandto test for the
opposite of the specified condition. In the following example,if the file
MYFILE.DOC doesnotexist, processing skips past the next com-
mandlinein the batchfile.

JF NOY EXIST MYPFILE.DOC .GOTO STEP

COPY MYFILE.DOC 8B:
ABORT
‘STEP
ECHO FILE DOES NOT EXIST PLEASE CHOOSE ANOTHER

G-14 MOS-DLS1
Evror Level Conditions

The value of the system variable ERRORLEVEL maybe tested using

an .IF statement within a batchfile. The form is:

JF ERRORLEVEL number command

This means that if an error level greater than or equal to that

specified is encountered, the commandwill be executed. Note that
some application programs may set ERRORLEVELSthatare not
defined as those in MOS. The MOSstandarderrorlevels are:

0 - normal execution

1 - execution of the command, but with a questionable condition.

2 - some error occurred during execution of the command.

You may also use an error level with a false statement. For example:

EXPORT textfile.doc a:
JP NOT ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO OK
-ECHO Export was unsuccessful
ABORT
1OK
ERASE TEXTFILE. DOG

The statement IF NOT ERRORLEVEL1 will only be true when ER-

RORLEVELis 0.
Batch Files

String == String

ao
You mayusestring == string to create conditions which must match
perfectly, before processing can continue. The commandform is:

IF STRING == STRING command

The strings must match perfectly, though the match is not case sensi-
tive. Either string or both strings may consist of replaceable
operands. In the following example, if no operand was specified when
the batch file was started, the variable %1 will be null andtheIF con-
dition will appear as .IF !==! .GOTO NONAME.

JF i%i ==! GOTO NONAME.

COPY %1 B:
STOP
‘(NONAME
.EGHO Must use a flename

Exist Statements

You may use a condition with an .EXIST statement. The form for an
exist statementis:

JF EXIST flename cormmand

The negative form of .EXIST is also permitted. For example:

JF NOT EXIST TESTI. 2 At

-LNSERT

MOSrecognizes two modes of commandline editing -- Typeover,

whichis the standard default, and Insert. Typeover modeis destruc-
tive and lets you typeoverexisting entries. Insert mode inserts charac-
ters into an existing commandline entry. The INSERT command,
used in an AUTOEXEC.BATfile lets you specify that the Insert mode
is active when MOSisfirst booted. You may also use .INSERT in
otherbatchfiles.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: INSERT

Explanation:

Specify Insert modeas follows in your AUTOEXEC.BAT:

INSERT

If you don’t include .INSERT in your AUTOEXEC.BATfile, MOSwill

boot with the Typeover modeactive, which is recognized by its under-
lined cursor. You may then switch to Insert mode by pressing the INS
key. This modeis identified by the block cursor.

{OS-DILOL Ge LT
&a
he
&
BatchFiles

KEY

-KEYgives you the ability to prompt for a keystroke from within a

batch file and take action dependent upon the key which was pressed.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: KEY %%a IN (set of keys) DO command % %a

Operands:

% Ma maybe any character from A to Z.

(set of keys)enter the group of keys or range of keys which you want
to invoke action. Keys must be separated by a delimiter
such as a commaor a space. This group may include the
letters A through Z, the numbers 0 through 9 and the
function keys F1 through F10. You mayspecify a range of
keys. If you do, they must be separated by a hyphen. Note
that if a lower case letter is entered, MOSinternally con-
verts it to an uppercase letter. Therefore, if b is used you
could press a lowercase b or an uppercase b and produce
the same effect. You may also use SP for a space and CR
for a carriage return.

command enter the command you want executed after the key has
been pressed.

Explanation:

The .KEY commandis often used with either .GOTO, .CALL,or the
nameof a user-defined batch file. Each of these commands may be
used to redirect processing within a batch file. The replaceable
operand, %%a, specifies to which point processingis to be directed.
For example:

COPY %I B: on
ECHO Do you want te erase %17 (Y/N)
KEY %%A IN (YN) DO .GOTO CHOICE**A
(GHOICEYy
ERASE %'
(;CHOIGEn

6-18 MOS-DL91
In this example if you were to press y, .GOTO choicey will be ex-
ecuted. The .GOTO commandredirects processing to the :choicey
branch within this batch file. Note that the character you press,
either y or n will replace the %%a operands, thereby redirecting
processing to a labelled point. In this example, there is no space be-
tween choice and %%a.

The .KEY command mayalso be used with the .CALL command. The
.CALL commandlets you redirect processing in a batchfile to a
labelled subroutine, execute it and return processingto the original
point with a .RETURN command. Lookat the use of .KEY in this ex-
ample:

‘START
TEXT Press the letter of the drive you want to review (A,B)
Press Fi to exit
-ENDTEXT
KEY %%A in (A-B,F1) DO .CALL SUB%S%A
GOTO START
‘SUBA
.DIR A:iwjp
RETURN
-SUBB
.DIR B:/w /p
RETURN
‘SUBFi

If a is pressed, processing will be redirected to SUBA2. After the

-RETURN is encountered processing is directed back to the next
batch file statement after the .KEY statement. When F'1is pressed,
processing is redirected to the label SUBF1 whichis at the end of the
file. It is permissible to end a batch file with a .CALL pending. MOS
will compensate for the lack of a corresponding .RETURN.

If you had pressed a key that was not in the group (A-B,F1), that
keystroke would be ignored and processing halted until a valid key
was pressed.

.KEY mayalso be used to execute other batchfiles. In this example,

there are three batch files, BATR.BAT, BATN.BAT, and BATQ.BAT.
Lookat the following statement:

MOS-DL 91 6-19
BatchFiles

.KEY %%a IN (r,n,g} DO bai’ %a

If you pressed r, BATR.BAT would be executed. If you pressed n, “~™

BATN.BATwould be executed and so on.

You may also couple .KEY with the .TEXT/.ENDTEXT commandsto

create a menu that. will be displayed when a batchfile is executed.
Note that you should use the .TEXT commandbefore the .KEY com-
mand because .KEYwill halt processing until a key is pressed. For ex-
ample:

(MENU
CLS
EXT
Press one of the following:

1) COPY

2) DISPLAY

3) DELETE

) QUIT
mB

KEY %%a IN (1-4) DO .CALL routeo%a

GOTO MENU
(ROUTE
GOPY %i B:
RETURN
(ROUTE2
TYPE %1 | .MORE
RETURN
(ROUTES
ERASE %1
ETURN
ROUTES oo
ABORT

In this example, the menu will be displayed on the screen. Dependent

upon the key that you press, processing would be directed to one of
four points withinthefile.
NEXT

-NEXT makesit possible to use more than ten replaceable operands

in a batchfile by shifting the operands one position to theleft.
Replaceable operandsare explained later in this chapter.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: NEXT

Explanation:

Whenever you use .NEXT you will lose access to the current value as-
signedto the first operand (%0). Look at the example below and the
values for the operands.

%O WI We 3 %4 HS WG M7 KBB WO
a b co @ 6 g hoi

56 G&G G@ @€ Ff g on j K

Note that this permits you to add the k operand from the command
line. Now look at the next example, a batch file called XYZ.BAT.

PY %4 B:

if

Note that the use of !%1==! lets you test for a null case, where the
operand does not exist. Any character may be used in place of the !.
To invokethis batchfile, type:

The batch file will copy File1, File2, and File3 and so on until no more
operands are encountered, permitting you to enter more than ten
operands.
Batch Files

PAUSE

.PAUSEtemporarily halts processing and displays the message,

"Press a key when ready." A user must then press a key to continue
processing or break out of the batch file with a CTRL BRK or a CTRL
Cc.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: PAUSE jmessage}

Operand:

message enter up to 120 characters for the message string.

Explanation:

-PAUSEallows you to temporarily halt processing within a batchfile.

You mayelect to use the message operand, but the message will not
be displayed unless .ECHOis on.

Whenprocessing is halted with .PAUSE,it may be restarted by press-

ing any keys except CTL BRK and CTL C. For example:

ECHO Insert a new diskette

PAUSE

You may also use .PAUSEto display a message in addition to the

"Press any key to continue" message. For example:

.PAUSE Insert a new diskette

G = BE MOS-DL81L
 REM

-REM inserts a remarkinto a batchfile. IfECHO is on, the remark

displays on the video screen.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: REM fremark}

Operand:

remark may be any character string up to 122 characters long.

Explanation:

You may want to use .REM to insert remarks or comments into your
batch file. If you want to use .REM to display remarks on the video
screen during the execution of the batch file,ECHO must be on.

o™ -REM comments are useful to explain the logic within a batchfile.

For example:

.REM test for error-free JMPORT before RENAME

aw

MOS-DI91 G- Zo
Batch Files

#8TOP

.STOP causes an immediate exit from a batchfile.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: STOP

Explanations:

You may use .STOP with the .IF command,to specify a condition
which requires a .STOP. The .IF command also may be used to
specify a condition that must exist for processing to occur. For ex-
ample:

JF NOT EXIST MOSTEST.DOG .STOP

If STOPis used with nestedfiles, it will return to the previous .BAT

file. For example,if the file is only nested one layer deep, andis
called by the original batchfile, processing returnsto the original file.

If the file is nested two layers deep -- called by a batchfile that was
called by the original file, processing returnsto the batch file that
called the SSTOPpedfile. Execution of the file continues with the next
command statementafter the nameof the batch file that was just.ex-
ited.
 “LEXT,ENDTEXT

-TEXT/.ENDTEXTlets you create a display within a batch file that

appears on the video screen during its execution. Anything you enter
within the .TEXT and .ENDTEXT commandsechoesto the screen in-
dependentof the state ofECHO. You cannot invoke commands from
within the text block. Several operands lets you control the colors
that will appear on the video screen, and theinitial position of the
cursor within the text block.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: TEXT {/Sbf} /Kbf {/Cbf /Pexyy}

| bf
‘ENDTEXT
Operands:

/Sbt enter /S followed by the codes of the background and

foreground colors you want to use for the entire display
screen. Any existing text will be converted to this new
color. This operand must be entered on the line with the
-TEXT command. The colors you set carry forwardto all
-TEXT screens in the current batch file and all nested
batch files until you change them with another/Sbf or
with a/Kbf entry or return to the system prompt. See the
following color table for the codes you mayenter for the b
(background) andf (foreground) colors.

[Kot enter /K followed by the codes of the background and

foreground colors you want to use for the entire display
screen. Unlike the /Sbf option, the /Kbf option clears the
display. The colors you set carry forward just as those in
the /Sbf option.
eo,

MOS-DL9L
oe

RO
oF
4
Batch Files

/Cht enter /C followed by the codes of the background and

foreground colors to display on thefirst line and all sub-
sequentline in this .TEXT screen only, or until you —
change them. This operand may be entered only on the
line with the .TEXT command. The/C operand does not
carry your selection forward to other .TEXT screens. You
may find /C useful becauseit lets you enter an operand to
determinethe initial color for the text block. You cannot
enter a replaceable operand within the text block. See the
following color table for the codes you mayenterfor the b
(background) andf (foreground) colors.

enter the broken vertical bar followed by the background

and foreground colors anywherein the text block to
change the current color settings. This operand may be
entered anywherein the text display, but will not display
on the video screen.

b designates a code for a background color. With any of the

operands, enter the single character code for the color to —~
use for the background. Valid codes and corresponding
colors are shown in the following Color Code Table.

designates a code for a foreground color. With any of the

a

operands, enter the single character code for the color to

use for the foreground. Valid codes and corresponding
colors are shown in the following Color Code Table.

/PIKYY enter /P followed by the x and y coordinates to define the

initial position of the cursor for the text block. The xx
defines the column number and maybe from 1 to 80, and
the yy defines the line number and may be from 1 to 25.
Four digits must appear after the /P, for example, /P0103.

MOS-D191
 Color Code Table

Background Codes Foreground Codes

Black Black
TIMDOWDFOONDAUAWHY=AO0

MmMOUODWPOONMDHNAWN=AO
Blue Blue
Green Green
Cyan Cyan
Red Red
Magenta Magenta
Brown ordark yellow Brownor dark yellow
Light grey or white Light grey or white
Blinking black Dark grey or black
Blinking blue Light blue
Blinking green Light gree
Blinking Cyan Light cyan
Blinking red Light red
Blinking magenta Light magenta
Blinking brown Yellow orlight yellow
Blinking grey White

Note that the value for a blinking backgroundcoloris eight in

hexadecimal added to the 0-7 values.

Explanation:

You may use .TEXT/.ENDTEXTto create screens for display during

execution of a batch file. The image will be displayed on the video
screen just as it exists in the batchfile.

You mayfind it useful to use the clear screen command, .CLS, before
the .TEXT statement to clear the screen for the display. For example:

ACLS
TEXT
Exportingfil OS
a -ENDTEXT

MOS-D191
Batch Files

You could specify the foreground and backgroundcolorsfor this dis-

play with the pipe operand, for example:

CLS
TEXT
i13 Exporting files
<ENDTEXT

The |13 operand specifies that "Exportingfiles" will appear as cyan

on a blue background and will be maintained until another back-
ground foreground operandentry is encountered within the display.
Note theuse of the broken vertical bar, |, it must precede each back-
ground, foreground entry. These entries will not appear as part of the
display.

You mayset default colors with the /Sbf, /Kbf, and /Cbf operands. You
mayalso set the initial cursor position within the text with the
/Pxxyy operand. For example:

TEXT/S14 /PO105
The text will start on line 5. The contents of the screen will be con-
verted to red on a blue background. This color selting becomes the
new defauit for all subsequent uses of .TEXT because /S was used.
JENDTEXT

6+ 28 MOS-DI191
Batch File Processing

MOSgives you greatflexibility in creating batch files. You may group

several commandsin a batchfile to create your own special utilities.
In this section, we'll discuss three types of batchfiles -- automated
batch files, nested batch files, and utility files that can be executed
with replaceable operands.

Automated Batch Files

When MOSis booted it looks for a startupfile called

AUTOEXEC.BATto establish the conditions under which you begin
processing. You mayuseit to set the .PATH to a specific directory, or
to specify your .PROMPT. Sincethis file will be executed each time
you boot your system, you will want to customize it to your needs.
Some commands you may wantto include in your AUTOEXEC.BAT
are:

eT
-ENVSIZE
.PATH
PROMPT
IME
DATE
ADDTASK
SIGNON
CLS
JNSERT

SET

The .SET commandis used to set frequently accessed strings of infor-

mation into the environment, which is a reference area in memory. A
copy of the environmentis made available to all programs within a
partition. Some items are automatically set into the environment
when theyare first invoked by command, such as .PATH and
.-PROMPT,whichare discussedlater.

MOS-DL9L 6« 29
Batch Files

-ENVSIZE

You may use the .ENVSIZE commandto specify the minimum size of
the environment. It must be followed by the size of the environment
in bytes. For example, if you specify .ENVSIZE 256, this permanent-
ly reserves at least 256 bytes for the environment.

-PATH

The .PATH commandsets the directories to search and the order in

which they will be searched for an executable file or a batchfile,
before displaying a file not found message and endingthe search.If
you wanted to bring up a specific application each time you booted,
you would set the path for the directory that contains that applica-
tion. For example if you wanted to bring your system up in a word
processing application that resides in a directory that is removed by
several levels from the root, you might enter:

PATH=C:\dirl dire\dirSiwp

-PROMPT

You may use the .PROMPT commandto customize your system

prompt. MOSdefaults to its system prompt of the current drive and
directory unless otherwise specified. You mightfind it helpful to
redefine your prompt to reflect the date, the time, or some character
string. For example, you may enter:

-PROMPT [JAN]

This would create the prompt:

JAN]

You could use the .PROMPT commandto automatically display the

system time and date in your prompt. For more information about
the promptvalues, refer to the .PROMPT commandin the General
Commandssection of this manual.

6- 30 MOS-D191
-TIME

If your system does not have a perpetual clock, you may use .TIME to
enter the system time. The .TIME is the internal timethat is known
to MOS. You must enter it in the format specified during system
setup. For example:

14:24:03.42 is the current time

New timeis:

In this format, in which hours are expressed in military time,

hundredths of seconds maybe indicatedin the last position.

Whenentering the time, you may omit the seconds and hundredths of
seconds.

DATE

If your system does not havea perpetual calendar, you may use
.DATE to enter the system date. The .DATEis the internal date that
is known to MOS. You mustenterit in the format specified during
system setup. For example:

Weed 11-11-87 is the current date

New date is (mrmn-dd-yy):

-ADDTASK

If you know that you always want to have certain partitions set up in
your system when it boots, include the .ADDTASK commandin the
AUTOEXEC.BAT. You may use multiple.ADDTASK commands to
set up as manypartitions as your system permits. In the example
that follows, the .ADDTASK command statement addsonepartition,
called partition 1, to the system.

ADDTASK 256,1,C,PART1

MOS-DISL @- 31
Batch Files

This .ADDTASKstatement gives the partition 256K of memory,sets

its security class as C, its task ID as 1, andits startupfile as
PARTI1.BAT. More information about the .ADDTASK commandis —
contained in the Multi-Tasking/Usersection of this manual. Note
that the startup file contained in the .ADDTASKstatementacts as
an AUTOEXEC.BATfor the partition that it creates. You would use
this startup file to set the conditions for processing within the parti-
tion.

SIGNON

If you've chosen to use security for your system, include the SIGNON
command in your AUTOEXEC.BAT.This will automatically display
the MOSSignon screen whenthe system is booted:

Note that SIGNONis only valid if a $$USER.SYSfile exists.

CLS

.CLS clears the video screen. Include it at the end of your

AUTOEXEC.BATif you will be prompted to make entries during its
execution. It will give you a clean screen once your startup has com-
pleted.

INSERT

The MOS commandline entry operates in two modes-- insert and

typeover. These modesfunction in the same manneras those in an
editor. Insert mode allows you to add characters without typing over
existing entries. Typeover, which is the MOS default, meansthat you
will be overwriting characters when you add an entry to an existing
line. If you want to invoke the Insert mode when your system is
booted, include .INSERT in your AUTOEXEC.BAT.

G- 32 MOS-D191
Nested Batch Files

You may create a batchfile that in turn calls another, processesit

and returnsto the original file. However, if you’ve set up security for
your system, rememberthat you can only call a batch file to which
you have access. You can use this nesting feature to create sub-
routines within your batch files. You maycouple this nesting feature
with testing for conditions, to create branches within your files. The
following batch file, ALLCOPY.BATcontains an example of three pos-
sible branches from a copy operation.

COPY A**
JF ERRORLEVEL 2 SERIOUS
JF ERRORLEVEL 1 .GOTO ER1
NORMAL
GOTO NEXT
(ERI
POSSIBLE
(NEXT
.PAUSE Insert next diskette for processingy

NORMAL.BATcontains thefollowing:

CLS
wPEXT

All files successfully copied

ENDTERT

If errorlevel 0 which indicates a successful operation occurred during

execution of ALLCOPY, then NORMAL.BATwould be called and the
message, "All files successfully copied" would be displayed on the
video screen. If errorlevel 1 is returned, which indicates that a pos-
sible error occurred, POSSIBLE.BAT would be called. It contains:

MOS-DLOL G+ dd
Batch Files

CLS
TEXT

An error may have occurred. You may want to perform a VERIFY

after this job has completed. You may halt processing by pressing
CTL-C.

JENDTEXT
PAUSE

If errorlevel 2 occurred, which indicates that the operation was not

successful because of an error, SERIOUS.BATwill be called. It con-
tains:

CLS
PEAT

A serious error occurred, processing aborted...

-ENDTEXT
ABORT

In these examples, the called batch files were executed and process-
ing was returnedto thecalling batch file. The called batch files them-
selves could have contained conditional statements that called
additional batch files. So you can nestfiles as many levels deep as
you need, up’to the full extent of the memory in your system.

Replaceable Operand Files

You can create a batch file that performs the same group of com-
mands, but with different operands each time it is executed. This is
accomplished using replaceable operandsin thefile. When you ex-
ecute the file, MOS replaces the operands with those you enter on the
commandline. For example, look at the batch file, named
MOVE.BATthatfollows:

.EGHO. OFF
CLS
COPY %1 Ye
ERASE %i jv

G- 34 MOs-DLOL
 To execute MOVE.BAT,type the following at the system prompt:
oo;
MOVE GAWPYV.DOG A;\

These values are assignedto the replaceable operands, %1 and %2.

Additional operands, %0-%9 are also available for use. The initial
value of %) is the nameofthe batchfile itself. More than 10 operands
maybe accessed from the commandline using the .NEXT command
explained earlier in this chapter. Note the use of the /v operand with
the .ERASE statement. This causes MOSto display a verify prompt
before deleting eachfile.

In addition to the %0 through %9 system variables, MOS supports a

%A variable which can be used to determine the current task number
from within a batch file. Upon finding the %A variable within a batch
file statement, the commandprocessor will determine the numberof
the current task and replace the %A with that number. This is very
useful in AUTOEXECor Startup batchfiles.

You mayalso use replaceable operands to pass data from one batch
file to another. You maydoso bysetting strings into the environment
with the .SET command. Lookat the two example batchfiles that fol-
low. Thefirst is called A.BAT. It contains:

SET DEST=A:
SET SOURCE=LIST1.D0C
B
SET SOURCE=(IST2. DOC

The second batchfile, B.BAT contains:

COPY &SOURCE &DEST

Each time B.BATis executed the current values for SOURCE and
DESTare found in the environment and substituted in place of
&SOURCEand &DEST. Note the use of the leading ampersand to
identify these operands as environmentreference variables. This al-
lows onebatchfile to control the action of another.

MM ¢
» SDL OL
3
Bs
ea

t
Compatibility

Generally, batch files developed under PC-DOSwill run unmodified

under MOS. There are, however, some differences. Two areas of
batch file operations in which MOS’s differences from PC-DOS can
cause problemsare:

1. MOSnests batchfile to batch file calls, while DOS chainsbycall-

ing the namedbatchfile with no return to the calling batchfile.

2. MOSsets an errorlevel on certain internal commands.

The environmentvariable, $COMPATS, allows the user to modify

MOS’s behavior to allow for better compatibility with PC-DOS’s batch
file handling.

For example, issuing the command:

SET SCOMPATS=/N

will cause MOSto act like PC-DOS whenonebatchfile is named

from within another. If you have a batch file which counts on PC-
DOS’s non-nesting type of behavior, you can use this feature. If, how-
ever, you havebatch files which are designed to nest -- do NOT use
this option. (This option is primarily intended for compatibility with
installation batch files that come with some applications.)

Issuing the command:

SET $COMPAT$=/i

will cause MOSto not set ERRORLEVEL on anyinternal commands.

(This is also intended for compatibility with installation batch files.)
Anypart of this command maybe entered in either upper or lower-
case, and the switches may be combined. For example:

set Scompatd=/n/i

This feature control was implemented so that it would remain as set

across commandprocessorlevels. For example, if a particular $COM-
PAT$ setting is in place and the installation batch file does a COM-
MAND /C,or some:other type of shelling, the switch options will
survive.

6» 36 MOS-DI91
 MOS EDITOR - ED

Introduction 2.0. 0. te ee ee ee ns 7-2

Invoking the Editor. 2... ee ee es 7-2

Editing in the Command Mode ..........00 8002 ee 7-3

Command Mode Commands... ..... 00 ee ee ene 7-5

A-ASSIGN 2.0... eee ee ee et ee 7-6

C-COPY 2... . et te te es 7-7
D-DELETE....... 0... eee ee eee ee eee 7-8
E-END ... 2... ee ee es 71-9
F-FILENAME ........6 00. eee eee eens 7-10
H-HELP ...... ee ee 7-11
I-INSERT ..... 0... eee ee ee 7-12
L-LIST 1... es 7-13
M-MOVE .... 0... ee eee ee ee ee ees 7-14
P-PRINT ... 0.0. eee eee te ee ee es 7-15
Q-QUIT. 2... ee 7-16
R-REPLACE ........ 00 eee wee eee ene 7-17
S-SEARCH ........ 0.00 eee eee eee ene 7-18
V-VISUAL MODE ........0 00+ ete ee nea 7-19
W-WRITE ......... ee ete ee ee 7-20
X-EXECUTE MACRO .........0.820 eevee 7-21

Editing in Viswal Mode... 1. ee 7-22

Visual Mode Editing Keys .. 0... 0... ee eee ee 7-24

Using Macros... wk ee ee ee ee 7-26

MOS-DISL ded
MOSEditor - ED

Introduction

The MOSEditor provides an easy way for you to create newfiles or ~~

modify existing files. There are two modesof editing that you may
select to use; the Command modeandthe Visual mode.

The Command modedisplaysthefile on your screen with line num-

bers. You can create or modify thefile one line at a time by invoking
commands associated with a specific line number. Anyactivity to the
file does not appear on the screen until you re-display thefile.

The Visual modeis similar to a word processor in that you may edit
screens of text, The file displays without line numbers, and the cursor
is positioned within the text. You can move anywhere in thefile to
add or delete text, copy a line, delete a line, page through screens,etc.__
In the Visual modé;allactivity appears on the screen asit occurs.

From either mode, you can display a graphic character table, and as-
sign graphic characters to the ten function keys. The function keys
while in the Visual modeto place graphic characters into your text.
You may find the graphic characters useful for designing special ef-
fects into your own menusandscreen displays.

ED makes backupcopiesof all changed files. When an existingfile is

changed and saved, the old file is saved with a .BAK extension. The
updated version retains the original filename and extension.

o
Invokingthe

The MOSEditor is invoked with the extrinsic command, ED. To edit

a file, enter the commandat the system prompt, followed by the
nameofthe file you want to create or modify. For example:
AT
ED | AZ NULBAT
=

You maycreate or modify a file on a different drive or in a different —

directory by including the appropriate designations with thefile
name. For example:

G-2 MOS-DLOL
 A messagedisplays as the Editor is loading, and then the edit screen
appears similar to the following.

Whenyou invokethe Editor in this manner,it will be in Command

mode. Thecursoris positioned at the top of your screen on the com-
mandline. The control line displays the file name, current line
(CL=1)of control, and that the insert modeis on.If thefile exists, the
first 22 lines display on the text screen.

You mayalso invoke the editor directly in the Visual Modeby enter-
ing /v with the .ED commandas follows:

.£D filename jv

The following explains how to edit a file in the Command mode, and
the commandsthat are available. Following the commandsis an ex-
planation of how to edit a file in the Visual mode, andtheediting
keys that are available.

Editing in Command Mode

In the Command mode, all commandsandtext entries are made on

the commandline. You can edit any line in thefile by typing the line
number on the commandline and pressing ENTER. For example, if
you type a 2 and press ENTER, the current text for line 2 appears on
the commandlineasin the following:

fee

MOS-D191 «3
al
MOS Editor - ED

You may changeor edit the text on the commandline.If you are
creating a new file, you may type any text for the line. The text may
not contain more than 80 characters. When you press ENTER,the —
text for the line is savedin thefile. The edited line then becomes the
currentline.

Using the previous example, the control line would show CL=2 when
you press ENTER.To display your changedline, you may enter the
list (L) command. Thefile would re-display on the text screen, begin-
ning with line 2, which is the current line. The current line is used as
a default value for most commands whena line.numberis not in-
cluded.

All commands in the Command mode consist of a single character. Be-

cause the commandsare not case sensitive, you may enter them in
either upperor lower case characters. Any operands always precede
the commanditself, and are separated by a space delimiter. For ex-
ample, to copy (C) lines 1 through 3 to line 10, the commandform is:

12 10C —

You may type as many commandson the commandlineasit will

hold. You are not limited to issuing one commandat a time. When
you finish editing a file, there are two ways you may exit from the
MOSEditor. The end (Z) commandsaves the edited file on disk and
returns you to the system prompt. The quit (Q) commanddisplays a
promptthat lets you select whether or not to save changesto the
edited file. After entering your selection, MOS returns you to the sys-
tem prompt.

God MOs-DIL9L
Command Mode Commands

Many commandsare available in the Command Mode, andare ex-

plained in alphabetical order following these special notes about
using the Command mode:

* These commands can be invoked only from the commandline.

* You may press CTRL to delete the contents of an entire com-

mand line, whether it contains a commandora lineof text.

* ‘You may use the arrow keys and the backspacekey to edit any
entry on the commandline.

* The HOME key movesthecursorto thefirst position on the com-

mandline, and the END key movesthe cursorto the last position
on theline.

* Press the insert key to toggle the insert mode on andoff. When in-
sert is on, you may insert text anywhere in the line. When insert
is off, you will overwrite any current text.

* Most commandsuse the current line as a default whena line

numberis not entered with a command.

* Commands maybe entered in either upper case or lower case.

* All operands must precede the command, and must be separated

with a space delimiter.

MOS-D1LOL q-
Gr
MOSEditor - ED

A- ASSIGN

The A commanddisplays a table of graphic characters that you may

assign to function keys. When the assignment is complete, you may
then use the function keys in the Visual modeto place the graphic
characters in the text of a file. Press the ESC key to exit from the
graphic character table and return to the Command mode.

Form: A

Explanation:

When you invoke the A command,the graphic character table ap-

pears with any current function key assignments. If a function key
does not have a current assignment, the message "undefined" ap-
pears. For example:

Fi = Undelined

To assign a character to a function key, use the arrow keys to move

the cursor to the desired graphic character and press the function
key. You may changethe current character assigned to a function
key by movingto a different graphic character and pressing the func-
tion key.

To remove a character assignment, place the cursor in thefirst posi-

tion on thefirst line of the graphic character table. This position ap-
pears blank on the screen. Press the function key that has the
assignment you want to remove. The display to the left of the graphic
character table shows the "undefined" messagefor that function key.

Whenyou assign values to the function keys, they are stored in file
named DEFKEYS.EDin the current directory. Each directory may
have its own unique DEFKEYS.EDfile. This file is loaded in a direc-
tory each time the editor is invokedin that directory.

If you exit the A commandby pressing ESC without assigning any

values to the function keys, a DEFKEYS.EDfile is still created.

You will notice several blanks in the table of graphics characters.

Character 20 is actually the "space" character. The blank characters
00, 07, 08 OA, OD and FF are not recommendedfor use.

7-6 MOS-D1LOL
C-COPY

The C commandlets you copy oneline or a block oflines to another

location in thefile.

Form: fypds

Operands:

f the numberofthefirst line to be copied.

i the numberof the last line to be copied. To copy only one

line, enter the sameline numberfor both thefirst and
last line numberoperands.

d the numberof the first destination line where the copied

lines are to be located.

Explanation:

You may copy the currentline to a destination line by entering only

the destination line number. The numberthat appears after CL= on
the control line is the current line. For example,if the currentline is
1 and the last line in thefile is 28, you may copyline 1 to the end of
the file with the following command:

29 S

To copy a block of lines, you must enterthefirst and last lines of the
block in the command. For example to copy lines 1 through 5 to the
end of the file, you would enter:

15 29 ¢

Whencopying lines, the destination line number must be outside the

range of lines to copy. If the destination line is within the copy range,
the copy will not take place. If the destination is past the current end
of the file, the last line of the file becomes the destination. When you
copy text to an existing line, the copy is inserted beginningat the des-
tination line number. Theexisting line andall subsequentlines are
moved down in thefile. The copied and existing lines are renumbered
in sequence.

MOS-D191
=
a]
&
 OS Editor - ED

D - DELETE

The D commandlets you delete a line or a block of lines-from thefile.

Form: ff iD

Operands:

f the numberofthefirst or only line to be deleted.

i the numberof the last line of the block to be deleted.

Explanation:

You maydelete only one line by entering the numberof that line fol-
lowed by the D command. For example:

42 0

Anyotherlines in thefile after line 42 are moved up oneline, and

are renumbered in sequence. You maydelete the current line by
entering only D on the commandline and pressing ENTER.

You maydelete a block of lines by enteringthe first and last line num-
bers of the block to delete. For example, the following command will
delete lines 3 through 10:

3 10D

If you delete a block of lines and the last line numberyouspecify is

past the last line in thefile, all lines throughthelast line of the file
will be deleted.

Co

7-8 MOS-DISI
E- END

The E commandendsthe current editing session, and returns control

to MOS.

Form: E

Explanation:

When youend an editing session with the E command,the edited ver-

sion of the file replaces the original input version on the disk. Thefol-
lowing message appearsas the output is being saved:

Writing output file: filename

If no changes were madeto thefile, the original input file remains on

the disk andis not replaced. If the F command was used during the
editing session to assign a new file nameto the output, then the out-
put is written to the new file whether or not any changes were made.
The original input file remains unchanged.

MOS-DLOL 4-9
MOS Editor - ED

The F commandlets you assign a newfile namefor output. When you

issue a commandthat writes output, the output is saved to the new
file name. The F commanddoesnotbyitself cause anything to be
written to the disk.

Form: Ffllename

Operands:

filename enter the new name you want to assign. There cannot be
any spaces between the F andthefilename, or within the
filename.

Explanation:

You mayassign a new file nameat any time duringthe editing ses-
sion. When you write thefile to the disk, the output is written to the
soo
new file name.If a file with the new namedoesnot exist, ED creates
the file for you. If a file with the new name doesexist, the output
replaces any current information in the existingfile.

For example, you may select to edit a file named MEMO.TXT. During
the editing session you may assign a different file name for output by
entering the following command on the commandline:

Fmemo.sav

You may then continue editing the file. When you issue a W (write) or
an E (end) command,the current text is saved on the disk in the
MEMO.SAVfile. If you enter the Q (quit) commandand select not to
save any changes, the original input file remains unchanged, the new
file name is ignored, and no outputis written to anyfile.

MOS-DI9L
wd

fesod,
So)
a
H- HELP

The H commanddisplays a list: of Command mode commands.

Form: H

Explanation:

When you invoke the H command,a list summarizing the available

Command Mode commandsand their uses appears on your screen.

Onceyou havethe information you need, you may press any key to
return to the editor.

MOS-DLOl
ag
fort
oid
&
MOS Editor - E

I- INSERT

The I commandlets you insert oneline at a time between any two ex-
isting lines in the file. You may use the I commandto insert a blank
line or a line of text.

Form: {nj i

Operand:

n enter the numberof the line where you wantto insert a

new line. You may omit the line numberto insert a line at
the current line.

Explanation:

You may use the I commandto adda line of text or a blank line
anywherein file. For example, to insert a line at line 5 you may
enter: |

5 |

When you press ENTER,the control line displays the prompt "Insert
Line:" You may now enter text on the commandline that will appear
for the insertedline. If you want the inserted line to be blank, make
no entry and press ENTER. Rememberthat the inserted line will not
appear on the text screen until you re-displaythefile.

Whenyouinsert a line at an existing line, the existing line andall

subsequentlines are moved down onelinein the file, and are renum-
bered in sequence.

7-12 MOS-DiSt
L- LIST

The L commandlets you display the current text in a file and specify
thefirst line to appear on the text screen. You may use the L com-
mand to movethe text screen display upward or downward from any
pointin thefile.

Form: {np

Operand:

n enter the numberof the line where you want the display
to begin. You may omit the line numberto begin the dis-
play with the currentline.

Explanation:

The L commandlets you display the file on the text screen in 22-line
increments. The display will include any changes you've madeto the
file. You may enterthefirst line to display. For example:

164

This commanddisplays 22 lines of the file beginning with line 15.If

you enter L without an operand, the text screen displays 22 lines of
the file, beginning with the current line of control.

MOS-DI81 7-13
MOS Editor - ED

M- MOVE

The M command movesa line or a block of lines to a new location in

the file. You can move any numberof lines with a single command.
All lines affected by the move are renumbered in sequence.

Form: fbadM

Operands:

f enter the numberofthefirst line to be moved.

i enter the numberof the last line to be moved. To move

only one line, enter the same line number for both the
first and last line number operands.

d enter the numberof the destination line for the move. To

moveonly the current line, enter the destination line and
no other operands.

Explanation:

If you want to move only one line, you must enter that line number as
both the beginning and ending lines to be moved. If you donot, the
move will not occur. For example:

18 182M
se

If you want to move only the current line, you can omit the beginning
and ending line numbers. In the previous example,if line 18 were the
current line, you could enter:
a

When movinglines, the destination line number mustbe outside the

range of lines to. be moved or the movewill not occur. If you specify a
destination line number that is beyond the last line of the file, the
movedlines will be placed immediately following the last line in the
file. If the destination line exists in the file, the movedline(s) are in-
serted between the destination line and the line preceding the des-
tination line. All line numbersaffected are renumbered in sequence.
 P- PRINT

The P commandlets you send the content of thefile to the printer.

Thefile prints in 60-line pages. You can print the content of the en-
tire file, or specify a range oflines to print.

Form: iff () P

Operands:

F enter thefirst line to print. If this is the only operand

entered, this line and all lines to the endofthefile will
print.

! enter the last line to print.

Explanation:

If no operands are entered in the commandline,the entire file is sent

to the printer. When youprinta file, the current printer device is
used. If the MOS Print Spooler is active, output is intercepted and
sent to a printfile in the Spooler subdirectory. The print file may
then be printed from the Spooler.

You may set an environmentvariable before loading the MOS Editor

to direct output to any device MOSrecognizes. The environment vari-
able for the MOS Editor is LSTDEV.If this has been specified, output
is directed to the device that is named. If you wantto print the text to
a disk file, then you must set LSTDEVto a filename. For example:

SET LSTDEV=prniile.edt

Any text you print will be output to the file named prnfile.edt.

ee

MOS-DLOL
“=
MOSEditor - ED

@ ~- QUIT

The Q command endsthe current editing session and displays a

prompt that lets you select whether or not: to save any changes, or
return to your document andcontinue.

Form: Q

Explanation:

If no changes were madeto the currentfile, invoking the Q command

ends the editing session without writing any output. If changes were
madeto thefile, invoking the Q commanddisplays the following
prompt:

Ghanges have been madel Save changes (Y/N/ESC)

You must respond with a Y if you want to save your changes.

Responding with N ends the editing session without saving, and
leaves the original input file unchanged.

Pressing ESC allows you to return to your document and continue

editing.

If you used the F commandduring the editing session to change the

file name for output, changes are saved in the new outputfile. If you
select not to save changes, the original input file remains unchanged,
andnothing is written to the disk.

7-16 MOS-DI9I
 R.- REPLACE
en,

The R commandlets you replace an existing string of text with a new

string. You may replace every occurrenceofthestringin file, or
only replace the string within a specific range of lines. The ? operand
displays a prompt with each match so you can selectively replace a
string. You may press ESC to end this commandat any time.

Form: {{ fp i} Pp &

Operands:

i enter the numberofthefirst line where you want the

replace to begin.

i enter the numberofthe last line to includein the replace.

If no ending line numberis specified, the replace occurs
throughthe endofthefile.

enter a ? to display the promptthat lets you selectively

m3

replace the string.

Explanation:

You may enter the R commandwithout any operands to perform the

search and replace on the entire file. A "Search for:" prompt appears
in the control line. Enter the string to replace. A "Replace with:"
prompt then appears in the control line. Type the replacementstring.
The string matchis case sensitive, upper and lower case letters are
not interchangeable.

You may wantto include the ? operand to verify what is being

replaced. A "Found: Change Y/N" prompt appears with each match.
Anyentry other than Y ignores the match. To perform the search and
replace on a specific rangeof lines, enter the first and last numberof
the lines to include. For example:

10 35 R

Be careful how you enter replacementstrings. If you search for "is"

and replace it with "was", the string "this is" becomes "thwas was".
You may want to enter spaces in the string, such as "is".
MOS Editor - ED

S - SEARCH

The S commandlocates a string of text that matchesa string you ~

specify. You may search an entirefile, or only a specific range of lines
in a file. Unless you include the ? operand in the command,the
search ends with thefirst match found.

Form: f{qfp ip PFs

Operands:

F enter the numberof the line where you want the search
to begin.

! enter the numberof the last line to search. If no ending

line numberis specified, the search occurs through the
endofthefile.

? enter a ? to continue the search for all matches.

Explanation:

You mayenter the S commandwithout any operandsto perform the

search on the entire file. When you invoke the S command,a "Search
for:" prompt appears in the control line. Type the string to replace
and press ENTER. Thestring match is case sensitive, upper and
lower case letters are not interchangeable.

Unless you include the ? operand, the search ends with thefirst
match found. When the ? is included, a "Found: Continue Y/N"
prompt appearsin the control line with each match. Any entry other
than Y ends the search. To search only a specific range of lines, enter
the first and last numberofthe lines to include. For example:

S89? FR

Note that if you enter "here" as the search string, a match is found om
with "where". You may want to enter spaces in the string, such as "
here ".

-18 MOS-D181
wl
 V- VISUAL MODE
aon,

The V commandallows you to switch out of the Command mode and

into the Visual Editing Mode.

Form: Vv

Explanation:

To switch to the Visual mode from the Command mode,enter the V

command on the commandline.

Whenyou switch to the Visual mode,the current file displays on the

text screen without line numbers, and the cursoris positioned at the
beginningof thefirstlineof the text screen display. See Editing ii
Visual Mode for information on using this editing mode.

Press ESC to return to the Command mode. You must be in Com-

mand modeto save or exit the file.

ee

MOS-DL9E Tol
MOS Editor - ED

W - WRITE

The W commandwrites the current text to a file, and leaves the file
open so you can continue editing.

Form: W

Explanation:

The W commandwrites the current text back to the original input

file. If you specified a different output file name with the F command,
then the current text is written to the new file, and the original input
file is not changed.

You may issue a W commandat any time during your editing session.
The output. is permanently written to the designatedfile. If you end
the editing session with the Q commandandselect not to save chan-
ges, the output file contains the text last written with the W com-
mand.

7-20 MOS-DL9L
X- EXECOTE MACRO

The X commandexecutes a defined macro.

Form: x

Explanation:

Entering X on the commandline will execute the macro that you

defined in the Visual mode. See Using Macrosfor information on the
macro feature of ED.

After macro execution the cursor will be positioned at the right end of
the control line. Use the cursor keys to position the cursor at the
desired location in your file to continue editing.

MOS-DLOI 7-2
MOS Editor - ED

Editing in Visual Mode

To switch to the Visual mode from the Command mode,enter the V

command on the command line and press ENTER. From theVisual
mode, you may press the ESC key to return to the Command mode.

When you switch to the Visual mode,the current file displays on the
text screen without line numbers, and the cursoris positioned at the
beginningofthefirst line of the text screen display. For example:

The control line now displays the row and column numbersof the cur-
sor position. If you are creating a new file, the cursor is positioned at
row one and column one and the screen will be blank. You are ready
to begin entering text in thefile.

If the file exists, you may use the Visual mode editing keys to move
the cursor to any position within the file. The ESC key switches con-
trol back to the Command mode. You mustbe in the Command mode
to exit thefile.

Manyediting keys are available in the Visual mode, and are ex-
plained following these special notes about using the Visual mode:

* Each line may contain a maximum of 80 characters.

¢ Ifyou type beyondthelast position of a line, the text automat-

ically wrapsto the next line.

* You may press ENTERto endthe current line and moveto the
next line.

J 22 MOS-DLSL
° While in Visual mode, you may press CTRL and Q to display a
help screen of the available Visual mode editing keys.

* ESC switches control to the Command mode.

* Text on the screen automatically scrolls if you continue entering

text beyond the 22ndline on the screen.

* You maypress the INS keyto toggle the insert mode on andoff.
Whenthe insert mode is on, the word "INSERT"displays in the
control line.

MOS-DiL91 7-23
MOS Editor - ED

Visual Mode Editing Keys

The MOSediting keys in Visual mode and their functions are:

Movesthe cursor up oneline at a time. If you move

beyondthefirst line on the text screen,the file scrolls
down one line. However, you cannot scroll beyond the
first line of thefile.

Moves the cursor down oneline at a time. If you move

beyondthe last line of the text screen, the file scrolls
up one line. However, you cannot scroll beyond the
last line of thefile.

Moves the cursor to the left, one character at a time.

The moveis non-destructive and will not erase any
text on the line.

Movesthe cursorto the right, one character at a time.

The move is non-destructive and will not erase any
text on the line.

BkSp Deletes the character to the left of the cursor, moving

all characters to the right of the deleted characterleft
one space.

DEL Deletes the character at the cursor, movingall charac-

ters to the right of the cursor left one space.

END Movesthe cursor to the last character of the line.

ESC Exits the Visual mode and returns to the Command

mode.

HOME Movesthe cursorto the first character of the line.

INS Toggles the insert mode on and off. Wheninsert is on,

you mayinsert text anywhere in the file. When insert
is off, you will overwrite any current text.

PgDn Scrolls the display towards the endofthefile in 22

line increments.

MOS-DL91
PgUp Scrolls the display towards the beginningof thefile in
22 line increments.

CTRL PgDn Displays the last 22 lines ofthe file.

CTRL PgUp Displaysthe first 22 linesofthe file.

CTRL A Lets you assign graphic characters to function keys

for inserting in text. See the Command mode explana-
tion of the A commandfor more detail.

CTRL D Duplicates the current line on the next line.

CTRL L Moves control to a specified line in thefile.

CTRL N Splits the current line at the cursor position, and

moves charactersto the right of the cursor down to
the next line.

CTRL O Turns macro definition keystroke saving ON and OFF.

CTRL P Sends the text in the currentfile to the printer, or to

an alternate device. See the Command mode explana-
tion of the P commandfor more detail.

CTRL Q Displays the Visual modehelp screen.

CTRL R Searches and replaces text strings starting at the cur-

rent line through the endofthefile. A prompt ap-
pears with each match so you can selectively replace
strings.

CTRL $ Searchesfor text starting at the current line through

the endoffile. A prompt appears with each match so
you can selectively continue the search.

CTRL W Writes the current text to the designated outputfile.

CTRL X Executes previously defined macro.

CTRL Y Deletes the current line no matter where the cursor is

positioned in the line, and moves subsequentlines in
the file up oneline.

MOS-DIOL GF» 25
Using Macros

A macro feature is available with the Editor. Macros must always be

defined in the Visual Mode. A macro can be defined from within any
file you are currently editing. If you are not already editing a file and
want to define a macro, enter the editor using anyfile name you
desire since the file does not have to be saved to define a macro.

The Visual Mode editing keys CTRL-Otell the editor to start/stop

saving keystrokes for the macro you want to define. All keystrokes
are saved to the file ED.KEYin the current directory. Entering CTRL-
O once will toggle keystroke saving ON. (When on, the word CAP-
TURE appearsat the right side of the command line. Whenoff, the
word CAPTUREis not shown.) With CAPTURE on,enterthe
text/ecommand combination that you want for your macro. When
finished, enter CTRL-O again to toggle keystroke saving OFF, ending
your macro definition.

To execute a macro in the Visual Mode, position the cursor at the

point in the file where you want the macro and enter CTRL-X. After
macro execution the cursorwill be positioned at the right end of the
control line. Use the cursor keys to position the cursor atthe desired
location in your file to continue editing.

To execute a macro in the Command Modeusethe "X - Execute

Macro" command. Entering X on the commandline will execute the
macro that you defined in the Visual mode. The macro will be in-
serted into your file at the "current line” as defined by CL= in the con-
trol line.

7 = 26 MOS-DI91
 Chapter 8:
DEBUG

Introduction 2... te tt ee ee eas 8-3

DEBUGBreak Points 0... 0 ee ee ee 8-4

Entering DEBUG Commands... 0.2.0... 000 see 8-4

DEBUGCommands... ec ee ee te 8-6

A-ASSEMBLE ........0.¢ 2 eee eee ee eens 8-7

AU - ASSEMBLE - UNASSEMBLE ............. 8-9
BC - CLEAR BREAKPOINT .........0.00 085% 8-10
BD - BREAKPOINT DISABLE ............00- 8-11
BE - BREAKPOINT ENABLE ...........0200- 8-12
BL- BREAKPOINT LIST .........00-020005 8-13
BS - BREAKPOINT SET ..........00220008 8-14
C-COMPARE... 0... 2... eee ee te ee ee es 8-15
C? - DEBUG CONFIGURATION ............4. 8-16
CO-CHANGE CONSOLE ..........+500008 8-17
D-DUMP ...... 2... eee ee ens bees 8-18
E-ENTER ... 2... eee te ee tt ts 8-19
F-FILL 2... ee 8-21
G-GO .. ee ee es 8 - 23
H-HEX 2... te es 8-24
I-INPUT ... 0... 0 ee te ee ee ee ns 8 - 25
L-LIST 2... ce ee 8 - 26
M-MOVE ...... 0... eee ee ee eee ee ee 8 - 27
N-NAME ..... 0.00 tee ee ee eee 8 - 28
O-OUTPUT. . 0... ee et es 8-29
P-PROCEED ........ 0.4 eee tee eee eens 8 - 30
Q-QUIT. 2. eee 8 - 31

MOS-D191 8-1
DEBUG

R-REGISTER ....... 2.00.6 pe eee eb wees 8 - 32

S-SEARCH .. 0... ce ee eee es 8-33
T-TRACE.. 2... ee et ees 8 - 35
U-UNASSEMBLE ..........0 0008 2 eeu 8 - 36
V-VERIFY 1.0.0.0. bee ee ees 1. 8-387
W-WRITE 2.2... ee ee ts 8 - 38
7-COPROCESSOR..... 0... 00 see enue-.... 8-40
\- SWAP SCREEN... . 0... ee ee ee 8-41
!1-SHELL ......... Le ew ee ee es 8 - 42
"PAUSE 2... te ee ee ees 8-43
:-DELAY 2... ee ee es 8-44
s*-REMARK ......-0. 06 eee ee eee eee eee 8-45
?-HELP. ww ee ee 8-46

Using .DEBUG Commands... 6... eee ee es 8-47

82 MOS-DLOL
Introduction

-DEBUGis an advanced tool that lets you examine the execution of a

program in memory.If you write new programs,or modify existing
programs, .DEBUGlets you examine values in memory asthepro-
gram executes, and search for any problemsor "bugs".

.DEBUGacts as a "window"into the contents of your computer’s

memory. It may also be used to create a controlled setting in which to
executé a program, and examinethe execution, one instruction at a
time.

For example, you may instruct .DEBUGto execute an assembled or

compiled program, and halt the execution at specific locations in the
program. Whenthe program halts, you are then switched to the
.DEBUGediting mode. The editing modelets you issue .DEBUG com-
mands to display the contents of memory, load information into
specific addresses and unassemble program instructions. There are
many commands in .DEBUGthatlet you edit a program. This gives
you the ability to make changes to a program, and thentest the
results before making the changes permanent.

For example, .DEBUGlets you unassembleinstructions at a specific

location. in a program to make changesor insert a patch. You may
then test the change without reassembling the entire program. This
gives you the ability to test your programs before the changes become
permanent.

MOS-D1L91 8-3
DEBUG

DEBUG Break Points

The locations where you may halt processing are called "break
points". These are instruction locations in the program. .DEBUGlets
you set both hard and soft break points. Hard break points are
retained in memory for the length of the .DEBUGsession or until
they are specifically cleared. Soft break points are executed only one
time during a specified command. You may set a maximum of 10
hard break points and 10 soft break points at any given time in a
.DEBUGsession.

When you run .DEBUG,you are actually executing two programs;

the program you are debugging, and the .DEBUGprogram itself.
Using the \ command (SWAP), you may swap the display between
the input/output of .DEBUGandthe application being .DEBUGged.

If you have the multi-user versions of MOS, you may invoke .DEBUG
at the main console to view the output of the program you are execut-
ing. At the same time, you may send the output of the program you
are debugging to a workstation’s terminal. See the CO commandin
.DEBUGfor information on how to set this up.

Entering .DEBUG Commands

.DEBUG commandsconsist of one or two characters, which may be

followed by operands. The commandentry itself is not case sensitive.
You may enter a .DEBUG commandat the prompt, whichis].
-DEBUGwill not act on it until you press ENTER.

Operands,as they are presented in the command form, may appear

inside braces { }. This means that they are optional. The following
terms are used for operands in presenting the .DDEBUG command
forms:

addr the full address including the segment andoffset or just

the offset portion of the address. If the segment is not
given, the following defaults will be used. All instructions
default to the CS register. All data defaults to the DS
register. BP and SP default to the SS register. ES must
be specified if it is to be used.

8-4 MOS-D19I
 All commandsthat use addr as an operandwill default to
the segment previously specified in the last .DEBUG com-
mand statement, if the segmentis not included as part of
the address.

begin the beginning address of a range of memory.

count the numberof logical disk sectors.

end the ending addressof a range of memory.

filename the nameofthefile, includingits extension.

hex4 a four-digit hexadecimal value.

length the size of the block of data in hexadecimal.

list a series of two-digit hexadecimal numbersor character

strings, or a combination of both.

A breakpoint, may be either hard or soft.

portaddr the hexadecimal address of an I/O port.

register the two-character nameof a valid wordregister.

secior a beginninglogical disk sector number.

string a group of characters or hexadecimal numbers.

data a character string or a byte string.

If you enter a commandform that is wrong, .DEBUG will prompt you

with:

MOS-DL9T 8-5
DEBUG

DEBUG

Used to invoke .DEBUG.

Type: Extrinsic.

Form: .DEBUG filename operands}

Operands:

filename if the file resides on a different drive and directory than

that which is current, you must include the drive and
directory as part of its name.

operands those operandsthat are required to run the program such

as drive specifications or data files which are required for
program execution.

Explanation:

You may automatically load a specific program into .DEBUGat the

CS8:100 address by including the program name with the .DDEBUG
command. For example:

DEBUG tesi.com

Note thatif this were an .EXE file, it would automatically be loaded

at the address specified in the headerofthefile.

You may load a program at.a specific address if you enter .DEBUG
without a file name, use the name command(N) to namethe input
file, and then use the load command(L) with a specific address at
which to load the named inputfile. If you do not specify an address
with the L command, .DEBUGloadsthe program at the default ad-
dress of CS:100. Files with an .EXE extension do not load at address
CS:100; they are loaded as specified in the headerofthefile.

Once a program is loaded in .DEBUG,there are many commands

that let you examine and edit execution of the program. The com-
mands in .DEBUGare explained on the following pages. The sample
.DEBUGsession presented after the commands may help you better
understand how to use .DEBUG.
A- ASSEMBLE

The A commandlets you create instructions in memory and assemble

them on the fly without having to reassemble your entire program.
Use A to create patchesorto test different values. Note that these
modifications will be retained in memory for the current .DEBUGses-
sion. If you want them to become a permanentpart of the program,
you must write the program to disk.

Form: A fader}

Operand:

addr specify the address at which you want to start assembling

instructions. Note that the address must be separated
from the commandby a delimiter such as a space or
comma.

Explanation:

If you enter A with no parameters, .DEBUGdefaults to the address of

the current CS:IP unless A has been used previously, then it will
start whereit last left off. You may then addinstructions. Each time
you press ENTER, the new instruction is accepted. Once .DEBUGas-
sembles an instruction into memory, it moves to the next position
where you may add instructions. Press ENTER again to escape from
"assemble" mode.

For example, to enter instructions type:

When you press ENTER, MOSwill display the current address:

MOS-D191 8-7
DEBUG

EF05 is the value of the CS register. CS may vary from session to ses-
sion, You may then enter the instruction:

EF05:0123 MOV AX, 0201

Press ENTER again and MOSdisplays the address for the next in-
struction in the program.

8-8 MOS-DL9L
 2
AU - ASSEMBLE - UNASSEMBLE

The AU commandlets you assemble an instruction into a program,

and immediately unassemble it. You may use this commandto clarify
instructions you’ve added.

Form: AU faddr}

Operand:

addr enter the address at. which you want to add and assemble
the instruction.

Explanation:

If you do not enter an address, .DEBUG defaults to the address at

which any previously entered commandsfinished executing. For ex-
ample, if you wanted to assemble instructions and unassembleat ad-
dress 123, you could enter:
oo

au 123

.DEBUGdisplays the value of the register and echoes the address.

For example:

You may then enter your instruction set, such as:

EFOS:128 MOV AX, 0201

When ENTER is pressed again, .DEBUG assemblesthe instruction

and then unassemblesit, echoing what you entered originally. As in:

MOS-D191 8-
DEBUG

BC - CLEAR BREAKPOINT

The BC commandlets you clear hard break points that have been set oo
previously with the breakpoint set (BS) command.

Form: BC n

Operand:

A enter the numberof the breakpoint. If you do not know

the numberof the break point you wantto clear, use the
BL commandto list the break points currently contained
in the break point: table. Break points are numbered from
0 to 9.

Explanation:

BCis used to clear only one break point at a time. You may only clear
the break point by its number, for example:

BC 1

DEBUGwill respond:

8-10 MOS-D19l
 BD- BREAKPOINTDISABLE
—
The BD commandlets you disable hard break points that were pre-
viously set during the current .DEBUG session. Use BD for continued
processing without hard break point interruptions.

Form: BD

Explanation:

BD lets you selectively disable hard break points without removing

them. When your program returns to processing, hard break points
are then ignored until the break point enable commandis en-
countered.

You may use the configuration command (C?) to determineif break

points are enabled or disabled. It displays:

MOS-D1L9L 8-11
DEBUG

BE - BREAKPOINT ENABLE

The BE commandlets you enable break points.

Form: BE

Explanation:

BElets you selectively turn back on previously disabled breakpoints.

Enter the BE commandat the point in the program at which you
want breakpoints to be recognized.

8-12 MOS-D19l
BL - BREAKPOINT LIST

The BL commandis used to list hard break points. Hard break points
are retained in memory for the length of the DEBUGsession.

Form: BL

Explanation:

Whenhard break points are created, they are assigned the next free
sequential number. You may have up to 10 hard break points, num-
bered 0 - 9, in one program. Use the BL commandto list the break
points that have been set. For example:

BL

If hard break points have been set, a display similar to the following
appears.
DEBUG

BS - BREAKPOINT SET

The BS commandlets you set up to 10 hard break points in a pro- oa

gram file. Break points default to being enabled, unless you invoke
the break point disable command (BD), which causes .DEBUGto ig-
nore them.

Form: BS faddr}

Operand:

addr enter the address at which you wantthefirst break point

to fall. The address could also be a two-character register
name.

Explanation:

-DEBUGpermits up to 10 hard break points in one program, num-

bered 0 - 9. They are maintainedin a breakpoint table for the current
-DEBUGsession. Break points are expressed as an address within a o™~
code segment. You mayspecify the full address, but if you only enter
the offset portion, .DEBUG will default to the code segment currently
addressed by the CSregister.

The break points are numbered consecutively as they are added.If

you remove several break points and add new break points, they will
be assigned the next available consecutive numbers. You may display
the break point table with the break point list (BL) command.

All of the following examples set break points:

BS 123:0191
BS CS:125
BS DS:DxX

When ENTER is pressed and the break point accepted, .DEBUGdis-

plays: =.
The C commandlets you compare the contents of two ranges of
memory. These ranges may overlap, ormay be entirely separate.

Form: G begin end adar

C begin L length adr

Operands:

begin enter the beginning addressof the first memory range.

end enter the ending addressof the first memory range.

ader enter the beginning address of the memory range you

want to compare. Note that both operands must be
separated from the command and from one another by a
space. Segment defaults to DS register.

lengih must be precededby L; enter the size of the range to com-

pare, in hexadecimal form.

Explanation:

The C commandperforms a byte-by-byte comparison.If the contents

of memory are identical, they are not displayed. However,if a dis-
crepancy is found, C displays the valuesthat are different. Look at
the example that follows:

G 100 L200 S85

DEBUGresponds with:

The hexadecimal value of the bytes is displayed after the first ad-
dress.

MOs-DI91 8-15
DEBUG

C? « DEBDG CONFIGURATION

The C? commanddisplays the current configuration of .DEBUG. This

display also appears automatically when .DEBUGis invoked. You
may use C? to view this display from any point in the .DEBUGses-
sion. The configuration display indicates the microprocessor on the
system, the math coprocessor, whetheror not hard breakpoints have
been disabled or enabled and the .DEBUGport address.

Form: CG?

Explanation:

You may use the C? command during a .DEBUGsession to tell you if

break points have been enabled. When C? is invoked, MOS displays:

8-16 MOS-D191
CO - CHANGE CONSOLE

The CO commandlets you use a terminal for .DEBUG’s input/output

from the main console. However, you mustfirst set up the com-
munications port by defining a DEVICE=$SERIAL.SYS command
statement in the CONFIG.SYSfile. You must theninitialize the port
for use with the .MOS SERINIT command. You may then debug a
program on the main console, and view any output that the program
writes to the video display screen on the terminal.

Form: CO port

Operand:

port enter the port number.

Explanation:

You may find CO more useful than the swap command(\) because
you can actually debug the program and simultaneouslysee its out-
put.

MOS-DI91 8-17
DEBUG

D- DUMP

The D commandlets you "dump"the contents of a specific range of

memory, and display it on the screen, 16 bytes to line.

Form: D {begin} fend}

D begin L length

Operand:

begin enter the beginning addressof the range you want to

dump.

end enter the ending addressof the range.If not entered,

.DEBUG defaults to 128 bytes, or about eight lines.

length must be preceded by L; enter the size of the range to

dump, in hexadecimal form.

Explanation:

When a range of memory is displayed on the screen it appears in the

following form:

The first positions contain the address. The positions that follow con-
tain the offset. Note the column to the right. It contains the ASCII
characters for the hexadecimal codes that are displayed. Non-ASCII
characters are displayed as periods.

If you do not specify a range for the dump, .DEBUGwill default to

the current memory address and display its contents in eight para-
graphs,totalling 128 bytes.

8-18 MOS-DiO1
 ENTER
The E commandhas twoformsthat let you changethe contents of
memory. One form will let you enter information directly into
memory. The other form displays what is already in memory so you
can choose whetheror not to changeit.

Form: E faddr}

E {addr} {list}

Operands:

addr enter the address which contains the information you

want to change.

list enter the two-digit hexadecimal value you want to change.

Explanation: |

You may change the contents of an address by entering:

mm gee
Ee 400 x

Press ENTER and .DEBUGwill display the first byte found at that ad-
dress.

If you press the space bar, .DEBUGwill display the next byte posi-
tion. If you enter a new value, .DEBUGwill replace the existing
i value. Whenan eight-byte boundary is reached, a newlinewill begin.
You may press ENTER to end E at anytime. For example, if you
entered:

Nad bes

8-19
DEBUG

.DEBUGwould display:

8 « 20 MOS-DILOL
 P- FOLL
oo,
The F commandautomatically fills a range of memory with bytes of
data.

Form: F begin end data

F begin L length data

Operands:

begin enter the beginning addressof the range you wantto fill
with data.

end enter the ending address.

length must be precededby L; enter the length of the range you

wanttofill, in hexadecimal form.

data enter the data with which you wantto fill the range. Data
maybe a text string or a byte list.

Explanation:

The F commandwill automatically fill a specified range of memory

with one single commandentry. For example, if you wanted to fill the
address range from 400 to 430 with a text string, you could enter:

F 400 4380 "data"

Press ENTER. When the .DEBUG prompt returns, the range has
beenfilled with data. You may view thisfill with the dump command
(D) by entering:

D 400 4380

MOS-DIS1 8-21
DEBUG

.DEBUGdisplays:

Had you wanted to enter the range with a byte string, you could have
typed:

F 400 430 G0 02 07
G-GO

Each G commandlets you set a soft break point or a series of break

points. You may set more than one breakpoint on the same command
line, up to a maximum of 10. However, the break points will execute
one at a time. Soft break points are not retained in memory and disap-
pear after processing.

Form: & {=addr} jada}...

Operand:

=addr enter the address at which you want execution to begin.

adeir any subsequent addresses entered becomesoft break-

points.

Explanation:

If you type G, with no address, execution will begin at the current

CS:IP and continue through the endof the program. You may set
more than one soft breakpoint on the same commandline by entering:

G=123 126

.DEBUGwill begin execution at CS:0123, then stop and execute it

again until the 126 address is encountered. Although you may enter
more than one soft breakpoint on a line, they will only be executed
one at a time.

MOSs-D191 8-23
DEBUG

H-HEX

The H commandlets you add and subtract hexadecimal values. You

may want to use this commandto gauge how far awayonelocation is
from another.

Form: —H hex4 hex4

Operands:

hex4 enter the four-digit hexadecimal value you want to add to

or subtract from.

hex4 enter the four-digit hexadecimal value that is to be added

or subtracted.

Explanation:

The H commandis useful for calculating addresses. Say, for example,

you know the beginning addressof a table in a program and how long
the table is. You could then use H to calculate the ending address by
addingthe length of the table to the beginning address. So you would
enter:

H 29CE 300

MOSwoulddisplay:

The first value is the result of adding the length of the table to the
beginning address. The second valueis the result of subtracting the
length of the table from the beginning address.

8-24 MOS-DLOL
1-INPOT

The I commandretrieves and displays the one-byte value from the

specified port.

Form: | addr

Operand:

addr enter the address of the port.

Explanation:

You may find the I commandusefulin testing input from ports. For
example, if you wantedto read the value in COM1,you could enter:

| O3F8

Theport address of COM1is 03F8. .DEBUGwill then display, the

hexadecimal value from the port.

MOS-DLSL 8- 25
DEBUG

L- LOAD

The L command loads a program into memory. You mayalso use L to

load the contents of a disk sector or a specific record in file.

Form: L fader] {drive sector count}

Operands:

addr enter the address at which you want to load the program
or record.

drive used in loadinglogical disk sectors. Enter the value for

the drive; 0 for A:, 1 for B:, etc.

sector enter the starting logical disk sector number. The number
may range from 0 to FFFFFF.If the numberis larger
than FFFF,it must be entered as a double word quantity
with a colon separating the high and low words.

count enter the numberoflogical disk sectors you want to load.

Can’t be larger than 80 Hex.

Explanation:

You may use L to load a program into .DEBUG after naming the
inputfile with the name (N) command. You mayalso reload a pro-
gram that has completed execution and was previously loaded for a
-DEBUGsession.

You may also use L to load a logical disk sector, such as the boot sec-
tor on a disk. For example:

L100 00 1

This commandentry loads the boot sector from the disk in drive A.If
you don’t specify a segment address, .DEBUG defaults to CS:100. You
may display this sector with the dump (D) command.

To load a sector numberlarger than FFFF, say 123456 (Hex), you

would enter:

L100 2 12:3456 4

8-26 MOS-DL8l
ao
The M command movesa string of bytes in memory.

Form: M begin end addr

M begin L. length addr

Operands:

begin enter the beginning address of the range of values in

memory you want to move.

end enter the ending address of the memory range.

addr the starting address of the destination to which you want

to movethe values.

length precededby L; enter the length of the range you want to

move, in hexadecimal form.

Explanation:

You may move values from a specific range of memory into a new
range of memory. For example:

M 700 200 400

In this example, the contents of the range from 100 to 200 are moved
to the 400 address. You could then use the dump (D) commandto dis-
play the contents of the new address.
DEBUG

N+ NAME

The N commandlets you specify the filename of the program you

want to .DEBUG. You mayincludean optional second filenameto be
passed to the program being debugged.

Form: N filename {filename}

Operands:

filename enter the nameofthe inputfile to be loaded into memory

for a DEBUGsession. N can also be used to change the
nameof the outputfile during a debug session.

filename enter the nameofthe file on which the executablefile

(the program being debugged) is to perform.

Explanation:

When invoking .DEBUG, you may use N to namethefile to debug,

and thefiles to be executed as operands of the program to .DEBUG.
For example:

N TEST.COM DATATEST.DAT

In this example TEST.COMis the program to be debugged.

DATATEST.DATis thefile to be used by the executablefile
TEST.COMwhile it is being debugged.

Although you may use N to name an output program file, nothing will
be written to it unless you use the write command(W).

8-28 MOS-DU91
 O- Eu

oo
The O commandis used to send a value to an I/O port.

Form: ©

Operand:

addr enter the address of the port to which you want to send a
value.

Explanation:

The O command will send specified data to a port. For example, you
maytype:

When ENTERis pressed, .DEBUGreturnsto the prompt.

DEBUG

P-PROCEED

The P commandexecutes the program until the next instruction or a

hard breakpoint is encountered. This lets you "skip" over calls, inter-
rupts, repeated strings or string moves.

Form: P f#addr} nnnn

Operands:

sador enter the first address at which you want to start execut-
ing the program. The program will execute the instruc-
tion found at that address and then stop.

nnan enter the numberof times the proceed will occur, in

hexadecimal form.

Explanation:

You mayuseP to execute a program to a specific point. For example:

P 128

8-30 MOS8-DL91
 @- QUIT

a, The Q command maybe invokedat any point to exit the .DEBUG ses-
sion. Changes madeto the program being debugged will NOT be
saved to disk unless they are written back to the inputfile with the
write command (W).

Form: Q

Explanation:

Use Q to end a DEBUGsession at any point.

a,

MOS-D191 8-31
DEBUG

R- REGISTER

The R commanddisplays the contents of a register.

Form: F fregister}

RF

Operands:

fregister} enter the nameof the register whose contents you want to
display.

F displays the flags register. Mnemonics are:

O - overflow
D - direction flag
I - interrupt enabled
S - sign
Z - zero
A - auxiliary carry
P - parity
C - carry

Explanation:

Flags are either on or off. When F is invoked, a display similar to the

following appears:

In this example, no flags are set. An entry of 0 in the column under

the single-character flag mnemonic turnstheflag off. An entry of 1
turns the flag on.

Pressing ENTERwill set the flags as you've specified.

8-32 MOS-DILO1
 S - SEARCH
The S commandlets you search a range of memory for specific bytes
of data or a specific string of text.

Form: S fbegin] fend) ‘data’

S addr 1 length

Operands:

begin enter the beginning addressof the range of memory to be

searched.

end enter the ending range of memory.

‘data’ enter the data or text string for which you want to search.
Text strings should be enclosed in single quotes.

adar enter the beginning address of the range of memory to be

searched.

length must be preceded by L; enter the size of the range to

search, in hexadecimal form.

Explanation:

You may enter a range of memory to be searchedfor a specific string.

If you only enter a beginning address at which the searchis to start,
.DEBUGwill search through the endofthefile. When the string has
been found, .DEBUGwill display its position. For example if you
entered:

pam,

MOS-DLOL 8-
oe
oe
DEBUG

.DEBUGwoulddisplay:

These are the two positions that are occupied by the string, ’COM’.
Had you wanted to search for a non-text string, such as a byte list,
you could have entered:

S300 500 64 TE 92

&- 34 MOS-DLOL
T ~ TRACE

The T command executes the specified numberof instructions, with a

display of each, and then stops.If the instruction set includesa call,
it will jump to that call. Break points are ignored.

Form: T f=adar} annn

Operands:

=addr enter the starting address at which you want the program
to execute.

nnn enter the numberof instructions to be executed, in

hexadecimal form.

Explanation:

Whenyou enter a T commandsuchas:

T 102

.DEBUGwill execute 258 instructions and then stop.

MOSs-D191 8-35
U- UNASSEMBLE

The U commandlets you unassemble instructions in memory.

Form: U {begin} fend}

Operand:

{begin} enter the beginning addressof the range of the instruc-

tion set you want to unassemble.

fend} enter the ending address. If no ending address is entered,

.DEBUGdefaults to 32 bytes.

lengih mustbe precededbyL; enter the size of the range to unas-

semble, in hexadecimal form.

Explanation:

WhenU is invoked for a specific address, MOS unassembles the code

and displays any ASCII characters associated with it. For example:
The V commandlets you verify that a character string or a byte
string occupies a specific address. This commandis used with patch
files to verify data before allowing the patch to occur.

Form: Va

Operands:

enter the address of the data you wantto verify.

data enter the data you wantto verify.

Explanation:

If the specified data is not found at the address,.DEBUGreturns an

ERRORLEVEL1, indicating that the verification was unsuccessful.
For example, a patch file may contain the following commandstate-
ments:

The V commandstatementverifies that 1.00 is at address :1250. If

the data is found, a new string, OD 14 15, is entered with the E com-
mand. Thefile is then written back to disk.

If the verification is unsuccessful, returning an ERRORLEVEL1,

.DEBUGwill automatically exit the patch, just as if a Q@ command
was encountered.

8- OF
DEBUG

W- WRITE

The W command maybe invoked at any point during the .DEBUG oom,

session. It is used to write any changes you’ve made backto the input
file. You may also use W to changethe contents of a disk sector or
specific record in file.

Form: W faddr} {orive sector count]

Operands:

addr enter the address in memory from which you want to

write the outputfile.

arive used in loading logical disk sectors. Enter the value for
the drive; 0 for A:, 1 for B:, ete.

sector enter the starting logical disk sector number. The number
may rangefrom 0 to FFFFFF.If the numberis larger
than FFFF,enter it as a double word quantity with a
colon separating the high and low words.

court enter the numberoflogical disk sectors to load. Can’t be

larger than 80 Hex.

Explanation:

W lets you write any changes made during the .DEBUGsession to

the output file. When W is invoked, .DEBUGdisplays:

8-38 MOS-DIS1
Whena file has completed execution, DEBUG assumes the outputfile
is the original inputfile. Unless its name has been changed, or a new
file specified with the name (N) command, .DEBUGwill overwrite its
contents with the W command. When W is invoked, .DEBUGreads
the CX register for the length of the file and uses that value to write
thefile to disk.

For example, to change the contents of a boot sector of a disk (sector

0), you would enter:

w ico 001

To write to sector number 123456 (Hex), you would enter:

W 100 2 12:3456 4

MOS-D191 8-39
DEBUG

7 - COPROCESSOR

You may invoke the 7 command from anypoint in a .DEBUGsession

to display the contents of the registers of a math coprocessor you may
have on your system.

Form: ?

Explanation:

When 7 is invoked MOSdisplays an eight-register display if a math

coprocessoris found on the system. The display is similar to the fol-
lowing:

This commandis useful because it allows you to view the registers of

the math coprocessor during execution of a program.

8-40
 You may use the \ commandto switch to the screen output of a pro-
gram as it executes under .DEBUG.The \ commandis only recog-
nized whenissued from the .DEBUGconsole,it is not valid when
invokedat a workstation.

Form: \

Explanation:

Whena program writes output to the screen, you may use the \ com-
mand to view that output from within .DEBUG. Pressing ENTER
from the screen containing the output returns you to .DEBUG.For ex-
ample, if your program wrote output to the screen you could enter:
5
4
5

Which would display:

The screen output will appear just as it does during a normal execu-
tion of the program. Pressing ENTER will then return you to .DEBUG.

oom
DEBUG

!- SHELL

You may invoke an additional MOSshell during a .DEBUGsession

by entering the ! command and pressing ENTER.

Form: |

Explanation:

The ! commandlets you invoke another copy of the CommandProces-

sor if the program you are .DEBUGginghasfinished execution,or if
no program is currently loaded in .DEBUG. You mayreturn to
.DEBUGbyentering .EXIT.

8-42 MOS-DL9SL
". PAUSE FOR A KEY

The " commandis used in patch or program modification files to in-

sert a pauseinto thefile whenit is invoked.It will halt processing
until a key is pressed.

Form: " {text}

Operand:

{text} the " command may befollowed by a messageto be dis-

played whenthepatchfile is invoked.

Explanation:

You may use the " commandto create a pause in the processing of a
patch file and display a message.

MOS-DLOL 8-43
DEBUG

3+ DELAY

The : commandis used in patchfiles to halt processing for half a

second before executing the next linein the file.

Form:

Explanation:

The : commandwill halt processing for half a second. You may want
to use it-to let the user of a patch file view any output from process-
ing.
 ; *» REMARK
oe
Either an * or ; may be used to indicate remarksin patchfiles.

Form: ; ftexé)

* {text}

Operand:

text enter any text as a messagein thefile.

Explanation:

Useof the * or ; prevents .DEBUGfrom trying to interpret the text in

a patch file as an instruction set and execute it.

MOS-DI91 B45
DEBUG

? BOELP

The ? commandinvokes the .DEBUG HELP screen from any point

during a .DEBUGsession.

Form: ?

Explanation:

Use ? to view the following screen:

8-46 MOS-DI191
Using the .DEBOGcommands

You mayfind that one of the most common uses you'll have for
.DEBUGis to make modifications to existing programs. Review the
sample session that follows. It creates a small program that will
write characters to the screen using BIOS interrupt 10h. For more in-
formation about the interrupts on your computer,refer to its techni-
cal documentation.

This sample session is presented to help you familiarize yourself with

.DEBUGandwith its commands. Each of these commandsis ex-
plained in greater detail earlier in this chapter.

Invoke .DEBUGbytyping:

.DEBUG

The screen will clear and display the following:

MOS-D191 83-47
DEBUG

Note the information that is presented in this display. The two-char-

acter namesof the registers appear across the screen, followed by the
single-character flag mnemonics.

The .DEBUG prompt (]) appears on the bottom mostline. This

promptwill be used throughout this sample .DEBUGsessionto give
you a point of reference. It is not used elsewhere in this chapter.

Type the following instructions. If you choose, you may include the
comments.

iA 100
2183:0100 MOV AH,OE ;Use Function OE
2183:0102 MOV AL,4D ;Write Character 4DH ’M’
2783:0104 MOV BH,O ;Set Screen Page to 0
2183:0106 INT 10 ‘issue BIOS interrupt 10
2183:0108 MOV AH,GE
Z21iB3:010A MOV AL,4r ‘Write Character 4FH O°
2183:010C MOV BH,O
2183:010E INT 10
2183:0110 MOV AH,OE
2183:0112 MOV AL4E )Write. Character 4EH ’N’
2183:0114 MOV BH,0
21830116 INT 10
2183:0118 INT 20 ‘Terminate program
2183:071A ;Press return to stop assembling

Note that the Assembly languageinstructions appear in the positions

after the address. The segment value is dependent on your system en-
vironment and maynot be the same as that shown in the example.

You may theninsert comments,be certain to mark them with the

remark command,(;). This program will use the MOS BIOSinterrupt
10 to write the characters "MON"to the video display screen.

8-48 MOS-D191
Look at the ending address of the program you've written --
2183:011A. You must nowset the size of the program in the CX
register. This tells .DEBUGhow big thefile is and where it ends. Set
the size to 1A bytes, which is the difference between the beginningad-
dress and the ending address, by typing the following:

{ROX
Cx 0000
A

You must now assign a nameto the program with the name (N) com-
mand,if you want to saveit.

IN TEST.COM

You may nowwrite the program to disk with the write (W) command.
This stores the program for future use.

]W
WAS

Writing GO00001 AH bytes of program TEST.COM

Now execute the program with the go (G) command.

lg
Program Completed Execution

To see the output of the program, type the swap (\) command.

MOS-DI91 8-49
DEBUG

The screen should now show the output that the program writes to
the video display screen.

To return to .DEBUG, press RETURN.

Now, set hard break points to examine how the program executes.

]BS. CS:0108
Breakpoint 0 set to 2183:0106
1BS CS:0110
Breakpoint 1 set to 2183:0110
IBS CS:0118
Breakpoint 2 set to 2183:0118

Now, run the program again.

Ig=100
As the program reaches each breakpoint, processing will stop and
.DEBUGwill display the registers.

8-50 MOS-D191
Now enter a swap (\) commandto view the results, swapping the
screen to see the output being written to the video display screen.

h
The screen should display the following:

To continue running the program,type the go command(G).

Ig
This process will be repeated at each break point.

Now, exit .DEBUG.

lq
To see the results of your .DEBUGsession, type TEST at the MOS
prompt.

[C\ITEST
MON
ICy
To change the message printed by TEST.COM,restart .DEBUG.

[C:\|.DEBUG TEST.COM

MOS-DL81 &« 51
DEBUG

Now, unassemble the program to ensure thatit is correct.

ju 100 178
2183:0100 B40E MOV AH,OE
2183:0102 BO4D MOV AL4D
2183:0104 B700 MOV BH,00
2183:0106 CD10 INT 10
2183:0108 B40E MOV AH,OE
2183:010A BO4F MOV AL4F
2183:010C B700 MOV BH,OD
2183:010E CD10 INT 10
2183:0110 B40E MOV AH,OE
2183:0112 BO4E MOV AL,4E
2183:0114 B700 MOV BH,00
2183:0116 CD10 INT 10
2183:0118 CD20 INT 20
At the .DEBUG prompttypein the following:

je 113

-DEBUGwill respond with the current value at that location. In this

example, the value is 4Eh, N. You will change ’N’ to an ’S’ by entering
538, the hexadecimal value for ’S’.

je 113
218A:0113 4E.53
Now save the modified program. Note that the program does not need
to be named,since it was loaded into memory when .DEBUG was
started.

iw
Writing 0000007 AH bytes of program TEST.COM
Now runthe program to see the results of the modification.

Ig
Program Completed Execution
h
MOS

Now exit from .DEBUG.

Iq
Sometimes patches or modifications for programs are presented as
text files, often with the extension .PAT. In order to demonstrate this,
a patch file for TEST.COM will be created. It contains the keystrokes
to invoke the .DEBUG commands to makethe changesto thefile.

[(C\ICOPY CON TEST.PAT

‘THIS PATCH FILE CHANGES TEST.COM TO ORIGINAL VALUES
E713 4E

“Press any key to return to system

Q

Press CTRL-Z to end thefile. Now apply the patchfile to TEST.COM

by entering:

IC\IDEBUG TEST.COM<TEST.PAT

The program will run automatically, taking its input from the
TEST.PATfile. It will pause and wait for a key stroke when the " com-
mand is encountered. Now run TEST.COM.

(OVTEST
VION

MOS-DI9L SB» Ba
Your display should be similar to the following:

eo

MOS-Di 91
Introduction . 0... ee ee ee es 9-2

How Security Works 2... 0. eee ee ee es 9-2

Initiating User Security 2... ee te et te ee 9-3

Entering User Security Records .,.....-+6...20005 9-4

Security Commands 0.0... be ee eee ee es 9-6

CLASS 2. ee es 9-7
SIGNOFF . 0. ee ee 9-9
SSIGNON 2... ee ee 9-10

Assigning Security to YourlTtems ............4. 9-11

Partition Level Security . 2... 0... eee ee ee ee 9-12

Directory Level Security ... 0... 0. ce eee eee 9-15
File Level Security 2... 0. ee ee ee ee ee ee 9-17
MOSFile Level Security and VERIFY Command..... 9-18

Precautions for Security Users ....... rn 9-19

Advanced Security . 0... ce et ee eee ee 9-19

The MOS Encryption Key ........000 0 eae 9 - 20

The Master Password Encryption Key. .......... 9-20
Changing the Master Password ...........6..4- 9 - 22

MOSs-D191 9-1
Security

Introduction

MOSprovides a method for securingthefiles, directories and parti-

tions on your computer. When you receive MOS,security is not ac-
tive. If you want to use security, it must be set up for your specific
needs. For security to be effective, only the system administrator
should set up and maintain security.

MOSsecurity is very flexible, and can be very powerful. You mayfind

that security causes some undesiredeffects if you don’t understand
how it works. Before you begin setting up security, be sure you under-
stand how accessto files, directories and partitions will be handled.
You may want to experiment with security before you set it up for ac-
tual use on your computer.

It’s a good idea to read through this entire chapter before you begin
setting up security. Security can be set up or changedat anytime.If
you don’t think you will need security, then don’t set it up on your
computer.

HowSecurity Works

You can implement security for all items on your computer, and for
all users. If there are only a few directories or files that need to be
secured, you can implement security for only those items. You may
also implement security only for a few users who need access to the
secured items.

Security is based on 26 security classes that correspond to the letters

of the alphabet, A to Z. You may define these classes to be anything
you want to use for your computer. A blank or spaceis also a valid
security class to designate that the item is not secured.

You mustfirst define how many classes you want to use, and what
each class will represent. One class may then be assigned to eachfile,
directory and partition you create. You must assign a blank or space
class to any items you do not want to secure.

9.8 MOS-DIS1
 A user security file $$USER.SYSis set up to control who can access
secured items, and the level of access each user has to each class.
oo
This file contains a unique record for every user, or only for the users
who need access to secured items. In each user record, you may as-
sign oneof four levels of access to each class; no access (0), execute
only (1), read and execute only (2), or unrestricted access (8).

Whenyoufirst boot MOS, any user mayaccessanyfile, directory or

partition that is not secured. These unsecured items have a blank
class. All secured items are invisible to the unauthorized userasif
they did not exist. Such a user cannot see or access any secured items.

In order for a user to access a secured item, the user must invoke a
.<SIGNON command,and enter a valid user ID and password that ex-
ists in the user security file. After signing on, the useris further
restricted from accessingfiles, directories and partitions based on the
access level the user hasto the class assigned to the secured items.

Theaccess levels for secured items are handled differently at the par-
tition, directory andfile level. These differences are explainedlater in
this chapter. First you need to understand how the user security file
is set up, and how the MOSsecurity commandsare used.

If you already havepartitions, directories or files on your computer,

the .CLASS commandis available to assign or change the class of an
existing partition or directory. You may use the .COPY command
with the /c operand to assign or change theclass of an existingfile.

Initiating User Security

User security is set up and maintainedin a file named $$USER.SYS.

MOSlooksfor this file at the root directory when user security is ac-
tive. You may place the $$USER.SYSfile in a different directory if
you include the .USERFILE commandin the CONFIG.SYSfile so
that MOSwill know whereto findthefile.
a
It is a good idea to set up a record for the system administrator with
unrestricted access to all security classes. This will give the system
administrator complete control of all secured items.

MOS-DLOL ed
Security

You may also wantto reserve one security class exclusively for the
system administrator. Assign all other users the "no access" level to
that class. When the $$USER.SYSfile is complete, assign it a oo
reserved class with the .COPY command. The .COPY commandis ex-
plained in the General Commandschapterof this manual. This will
restrict any other users from being able to read or changethe infor-
mation in the $$USER.SYSfile.

You may use the MOS Editorto create the $$USER.SYSfile and
enter the user records. The Editor is explained in a separate chapter
of this manual.

Entering User Security Records

To simplify setting up user records, enter the following commentline

as thefirst line in the file. You will use this line as a format for enter-
ing user records. The asterisk in the first position of the line marksit
as a commentline.
on",

* TD, PASSWD, ABCDEFPGHTIUKLMNOPORSTUVWAYS, &

Each subsequentline in thefile is a user record. You may want to use

the secondline of the file for the system administrator’s record. As
many user records may then be enteredin thefile as necessary. The
following is the information to enter for each record.

* TD the user ID maybe up to four alphanumeric characters (A

to Z and 0 to 9), and must be followed by a comma as a
delimiter. The user ID is not case sensitive during sign on
and may contain any combination of upper and lower case
characters. The user ID must be unique for each record
you set up. You may wantto assign a user’s nameorini-
tials as the user ID. For example:

on,

9-4 MOS-D191
 If the user ID is less than four characters, you may enter
spaces. MOSwill ignore spaces entered at the beginning
ooo
or end of the user ID. The commadelimiter may be placed
immediately following the user ID, or maybe aligned
with the commain the formatline. For example:

* ID,
DAVE,
BOB ,

PASSWD the user password may be up to six alphanumeric charac-

ters (A to Z and 0 to 9), and mustbe followed by a comma
as a delimiter. The user password mayalso be entered in
either upper or lower case characters as it is not case sen-
sitive during sign on. The password should be unique for
each user. For example:

* ID,PASSWD,
DAVE, SYSADM,

If the user password is less than six characters, you may

enter spaces. MOSwill ignore spaces entered at the begin-
ning or end of the password. The commadelimiter may be
placed immediately following the password, or aligned
with the commain the format line. For example:

* ID, PASSWD,
DAVE, SYSADM,
BOB ,ADM,

ABCDEFPGHTURLMNOPORSTUVWAYZ

The next 26 positions correspond to the 26 security clas-

ae,
ses. Each user may haveonly oneaccesslevel assigned to
each class. A commadelimiter mustfollow the 26 posi-
tions. Enter one of the following access level codes in
place of the position for each class:

MOS-DI191 9-
ot
 0 No access
1 Execute only
2 Read and execute only
3 Unrestricted access

For example:

* ID, PASSWD, ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ,

DAVE, SYSADM, 33333333333333333333333333,
BOB ,ADM, 01122333333000000000000000,

Although a user may access several classes, any newfiles

’

or directories the user creates can only be assigned one

class. "c" is the default output class assigned when the
user creates files and directories. It follows the 26 classes,
and maybe enter in upperor lowercase. In this example
Dave’s default output class is A and Bob’s is F:

* ID, PASSWD , ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ,C

DAVE, SYSADM, 33333333333333333333333333,A
BOB ,ADM, 01131133333000000000000000,F

If the default class is left blank, any files or directories the user
creates will have a blank or space class. A space class designates no
security and the item can subsequently be accessed by anyone. Con-
tinue adding user records until the user security file is complete.
Rememberto assign a security class to this file to keep other users
from reading or changing any information in thefile.

MOScontains three commands that are used when user security is

active. The .CLASS commandlets you assign or changetheclass of
existing directories and partitions. The .CLASSalso lets you change
the default output class for a user. The SSIGNON and .SIGNOFF com-
mands let you sign on andoff of a secured system. The following
pages explain these commandsin detail. Note that the .COPY com-
mand may be used to changetheclassofa file, and is explained in
the General Commandchapterof this manual.

9-6 MOS-DI91
.CLASS lets you assign or changethe security class of a directory.
You may also use .CLASSto display the current partition class and
user default output class. You may only changethepartition class
and user default output class of the partition you are currently access-
ing. You must use the .COPY commandto assign or change the
security classofa file.

Type: Extrinsic.

Form: CLASS dirname e¢

CLASS pd

Operands:

dirname enter the name of the directory whoseclass you want to

assign or change.

e enter the letter of the new class you want to assign, in

either upper or lowercase.

pd enter the letters of the security class to assign to the cur-

rent partition (p) and the current user’s default output
class (d) in either upper or lower case characters. You
may enter an asterisk (*) in either or both positions to dis-
play the current partition class and/or default output
class. The partition class is originally assigned in the .AD-
DTASK command. The default output class is originally
assigned as the default class of the user who signed on in
the partition.

Explanation:

You may use .CLASS to assign or changethe class of a directory,

even if you do not have accessto that class. However, once you assign
a class other than one to which you haveaccess, you cannot access
the directory. The following commandwill change the current class of
the MYDIRdirectory to class B:

MOS-DLSE 9-7
Security

CLASS MYDIR B

You may only changetheclassof the partition you are currently ac-
cessing. You may also changethe default output class for the current
user whosigned onin the partition you are accessing. To display the
current class assignments, you may enter asterisks for these two
operands in the CLASS command.For example:

CLASS **

Thefirst asterisk represent the partition class and the second

asterisk represents the user default class. This commanddisplays a
message similar to the following:

To changeeitherclass, type the new class to assign in place of the

asterisk. For example, the following commandchangesthe default
user class for this partition to Z.

CLASS *z

You may change only the partition class, or you may changebothclas-
ses at the same time. Simply enter .CLASSfollowed by the new clas-
ses you wantto assign as the partition class and the user default
output class. For example:

CLASS ab

You may delete one or both security classes by entering the underline
character (_) in place of the correspondingasterisk for that operand.
For example the following commanddeletes both the partition
security class and the user default output class:

GLASS _

9-8 MOS-D19L
 SIGNOFF
a

SIGNOFFlets you exit from the secured mode andreturn to the sys-
tem prompt. If you are sharing a workstation with other users, you
should always sign off before allowing anyone to use the workstation.
If you don’t, the new userwill be able to accessall of your secured
files, directories and partitions.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: SIGNOFF

Explanation:

Entering .SIGNOFFcausesthe current user to exit the secured mode

and return to the system prompt in an unsecured mode.A sign off
message appearssimilar to the following:

Once you havesigned off, you maystill use MOS, but you may only
accessa file, directory or partition that has a blank class.

Because the keyboard buffer retains key strokes, MOS will clear the
buffer when you invoke the SIGNOFF command.This will prevent
any other users from recalling your key strokes and viewing them on
the screen.

on

MOS-DLOL 9-9
Security

SIGNON

Before you can access any secured items, you must enter the
-SIGNON commandat the system promptto activate security for
your partition. This will display the MOSsign on screen where you
may enter your user ID and password.

Type: Intrinsic.

Form: SIGNON fuser ID}

Operands:

user ID optionally, you may enter your user ID as part of the

.«SIGNON command.

Explanation:

If you entered your user ID with the .SSIGNON command,it appears

on the sign on screen as shown in the following example:

You will only have to enter your password to complete the sign on. To
keep your password confidential, it will not appear on the screen as
you enter it on the keyboard. MOSchecks the $$USER.SYSfile to be
sure that the user ID and passwordare correct.

Whensign on is successful, a screen similar to the following appears:

9-10 MOS-D191
If the sign on is not successful, MOS will prompt "Try again." This
will appear if either the user ID or password isincorrect.If the sign
on has not been successful after a random numberof attempts (be-
tween three and seven), MOSwill "lock" the workstation and display
the following message:

The workstation will remain in a "locked" state for a random length

of time (between four and 15 minutes). When the workstationis
freed, you may then attempt the sign on again.

Assigning Security to Your Items

There are several ways that you may assign security to a partition,
directory or file. A security class may be assigned to a partition as
part of the .ADDTASK command.Files and directories may be as-
signed a user’s default class at the time a user creates them.If
security is active when a .DISKID commandis invoked, the nameas-
signedto the disk is also assigned a security class.

If an existing file does not have security, its class assignment is

blank. You mayassign a security class to the file with the .COPY com-
mand, You mayalso use the .COPY command to change the current
security class of a file. See .COPY commandfordetails.

The .CLASS commandlets you assign or change the security class of

an existing directory. The .CLASS commandalsolets you assign or
change the security class of the partition that you are currently work-
ing in and the default outputclass of the current user.

Once usersecurity is initiated, it is important to understand how

security works at the partition level, directory level andfile level. Be
sure you understandthe following example and explanations before
you set up security for your computer.

MOS-D191 9-11
Security

Partition Level Security

If your system does not have security, any user may access anyparti- oo,

tion from any workstation. When a user is working in an unsecured

partition, any other user may access the samepartition with the par-
tition access keys at another workstation. Both users are sharing the
sameresources.

If security is active, and a partition has been assigned a security class

as part of the .ADDTASK command,a user mustfirst sign on in
order to access the partition. The user may then access only the parti-
tions that have a class that the user is allowed to access. If a user at-
tempts to access a partition that has a class the user is not allowed to
access, the partition access keys will appear not to work:

0 - no access to the partition. If the user has an access level of 0

to the class assigned to a partition, the user cannot access the
partition. A user may changethe class from within a parti-
tion to a class set up for the user with an accesslevel of 0.

The user may stay in the partition, but cannot read or write
information. The only thing the user can do is use theparti-
tion access keys to move outof the partition. Once out of the
partition, the user will not be able to access the partition
again.

1- execute only. The user can access the partition, but cannot
type information. The user may changethe class from within
a partition to a class set up for the user with an access level of
1. The user may then only usethe partition access keys to
movein and out of that partition.

2- read and execute only. Same as accesslevel 1.

3- unrestricted access. The user may access the partition, and

may read or change any information to which the user has ac-
cess.

O- 12 MOS-DIOL
If a user is working in a secured partition that has a class other users
can access, another user may moveinto the partition. Both users are
sharing the resources. The user who movedinto the partition can
nowaccessall the files and directories that are accessible to the user
whosigned on in the partition. The second user’s original sign on is
not effective while he is in this new partition.

You may want to keep users from accessing other users’ partitions.
You could set up all partitions with a blank class. Each time you boot
MOS,all partitions are available to all users. Each user may access a
partition in which they will be working. Once in the partition, a user
may use the .CLASS commandand changetheclassof the partition
to a class that only that user may access. That user may accessor cre-
ate additional partitions if multi-tasking capability is necessary.

You mayalso control partition access by setting up dedicated worksta-

tions for each user. For example, you may want to secure only one or
two workstations where accounting functions are run. You mustfirst
set up a security class with unrestricted access for each user who will
run in the secured mode. Make sure that no other user may access
that class.

Then define a partition for each secured user with the .ADDTASK
command in the AUTOEXEC.BATfile. In this example, the user,
Sara, has a security record that defines unrestricted access to class A.
All other users are assigned noaccessto class A, or are not set up to
run in the secured mode. The .ADDTASK commandthatcreates the
partition to run at Sara’s workstation is set up in the
AUTOEXEC.BATfile as follows:

ADDTASK 7128,2,A,SARA,PCTERM,1,19200

This partition is set up to use 128 bytes of memory,is assigned task

number 2, security class A, and a startup file named SARA.BAT.This
partition will run on a PC type terminal, connected to port 1, ata
baud rate of 19200.

MOS-D19L 9-13
Security

You must include the .SIGNON commandin thestartupfile

(SARA.BAT) so that the signon screen appears on SARA’s worksta-
tion each time MOSis booted.If you don’t include the .SIGNON com-
mand,you could never access MOSto sign on to the secured
workstation. For example:

SIGNON SARA

This will invoke the SSIGNON command and enter SARA for the user
ID. SARA will need to enter the password to sign on to the partition
at the workstation. Once signed on, no other users will be able to ac-
cess Sara’s partition.

While in partition 2, SARA may invoke additional .ADDTASK com-

mandsto create a multi-tasking environment within the partition.
SARA may use the partition access keys to switch to a different parti-
tion as long as it has a security class that SARA may access.

Because no other users can access class A, and class A is assigned to

the partition running on Sara’s workstation, no other users can ac-
cess this partition. The partition access keys for partition 2 will not
work at any other workstation.

@-14 MOS-DLOL
Directory Level Security

If your system does not have security, any user may access any direc-
tory on your computer. You may wantto secureall directories or only
a few directories that contain confidential information.

A user’s access to a directory is controlled by the level of access the

user hasto the class assigned to the directory.

0- no accessto the directory. If the user has an access level of 0

to the class assignedto a directory, the user cannot access the
directory. If the user displays a directory, any directory with
a class to which the user has an accesslevel of 0 will not ap-
pear on the directory listing.

1- execute only. The user can see directories that are assigned a
class to which the user has level 1 access. The user can ex-
ecute anyfiles in this directory, but cannot read or change the
content of anyfiles.

2- read and execute only. The user can access the directory and
can read, load and execute files to which the user has access.
The user cannot create newfiles, or execute programs that
create newfiles.

Note that if a user has an access level 2 to the class of a direc-

tory and runsan application that for any reason createsa file,
the application may report an error such as "directory full."
The directory is not really full. MOS cannot create thefile be-
cause the security access level prohibits writing to the direc-
tory.

8- unrestricted access. The user has unrestricted access to the

directory, and may access any files in the directory to which
the user is allowed access.

MOS-D191 9-15
Security

You may assign security at the directory level to prevent un-

authorized users from accessing that directory. For example,if you
are running an accounting package, you may want to assign class P
to the directory where payroll records are kept. Then assign the no ac-
cess level to class P for all users except the person whoruns payroll.

If a directory has a class that is restricted from a user, the user can-
not access anyfiles in that directory, even if the files have a class
that the user can access. In the same way, a user mustbe able to ac-
cess all levels of directories from the root that precede the directory to
be accessed. For example:

Directory: \dirnamel \dirname2 \dirname3 \myfile

Security Class: A B C D

User’s Level: 3 2 3 3

In this example, the directory name to access MYFILEis three levels

from the root.directory. A user must have access to classes A, B, C
and D to be able to access MYFILE.Thelevel of access a user has to
each class also determinesthe level of access the user hasto file.

In our example, the user has unrestricted access to classes A, C and

D, but: has only read and execute access to class B. The user may read
the content of MYFILE, but cannot access MYFILE to make changes
even though MYFILE hasa class to which the user has unrestricted
access. The lowest access level of a preceding directory determines
the user’s access level to the files.

-i6 MOS-DI91
©
 File Level Security

If your system does not have security, any user may access anyfile on
your computer. You may wantto secureallfiles or only a few files
that contain confidential information.

A user’s accessto file is controlled by the level of access the user

hasto the class assignedto the file. Access mayalso be restricted by
the class assigned to the directory where thefile resides.

0- no accessto thefile. If the user has an access level of 0 to the

class assignedto a file, the user cannot accessthefile. If the
user displays a directory, any files with a class to which the
user has an accesslevel of 0 will not appear on the directory
listing.

1- execute only. All files with a class to which the user has an ac-
cess level of 1 will appear on a directory listing, and can be
run if they are executable programs. However, the user can-
not type or load the file with another program.

2- read and execute only. The user can read or execute thefile.
A user must have an access level of 2 or 3 to a class assigned
to a batchfile in order to execute the batchfile. A user may
display the contentof a file with the .TYPE command, but
cannot edit thefile.

3- unrestricted access. The user has unrestricted access to the

file.

If you have users who share the samedirectory, you may want to set
security only at thefile level. For example, a directory may have a
class of A, but the files in the directory have classes of B and C. One
user may be set up with unrestricted access to classes A and B, but
may have noaccess to class C. Another user may have unrestricted
access to classes A and C, but may have noaccessto class B.
atti.

MOs-DI91 9-17
Security

NOTE:If you are signed on to security and create a file, thefile is as-
signed your user default output class. The file appears in the direc-
tory with your user ID, default class, and the time and date of
creation and last update.

If you create a file that replaces an existingfile, the user ID, creation
date and time, and class remain the same.The last update time and
date will contain the time and date of the replacement.

When running some applications the replacement may appear not to

work. Some applications may renameor delete a file while you are
using it, and then create a new file when you save the output. MOS
will handle this situation asif the file is a new file and not a replace-
ment or update of the original file.

MOS File Level Security and VERIFY Command

When using MOS SECURITY forfile level security, care must be ex-
ercised when using the VERIFY commandto checka diskforfile al-
location errors! ONLY users with "level 3 - unrestricted access" ~~
assigned for ALL file classes should be allowed to run VERIFY! (This
level of access is usually reserved for someone at the system ad-
ministratorlevel.)

CAUTION? If the user running VERIFY does not have level 3 access
for all file classes, VERIFY will not be able to properly read the disk.

* WARNING * Ifthe user runs VERIFY with the /f operandto fix

lost allocation clusters, there could be some disk corruption if they do
not have level 3 access assignedforall file classes!

9-18 MOs-D1L91
Precautions for Security Users

Whenyou invoke security, every file having a non-blank classis

stored in an encryptedstate. It is possible for an unauthorized person
to create his own $$USER.SYSfile on a MOSdiskette, and then boot
your computer from the diskette. If the $$USER.SYSsecurityfile on
diskette contains a record that allows unrestricted access to all clas-
ses, the user may sign on from the diskette and access all of your
secured files on the hard disk.

If security is important, you may want to keep the main console in a

secured location. If your computer has a lock, you may want to keep it
locked. Never leave the MOS diskette lying around where anyone
may useor copyit.

Advanced Security

MOScontains an advanced security feature that lets you change the

key used to encryptfiles. You may use any unique encryption key for
your computer. A user could still boot MOSfrom a diskette and ac-
cess your secured files on the hard disk. But, because the user would
not know your master password to unencrypt the files, securedfiles
would display garbage.

The master password is not to be taken lightly. You may initiate user
security without a master password. If you initiate the master
password, it is NOT SAVED IN ANY FILES WHERE IT CAN BE LO-
CATED OR. SEEN.The master password becomespart of the encryp-
tion key for all secured files created on your computer.

If you forget the master password,it’s like crashing your entire com-
puter. You can do nothing, possibly not even boot MOS. And because
the master password key is not saved in any files and cannot be un-
encrypted, WE CAN DO NOTHING TO HELP YOU.Therefore, con-
sider it carefully before choosingto useit.

MOS-D191 9-19
Security

The MOS Encryption Key

Initiating the master password causes MOSto prompt you for the
master password encryption key each time you boot MOS. Whatever
you enter becomesthe encryption key while the computeris active.
Because the master passwordis not saved in anyfiles or anywhereit
can be seen, MOScannottell if the master password you enteris cor-
rect or not.

If you makea typing error or enter an incorrect master password

when you boot MOS,any securedfiles you create will have an encryp-
tion key that is different from the encryption key of any existingfiles.
Any secured files previously created with a different key will appear
as garbage.

If you decide to use the master password to change the MOSencryp-

tion key, initiate it very carefully. Each time you boot MOS and enter
the master password key, signon and check a securedfile to be sure it
does not appear in its encryptedstate.

Wesuggest that you set up a test file with a non-blank security class
and use it only for checking the master password when booting MOS.
If the test file appears to be encrypted and displays garbage, the
master password was incorrectly entered. You should reboot MOS
and enter the master password again.

The Master Password Eneryption Key

If you decide to use a master password, it should be initiated before

you initiate user security. Be sure that all files have a blank security
class so that nofiles are encrypted prior to the timeyou initiate the
master password key. If you attempt to use previously secured files
after initiating a master password, they will appear as garbage and
be unusable.

The master passwordis initiated by creating a file named

$$MASTER.SYSat the root directory. MOSchecksfor the existence
of a $$MASTER.SYSfile at the root directory before checking for the
CONFIG.SYSfile. If MOS does not find a $}MASTER.SYSfile at the
root directory, MOS assumes a master password is not used.

9-26 MOS-D191
You may create the $$MASTER.SYSfile with the MOS Editor. You
may leave thefile blank, or enter anythingin thefile you like. MOS
checks only for the existence of a $$MASTER.SYSfile, and any
entries in the file are ignored by MOS.

After creating the $]MASTER.SYSfile, reboot your system. MOSwill

now prompt you to enter the master password. Whatever you enter
for the master password is used as the encryption key for your files.
The display on your screen will be:

Carefully enter up to six alphanumeric characters, A to Z and 0 to 9,

for the master password key. The master password is not case sensi-
tive, so your entry may be in either upper or lower case characters.
To keep the master password confidential, it does not appear on the
screen as you typeit.

If you make a mistake while entering your master password, you may
backspace over it and re-enterit, or press ESC to completely remove
it and then re-enterit.

Be certain the passwordis entered correctly before pressing the

ENTER key. When you press ENTER, the master password becomes
part of the encryption key. You must enter the master password ex-
actly as it is entered now each time you boot the computer.It’s a good
idea to write down your master password and keepit in a safe place.

MOS-D191 9-21
Changing the Master Password

It is possible to change the master password for your computer. —

Before you change a master password, be sureall files have a blank
security class so they are not encrypted with the master password
key that you are going to change.

You can use the .COPY commandwith the /c operand to change the
security class assigned to a file. When you assign the new copyof the
file a blank security class, it is saved in an unencrypted state. When
you are sure all files have a blank security class, reboot your com-
puter.

When you reboot your computer, enter the new master password to
use as a part of the encryption key. Then use the .COPY command
with the /c operand to assign security classes to files. When you as-
sign the new copyof thefile a security class, it is saved in an
encrypted state with the new master password as part of the encryp-
tion key.

9-22 MOS-DI9L
 _-HAPTER 10:
PRINT SPOOLE!

Imtreduction .....0.......- Levee eee eeeees 10-2

Print Pile Names 2.0... ee ee ee 10-2

Print Pile Extemsions .. 0... ee ee ee ee ee 10-4

Disposition. ©... 0. ee ee ee 10-4

Priority 2... ee ee ee ee 10-5
Print Class... we ee ee ee 10-5

MOS HOLD LPT'm Commands ...... 00. ee eee 10-6

oo

PRINT.CTI File... 0. ee eee ee ee 10-6

Print Spooler Commands 6... ....0 000-0 eee eae 10-7

SPRINT. 0. 0 ee es 10-8
SPOOL 2... ee ee ee 10-11

Initiating the Print Spooler ...... 1.0... eee eee 10-15

Automating the Print Spooler .........00 208% 10-16

The Print Spooler Menus 2... 1... 0. eee eee ee 10-17

Print Processor Menu... .. 0... 002 eee ee eee 10-17

Spooler Menu .... 1... eee eee ee es 10-19
oo,
Multiple Printer Emvironments ..........5008. 10 - 22

Print Spooler Example Batch Files ............ 10 - 22

Batch Files for Multiple Users ...........20.0- 10 - 22

Batch Files for Multiple Printers. ..........0.06. 10 - 23

MOS-DL9L 10-1
Print Spooler

Introduction

Printing may be done directly using the COPY command. However, a

Print Spooler is available in MOSto provideflexible printing opera-
tions. The spooler intercepts reports (or any output) sent to the
printer and saves the reports in print (disk) files. These files are then
printed from the spooler to let you share the printer with other users,
and to improve throughput. Printer errors (reserved, out of paper,off-
line, ete.) display in an error window on the requesting task’s screen.

There are two programs used in the spooling operation; a spooler and
a print processor. The spooler is invoked in all partitions where
spooled output is desired. The print processor is invoked in a parti-
tion dedicated to the spooling operation, and controls printing of the
spooledfiles.

The two programsusedfor spooling printer output require the use of

a dedicated directory. When the spooler intercepts printer output
from a partition, the resultingprint files are sent to the dedicated
directory. The print processor controls printing of the spooledfiles by
continually checking the dedicated directory for spooled files that are
ready to print. The dedicated directory may be on any logical disk, i.e.
C:, D:, ete.

The Print Spooler also gives you more control of the reportsorfiles
you need to print. You mayprioritize or classify reports depending on
your printing requirements. You may rename, delete and save
reports. A report may be flushed from the spooler, or may be restart-
ed at a specific page number. Letterhead and other noncontinuous
formscan easily be handled.

Print File Names

Whenthe spooler is invoked, it sends printer output to the dedicated

directory and assigns the resulting print file a name. Theseprint file
names are comprised of the following:

SPlannn.dpe

10-2 MOS-D191
Where:

SP - designates a spooledprintfile.
|. -is the system name (0-9 or A-Z) of the computer that
originated thefile. Defaults to L if not specified with the
SPOOL command.
xx - is the task ID of the partition where thefile originated
nrin- is a sequential numberthe spooler assigns to eachfile
€ - is the disposition of the file to be printed
p -is the priority assignedto thefile
¢ -is the printclassofthefile

All print file names begin with SP to designate that they are spooled
print files. The next position is a number(0 to 9) or a letter (A-Z)
designating the computerthat originated thefile. For multiuser sys-
tems spooling to a server each computer must havedifferent spoolfile
names. These system namesare assigned with the SPOOL command.
(Defaults to "L".) The task ID of the partition where the printer out-
put originated appearsin the next twoposition of the print file name.
For example, 00 appears for partition 0, 01 appearsfor partition 1, 12
appears for partition 12, etc.

A sequential numberis assigned to eachfile as it is created to be sure

each file has a unique name. Thefiles from each partition are num-
bered individually, beginning with the number 001. For example,if
two spool files are created from partition 1, then a spoolfiles is
created from partition 2, and then anotheris created from partition 1,
the file names would be:

SPLO1001.dpe
SPLO1002.dpc
SPLO2001 doc
SPLO1003.dpe

Anyspoolfiles that are in the dedicated directory when you reboot

MOSor power down the computer are saved in the dedicated direc-
tory. However, a file in the process of being written may not be
usable. When the .SPOOL commandis invoked in a partition, new
spool files are assigned the next sequential numberafter any existing
files. If there are no existing spool files for a partition, then number-
ing begins with 001.

MOS-Di91 10-3
Print Spooler

Print File Extensions

os,
Theextension of each printfile nameis comprised of values that indi-
cate thefile’s disposition, priority and print class (dpc). These three
values determinethe status of the printfile, and how the print proces-
sor treats thefile.

Each time you boot MOSandinvokethe spooler, default values are

assigned to the three file extension operands. The default values as-
signed are D - disposition, 2 - priority, and A - print class,

You may change these default values with the .SPOOL command,or
with an option from the spooler menu that is available in each parti-
tion where the spooler is active. You may change these values after a
spoolfile has been created with an option from the print processor
menu. These three features are explained later in this chapter. The
values you mayenter for these three operandsare:

Disposition _

There are five possible choices for a print file’s disposition:

{)- Print the file and then delete it. (The default).

H- Hold thefile, do not print it.

S- Save thefile after printing. When printing is complete, the

file disposition is changed.to H.

N - No spooling; the spooler is bypassed and the output is sent

directly to the printer.

|- Ignore output, spool file will not be generated.

oo

10-4 MOS-D191
Priority

Priority is one digit in the range of 0 to 9, with 0 being the lowest

priority and 9 the highest. The priority determines whena file will
print in relation to any otherfiles that are ready to print. For ex-
ample, if several files are readyto print, a file with a priority 9 prints
before a file with a priority 8. The default is 2.

Print Class

Print class is one alpha character in the range A to Z that indicates

any special printing requirements. Theprint class has no relation to
security classes. Print classes A to T are user definable. Print classes
Uto Z are reserved for single sheet forms where a separate piece of
paper must be placed in the printer at the end of each page. The
default is A.

Theprint processor will print only thefiles that are assigned the
class that is currently the active class. If you include the /P=*
operand with the .PRINT command,all classes maybe active at the
sametime.

You. may use the class for any special printing requirements. For ex-
ample, you may groupreports that require special forms into a
separate class. Then place the special formsfor that class in the
printer and makethatclass the active class. Only the reports that re-
quire the special formswill print. When they are complete, remove
the special forms from the printer and changetheactive class to
anotherclass.

MOS-DL91 10-5
Print Spooler

MOS HOLD LPIT'n Commands

The "MOS HOLD LPTs nnnn" command can be used to automatically

reserve a printer for use by a specific user for a specified length of
time. "x" specifies the printer, and "nnnn" specifies the time in
seconds. The maximum is 9999 seconds (about 166 minutes or 2 & 3/4
hours).

This automatic reservation prevents other users from using the

printer for the specified time after the reserved user has accessedit.
This feature allows both direct printing and spooled printing on the
system.

The "MOSADM HOLD task LPTx nnnn" commandfor the system ad-
ministrator is similar in function except it can set the reservation
timeor release a printer for another task.

See Chapter 5 for complete information on using these MOSutility

commands.

PRINT.CTL File

The PRINT.CTLfile contains initialization and termination strings

for each print class. Before each spool file is printed the class's in-
itialization string is sent to the printer. After eachfile is printed the
class’s termination string is sent to the printer.

The initialization strings are used to set up printer fonts or forms con-
trol. The termination messages usually contains a formfeed to
separate printfiles and other characters to reset the printer.

10-6 MOS-DL9l
 The PRINT.CTL file has the following format:

Line 1 containstheinitialization string for Class A spool files

Line 2 contains the termination string for Class A files.
Lines 3/4 contains the init/term strings for Class B spoolfiles.
Lines 5/6 for Class C
Lines 7/8 for Class D

Lines 51/52 for Class Z

IMPORTANT: The PRINT.CTL file must exist and reside in the

designated spool directory.

Control characters may be generated by preceding a character with a

caret (“); “D will generate a CTRL-D. ** is used for a single caret (“*).

Considerthe following sample PRINT.CTLfile:

“D @iont{COURt12)°M
“L

“L

Class A’s initialization string is “D (CTRL-D) followed by

@font(COUR12) followed by “M (Carriage return). The termination
string is “L (formfeed). Class B’s initialization string is null; nothing
will be sent to the printer before the spoolfile is printed. Class B will
output a *L formfeed after each file is printed. If/NOFFis included
on the commandline, for formfeed suppression, the formfeed may be
ignoredif the printer is already on a new page.In this example,all
other initialization and termination strings are null.

Print Spooler Commands

——
There are two commands in MOSthat you will use to set up the spool-
ing operation; .PRINT and .SPOOL. These two commandsare ex-
plained in detail on the following pages.

MOS-D191 10-7
Print Spooler

»~PRINT

The .PRINT commandlets you invoke the print processor and specify
the drive and path of the directory to checkfor printfiles.

Type: Extrinsic.

Form: .PRINT {path} {/FF| NOFF] /classfipt[lines]]} /Tenn /P=x

Operands:

path defines the drive and directory to search for spool files
and the printer control file PRINT.CTL. Defaults to
C:\SPOOL.

{PF all formfeeds will be printed for the following classes.

(Doesn't change anything that goes to the printer,i.e.
formfeedsin file will be acknowledged.) This is the
default condition.

/NOFF redundant formfeeds will be suppressedfor the following

classes. A formfeed whentheprinter is already at the top
of a new page,or a formfeed following a formfeed is redun-
dant

felass defines printable classes and optionally changes the

default printer and lines per page./* will assign the
parameters to all the classes. Printer 0 disables any print-
ing for that class.

ft defines the directory scan interval. The print program

will check the directory for a file to print every "nn"
seconds. Defaults to 15 seconds. Range is 1 to 99 seconds.

[Pax defines the active class(es). Defaults to class "A". A single

class may be enabled with this switch or you may enter
/P=* to print all printable classes, i.e. all classed defined
with the /class operand.

10-8 MOS-DLOL
 Explanation:

— The .PRINT commandshould be invokedin a partition that is dedi-

cated to the printing of spooled reports. A print processing menudis-
plays in that partition. Files are printed based on their status, which
you may control from the menu.

The drive and directory entered for the .PRINT command must be
the sameas the drive and directory entered with the .SPOOL com-
mand. For example:

PRINT GASPOOL(\

This commandinvokesthe print processor and instructs it to check

the C:\SPOOLdirectory and print any files found based on their
status. The .SPOOL commandyou enter in a user’s partition must be
set up to send the spooled outputfiles to this directory.

If you have two printers, you may create more than onedirectory for
~~ spooling printer output. You must invoke the .PRINT commandin a
dedicated partition for each of these directories. You may then use
the .SPOOL commandanddefinethe directory to which each parti-
tion will send printer output. You mayalso direct output to different
printers from one directory by assigning a different class for each
printer.

The following are some examples of PRINT commands:

PRINT /A

Prints Class A jobs on default printer (LPT1). Spool directory defaults

to C:\SPOOL. Form length defaults to 66 lines per page. Directory
scan time defaults to 15 seconds.

PRINT DASPOOLER jAl /C3 /NOFF /B284 /P=*

MOS-D191 10-9
Print Spooler

Prints spoolfiles from \SPOOLERon the D:drive. Prints Class A

jobs on LPT1, Class B jobs on LPT2, and Class C jobs on LPT3. LPT2
has 84 lines per page and all redundant formfeeds will be suppressed
to it. /P=* meansprint all defines classes, in this case A, B, and C.
Anyother print classes will not be printed.

PRINT — /B2 (CG [U3 fi /P=*

Sendsall print classes to LPT1 except Classes B and C which are

sent to LPT2 and classes U and V which are sent.to LPT3. Spooled
files are found in the default directory C:\SPOOL.

PRINT /* /D2 JE3 [NOFF /F /P=A

Sendsall print classes to LPT1 except Classes D, E and F. Class D is

sent to LPT2. Classes E and F are sent to LPT3. Class F will sup-
press all redundant formfeedsin theprintfile. Initially only Class A
will be printed,all other classes will be held until the operator specifi-
cally enables them.

10-10 MOS-D191
SPOOL

The .SPOOL commandlets you specify the drive and directory where
the print files for a partition are to be sent. .SPOOL is also used to
change the default print status and security class that is assigned to
printfiles for that partition.

Type: Extrinsic.

Forms:

SPOOL {YNm] [path] Se] /Kxxxx]} {fo[plel]] Tanna] [/LPTx]}

SPOOL OFF

Operands:

fim assigns a character to include in the spool file names. Mul-

tiuser systems spooling to a server must have different
spool file names. "m" represents the system name or num-
ber (0-9 or A-Z) of the computerthat originated thefile.
Defaults to L.

path write spool files to the given path. Defaults to C:\SPOOL.

A complete path must be specified, including drive and
directory.

{se "oc" reassigns the security class of the generated spoolfile.

Used whensecurity is active to declassify output so it can
be printed by an unsecured print task. This allows the
print task to have a low security class (to protect higher
class files from unauthorized access) andstill be able to
print outfiles of a higher class when desired. Use an un-
derscore (_) or a space to assign a blank security class.

[RXXXK changes the spooler popup hotkey to the specified new

keycode. The value for "xxxx"for the desired hotkey can
be obtainedbyfirst using the spooler menu to temporari-
ly change the hotkey assignment.

Thesefirst four parameters are only specified once.

MOS-D19l 10-11
Print Spooler

The following three parameters must be specified for EACH printer

specified. (If any of these three parameters are specified, they become
the defaults for the following specified printers, unless changed.) —

dpe enter the disposition (D, 8, H, N, D, priority (0-9), and

class (A-Z) of the printer output.

fTnnan Defines a timeout value. Enter /T and the numberof

secondsthat elapse without any output before a print file
is automatically closed and printed. Timeout defaults to
18 seconds. Maximum is 3600 seconds (60 minutes). Mini-
mum is 1 second.

/LPTx Parameters before LPT will be used for that. local

printer. Unspecified printers will be merged with the cur-
rent parameters.

Explanation:

When you invoke the .SPOOL commandin a partition, a TSR (ter- —

minate and stay resident) program is loaded that intercepts the
printer output for that partition and directs it to the dedicated direc-
tory as a spooledprintfile. The drive and directory entered for the
.SPOOL command must be the same as the drive and directory
entered with the .PRINT command.

To remove the spooler TSR from memory, enter the following com-
mand:

SPOOL. OFF

The spool program is then unloaded and all subsequent print output
from that task is not spooled, but sent directly to the local printer
device. This is not a good idea if other tasks on the system could also
generate print requests.

10-12 MOS-DISI
 The following are some examples of SPOOL commands:

— SPOOL DASPOOLER /SA DSA

Spooled files go to the D:\SPOOLERdirectory. Spooledfiles are as-

signed a disposition of "D" and a security class of "A". Priority is
changedto 5.

SPOOL D2B /T100 /LPT2

LPT2 output is spooled to Class B with a 100 second timeout. Output

to unspecified printers (LPT1 and LPT3) is merged and spooled with
the same class and timeout value.

SPOOL /NO FASPOOLER D4A /LPT1 D6B /LPT2 D2C /T100 /LPTS

Spools all output to network drive F:\SPOOLERwith assignedfile

names SPOttnnn.dpe.. Output to LPT1 is given class A,priority 4.
Output to LPT2 is given class B, priority 6. Output to LPT3 is given
—, class C, priority 2 and has a 100 secondtimeout.Files can be printing
on all three printers at the same time. One printer might be a dot
matrix printer, one a laser printer, etc.

SPOOL /N1 CASPOOLT /LPT1 N /LPT2 CASPOOLS DEV /LPTS

Spools LPT1 output to C:\SPOOL1\SP1xxnnn.D2A. Output to LPT2

is not spooled, but printed directly to LPT1). Output to LPT3 is
spooled to C:\SPOOL3\SP1xxnnn.D6V.

After invoking the .SPOOL commandto establish the directory, the

-SPOOL command maybe used for other functions. MOSrestricts
any subsequent usesof the .SSPOOL commandin a partition to chang-
ing the default status of spooled disk files, or changing the time that
elapses without any output to a printfile before the print file is auto-
matically closed.

MOS-DL9L 10-1
Print Spooler

The default print status is determined by the extension of the print

file name. When .SPOOLisfirst invoked, the extension of the print
file defaults to D2A, whereD is the disposition, 2 is the priority, and oo:
A is the print class. An explanation of print file namesis given in a
separate section of this chapter, and describes the possible print
status selections.

You may changeanyorall of the print status defaults. For example,

to assign the disposition H (hold) to all print files for the current par-
tition, you would enter:

SPOOL fh

To also changethepriority for this partition to 6, and theclassto b,

you would enter:

SPOOL h6b

To changethe disposition and class, but not the priority, use an un-
derscore in the position for the priority. You would enter: om,

SPOOL h_b

You may change how quickly a spoolfile closes when there is no out-
put to the file with the /T operand. The /T operand maybe included
with the commandthat invokes the spooler directory. For example:

SPOOL CASPOOL\ /T10

Or, you may enter the .SPOOL commandat the system prompt with
only the /T operand. For example:

SPOOL /T10

Both of these commandsinstruct the spoolerto close a file if 10

seconds elapse without any output to the file. This command changes
the time only for the partition where the commandis invoked. —,

10-14 MOS-D1O1
You may have programsthat print one line, process information,
print anotherline,etc. If the processing time is longer than the
default of 18 seconds, the spoolfile will automatically close and the
report will not be complete. You may needto increase the time span
in a partition where 18 secondsis not enoughtimefor a report to be
completed.

If you are sending information to the printer where a program is not

involved (such as with the PrtSc key), you may wanttheprintfiles to
close more quickly to speed up processing. You may wantto set the
numberof seconds that elapse to a much smaller number.

If you assign a different hot key to bring up the spooler menu in a par-
tition, you may enter the SPOOL commandwithout any operands to
reset the hot key in that partition back to its original value of CTRL
HOME.

NOTE: The .PRINT and .SPOOL commands should neverbe invoked

in the samepartition. SPOOLintercepts printer output and writes it
to the print files while .PRINT reads theprintfiles and creates
printer output. Placing both commandsin the samepartition will cre-
ate an endlessloop.

Initiating the Print Spooler

Before initiating the Print Spooler, create a directory that will be

dedicated to the spooling operation. You should give this directory an
identifying name, such as SPOOLER.For example:

MD SPOOLER

Then use an editor to create the file PRINT.CTL, andcopyit into this
directory. See the section on the PRINT.CTL file in this chapter.

Create a dedicated partition for the print processor with the

.-ADDTASK command.This partition can be set up to use the mini-
mum memory size of 32K. For example:

AADDTASK 32

MOS-D1S9i 1O-15
Print Spooler

Now,install the print processor in the dedicated partition you

created. Enter the .PRINT commandin this task followed by the
drive and path wherethe directory to checkis located. If the directory —_
is several levels from the root, you must includeall levels in the direc-
tory name. For example:

PRINT CAWORDPROC\MEMOS\SPOCLER

The .SPOOL commandis invokedin each partition that you want con-
trolled by the print processor. Enter the .SPOOL commandfollowed
by the same drive and path entered for the .PRINT command.For ex-
ample:

sSPOOL CAWORDPROC\MEMOS\SPOOLER

Spooled outputfiles for the partition are now sent.to the directory
SPOOLER.The print processor checks the SPOOLERdirectory and
prints the files based on their print status.

Automating the Print Spooler

If you plan to use the Print Spooler, you may want to automate the
-PRINT and .SPOOL commandsby placing them in the appropriate
batchfiles. You may place .ADDTASK commandsin the
AUTOEXEC.BATfile to create user partitions and the dedicated par-
tition for the print processor each time you boot MOS.

The startup batchfile for the print processor partition may include
the .PRINT command to automatically invoke the print processor.
The .SPOOL command maybeplaced in the startup batchfile for
each user partition that is to be controlled by the print processor.

Make sure each .SPOOL commandis invoked with the samedrive

and path of the directory for spooling as entered wiht the .PRINT
command. For more detail, see the example batchfiles at the end of
this chapter.
4

10-16 MOS-DL91
The Print Spooler Menus

There are two menusavailable with the Print Spooler to let you con-
trol the printing operation. When you invoke the .PRINT command,
the print processor menu appearsin the partition where the .PRINT
commandis invoked. This should be a dedicated partition from which
the printing operation is controlled.

In each partition where the .SPOOL commandis invoked, a hot keyis

available to pop-up a spooler menuthatlets you controlthe printfiles
for that partition. The following explains each of these menus and the
options that are available.

Print Processor Menu

The print processor menuis available in the partition where you in-
voke the .PRINT command. You havefull control of the printfiles
that appear on the menu. The menu appearssimilar to the following:

Theprint processor continually looksfor files to print. A file is print-

able if it has a disposition of D or S, its class matchesthe active class
displayed on the menu,andits length is not zero. The active class
and file currently printing are displayed at the top of the menu.

MOS-Di9l 10-17
Print Spooler

Each commandon the menuis invoked by a single character code:

C- Change active class. Lets you changethe class that is current-

ly active. Only files with a class that matches the active class
will print. (A-Z and *. See PRINT command.)

Flush currentlisting. The file currently printing is flushed

then deleted or renamed, dependingonits disposition.

Change LPT/Class assignment. When you invoke .PRINT,the

device default is LPT1 and the active class A. This option lets
you direct a class of print files to any attached LPT device.
For example, you can direct all class C files to LPT2 or all
class U files to LPT3. You may even direct a class of print
files to printers that are not attached. However, when you ac-
tivate that class, printing will be sent to the default device,
LPT1.

Stop/start printer - This option lets you stop or halt printing

uw

of the currentfile, and then restart printing at the position in —

the file where it was stopped.

Restart with new page nbr - You may stop printing from the
currentfile, and then restart printing beginning with a page
number you assign. This is very helpful if you wantto print
only part of a report, or if a paper jam or printer problem oc-
curs.

Modify disp/pri/class - This option lets you assign a different

Ss

extension to a print file to change the manner in whichit is

processed.

Delete file - You may use this option to delete a printfile from
Oo

the directory where the print processor is running.

Exit to MOS - This option terminates the .PRINT command

and returns control of the partition to MOS. Spooled print —,
files will still be sent to the directory, but will no longer be
printed by the print processor.

10-18 MOS-D191
While printer output is being spooled, the print file name appears on
the menuwitha file length of zero. Theprintfile will not be closed by
the spooler until all output is complete. If output is sent by an ap-
plication program, output is complete when the program ends, Or,
you may pop-up a menuin the spooler partition and select the option
to manually close a file. When the printfile is closed, the actual file
length appears on the menu.

The print processor cannot print an openfile; it must wait until the
file is closed. The spooler automatically closes a file if there is a span
of time during which there is no output to the printfile.

For example, if you use the print screen key, a program is not actual-
ly runningthat will terminate the print file. You may terminate the
file manually with an option from the pop-up spooler menuin the
originating partition, or wait for the spooler to close the printfile for
you. The span of timeto close a file defaults to 18 seconds, but can be
changed with the .SPOOL command.

Spooler Menu

You mayuse the spooler hot key to bring up the spooler menu in any
partition where the spooler is active. The hot key is set to CTRL
HOME each time you invoke the .SPOOL command.Press the hot key
and the spooler menu pops-up over any current application. You may
select any option from the menu and then return to your application.

Press the CTRL and HOME keys at the same time andthe spooler
menu appears on your screen similar to the following:

MOS-D1L9. 10-49
Print Spooler

Type the numberof the option you wantto select. The options avail-
able are:

1. Current Spool Parameters. The default disposition, priority,

andclassfor this partition appears for option 1.

To change the disposition, type a 1 and the message "Please

enter new Disposition (D,S,H,I,N)" appears. Type the single
character disposition to assign for this partition and it ap-
pears on the menu. (You maypress the space bar to skip the
disposition.)

The message "Please enter new Priority (0 - 9)" then appears.

Type the numberofthe priority to assign for this partition
and it appears on the menu. (You maypressthe space bar to
skip the priority.)

The message "Please enter new Class(A - Z)" then appears.

Type the single character class to assign for this partition and
it appears on the menu. (You maypress the space bar to skip —~,
the Class.)

You may then select another option or press ENTER to-return

to the application.

2. Spool File Status. The status of the current file appears for op-
tion 2, either OPEN or CLOSED.If there is nofile open, op-
tion 2 has no function.

If a file is open, you may type a 2 to close thefile so it will

print more quickly. For example, if you are at the MOSlevel
and use the PrtSc key, there is no program runningto close
the print file that is created. MOSwill automatically close the
print file if there is no output after the specifiedfile close time
(default is 18 seconds). You mayclose the file more quickly by
bringing up the spooler menu and typinga 2.

10-20 MOS-D19S1
 3. Spool File Close Time. This option sets the numberof seconds
that elapse without any outputbefore a printfile is automat-
ically closed and printed. To change, enter a 3 and the mes-
sage "Enter new spooler close time" appears. Then type the
new valueto assign, in seconds, and press ENTER. (Defaults
to 18 seconds, maximum is 3600 seconds - 60 minutes.)

4. Spooler Popup HotKey.If the use of CTRL HOME is in conflict

with an application program,or is inconvenient, you may as-
sign a different hot key to bring up the spooler menu. The
new assignment must be a two-key combination using ALT,
CTRL or SHIFT,i.e. ALT B, CTRL END,ete. Type a 4 and the
message "Press the key you want for the new HotKey" ap-
pears. Type the key to use for the new hot key. A second mes-
sage appears asking you to press the new hotkey again to
verify your choice. Press the same keys again and the mes-
sage “Hotkey verified. Press any key to continue" appears.(If
you change your mind, press any other key and the program
will not change the hot key.)

5. Keyboard Polling Mode. The default keyboard modeis

NODIS,for no disabling of programs that repeatedly test the
keyboard. You may type a 5 to toggle the keyboard modebe-
tween NODIS and DIS. The mode displayed on the menu
when you press ENTER to exit is the mode thatis set for this
partition.

MOS-DLSI LO ~ 20
Print Spooler

Multiple Printer Environments

There may be times whentwoor three printers are attached to your

computer. You may direct printer output to any attached printer by
associating print classes (A to Z) with a specific printer (LPT1, LPT2,
or LPT3).

Theassociation of print classes to printers is made from the print

processing menu with the L - Change LPT/Class assignmentoption.
These assignments may be anything you want to use. For example,
you may assign classes A and B to the printer identified as LPT1.
You may then assign classes C and D to the printer identified as
LPT2.

By assigning classes to spooled print files, a user may direct output to

any available printer. A user may invoke the SPOOL commandto
changethe print class, or may changethe print class with option 1
from the spooler menu.
ao

Print Spooler Example Batch Files

The following are examples of how you could set up batchfiles for in-
voking the print spooler. These are only example. Your batchfiles
should include all commands necessary for your particular needs.

BatchFiles for Multiple Users

This example is for one printer and three users. There are four parti-
tions, one for the print processor, and three for the users. Note that
the STARTUP.BATfile is nested in the AUTOEXEC.BATfile. This
will cause MOSto first invoke the spooler for partition 0, and then
begin executing the .AADDTASK commands.

10-22 MOS-D1LS1
AUTOEXEC.BATFile

.BATECHO OFF
STARTUP
ADDTASK 256,1,,slartup,octerm,7,19200
ADDTASK 256,2,,startup,pcterm,2,19200
ADDTASK 32,3,,printl
GLS
TEXT

"The spooler is now Installed"

-ENDTERT

STARTUP.BATFile

PATH eGCAPCMOS
SPOOL CASPOOL

PRINT1.BATFile

PATH@Gl\CAPCMOS
PRINT GASPOOL

Batch Piles for Multiple Printers

This exampleis for two active printers and four users. Two users
sendall output to a letter quality printer (LPT1), and the other two
users send all output to a dot matrix printer (LPT2). Note that the
SPOOLI.BATfile is nested in the AUTOEXEC.BATfile. This will
cause MOSto first invoke the spooler for partition 0, and then begin
executing the .ADDTASK commands.

Whenthe print processoris first invoked, the L option is selected

from the print processor menu to assign LPT1 a print class of Q. Only
print files with a class of Q will go to LPT1. The L option must. also be
selected to set LPT2 a class of D, so that only files with a class of D go
to LPT2. However, only one printer will be active at a time.

Note that the .SPOOL commandis included in the startup batchfiles

to assign the print classoffiles for the user partitions.

MOS-D191 10-238
 AUTOEXEC.BATFile

.BATECHO OFF
SPOOLi
ADDTASK 256,1,,spoolt,pcterm,1,19200
ADDTASK 296,2,,spool2,pcterm,2,19200
AADDTASK 296,3,,spool2.pcterm,3, 19200
ADDTASK 32,4, printer
LS
TEXT

"The spooler is now installed”

-ENDTEXT

SPOOL1.BATFile

.PATH=CA;CAPCMOS
SPOOL G\SPOOL d2q
SPOOL2.BATFile

-PATH=C\;C:\PCMOS
SPOOL CASPOOL d2d

PRINTER.BATFile

-PATH®CA;C:\PCMOS
-PRINT CASPOOL

10-24 MOS-D1L81
 APPENDIX A: WARNING AND n
Liu
5)
ERROR MESSAGES eB
S
Introduction «06 6 ec ee ee ee ew ee eee ee et AD

Self-Explanatory Messages ..- 6.0. ee eee A-2

General Error Messages... 66 0 ee ee ee ee A-2

Critical Error Messages .. 6-6 ee ee ee eee A-3

MOS-DI91 A-1
Warning and Error Messages

Introduction

Many of the warning and error messages in MOSareself-ex-

planatory, and indicate what action you need to take. For example,
the message, "Invalid operand"tells you that MOS does not recognize
an operand you entered with a command.If you madea typingerror,
you may simply enter the commandagain. If you don’t know what
caused the error, use theHELP commandto display the valid
operandsfor the command.

Normally, an application will be running whenan erroroccurs.

Depending on how the application traps and displays errors, you may
never encounter an error at the MOSsystem level.

Self-Explanatory Messages

The messagesthat are not self-explanatory are presented in this ap-

pendix in two groups - general error messages and critical error mes-
sages. Each message is explained, along with any action necessary to _~
correct the error.

General Errors

During processing, MOSwill display general error messages if an

error condition is encountered that is not critical. Most general errors
will cause processing to halt, and MOS will display a self-ex-
planatory message.Self-explanatory messages, such as "Cannotfind
file", "Invalid directory name", etc., are not explained here. The follow-
ing are general error messages that may not be self-explanatory,
along with an explanation of why the error occurred.

File lock conflict

A file lock conflict error typically occurs if you use an application that
is not designed for a multi-user environment.

A-2 MOS-DiSL
Record lock conflict

A record lock conflict error typically occurs if you use an application

that is not designed for a multi-user environment.

Wrong disk

The wrongdisk error occursif you are writing output to a file on disk
and you changethe disk before the write operation hasfinished.

witical Errors

Critical Errors are the messages that MOSdisplays when a situation

occurs that prevents further processing. The Critical Error messages
are displayed to give you an opportunity to correct the problem so
that processing can continue. When you encounter a Critical Error,
you must use your best judgement to deal with the situation.

The MOSCritical Error messages are presented in this appendix,

with an explanation of the situation in which they may occur and the
action that may be required to correct the situation.

Critical Errors are comprised of three variables and take the follow-
ing form:

ERROR variablei while variable2 variables

Variablel will give a description of the kind of error that occurred,

variable2 identifies the type of processing, and variable3 indicates
what wasbeing accessed. For example, a Critical Error may appear
as follows:

ERROR Not reacy while writing A:

MOS-DI91 A$
Warning and Error Messages

The possibilities for each of the variables that may appear in criti-
cal error are as follows:

Variablel Variable2 Variable3

Write protect reading device name

Unit not known writing drive name
Not ready
Data
Request header
Search
Unknown disk
Cannotfind sector
Printer needs paper
Write
Read
General Failure

Write Protect

A write protect error can occur when MOSis attempting to write to a

protected disk.

Action: Check the write-protect notch on the diskette.

Invalid Command

An invalid command message may appear when an application issues

a command MOSdoes not recognize.

Action: Contact your dealer or the developer of the application

program you were using whenthe error occurred.

Unit Not Known

A unit not known error typically occurs if MOSis looking for a device
or drive that is not installed.

Action: Check the application that you are runningto see if a

device driver is required that has not been installed.

Awd MOS-D191
 Not Ready

A not ready error mayoccur if you attempt to access a drive and the
drive door is open, or if you attempt to send output to a printer and
the printer is not turned on.

Action: If accessing a drive, check to be sure the disk is in the

drive and the drive dooris closed. If attempting to send
outputto a printer, check to be sure the printer is turned
on.

Data

A dataerror usually occurs when MOScannot read or write data on a

disk.

Action: The disk may be damagedor not suitably formatted for

your computer. If attempting to write to a disk, try for-
matting the disk first. If attempting to read from a disk,
oo try again. If the data error continues, the disk is probably
damaged beyonduse.

Request Header

A request header error occurs when MOScannotfind the necessary

information for a device driver.

Action: Contact your dealer or the developer of the application

program you were using when the error occurred.

Search

A Searcherror typically occurs when your disk is damaged.

Action: Check your disk andtry again. If the search error con-
tinues, the disk is probably damaged beyonduse.

MOS-DLOL Ae
GN
Unknown Disk

An unknown disk error occurs when MOSis attempting to access a

disk that is not formatted for your computer.

Action: Your disk may need formatting before use with MOS.

Cannot Find Sector

A cannotfind sector error means that your disk may be damaged.

Action: Check to be sure you havethe correct disk and try again.
If the error continues, the disk is probably damaged
beyond use.

Write

A Write error indicates that your disk may be damaged and MOScan-
not write data to it.

Action: Check to be sure you have the correct disk and try again.
If the error continues, the disk is probably damaged
beyonduse.

Read

A read error indicates that your disk may be damaged or not in a for-
mat that MOScan read.

Action: Check to be sure you havethe correct disk and try again.

General Failure

A general failure indicates that an error occurred, but the error

doesn’t fit any of the defined MOSerrorsas to how or whyit hap-
pened.

Action: Makenote of what was processing when theerror oc-

curred and contact your dealer for assistance.

A-6 MOS-DIOL
 APPENDIX B: n
us
NETBIOS EMULATION 2
Q
=
nT
a
ae
<<

Introduction... ee ee ee B-2

Setting Up NETBIOS Communication .......0..... B-2

Signing On to the Network 2... 26 Cc eee eee B-3

Network Emulation Error Messages... 0... .00..... B-3

MOS-DI191 B-1
NETBIOS Emulation

Introduction

Some application software programs support the Network Basic

Input/Output System (NETBIOS)protocol for interfacing to network
hardware, such as the IBM® Network. The network offers peer to
peer communication between individual computers. Peer to peer com-
munication allows all computers connected in the network to com-
municate with each other. This is typically accomplished by placing a
"network interface card" in each computerthatwill tie into the net-
work, and connecting the individual computers with cables. Each com-
puter in the networkis identified as a user.

MOSsupports applications written for NETBIOSbyoffering a

software emulation of the network interface cards. Each MOSparti-
tion can emulate an interface card for running network applications
on a single computer. The emulation treats each MOStask (partition)
as a separate computer. A user may communicate with otherparti-
tions using the emulation software in the same way a user may com-
municate with other computers under NETBIOS.

Setting Up NETBIOS Communication

The MOSnetwork emulation mustfirst be defined with a DEVICH=

command statement in your CONFIG.SYSfile. This device driver
makes the emulated interface cards available to the partitions. The
commandstatement for this device driveris:

DEVICE=$NETBIOS.SYS tasks=nn

The tasks=nn operand sets the numberof tasks (partitions) that will
emulate the network interface card. This number may range from 2
to 25. Each interface card you define will use approximately 1600
bytes of memory allocated from the System Memory Pool (SMP).

For example,if five workstations and the main console will use the
network application, you need to define six tasks for emulating six in-
terface cards, This will require approximately 9600 bytes of memory
from the SMP. Someapplications require that one task (partition) act
as a disk file server. If that is the case, you need to define one addi-
tional task.

B-2 MOs8-DI91
Be sure you have enough memory reserved with the SMPSIZE= com-
mand statement for the numberof partitions that will use the inter-
face card emulation, and all other device drivers. The SMPSIZE=
command statement is also defined in your CONFIG.SYSfile.

Signing On to the Network

Before running an application that requires the network, a user in a

partition mustfirst sign on to the network.If a dedicated partition is
requiredto act as a disk file server, a user must also be signed on in
the dedicated task. MOS provides the.INETNAME commandas the
method of signing on to the network.

Each user must sign on from within a partition and enter a unique
user nameof up to 15 characters without any spaces. The user name
identifies each task (partition) and allows the networkto control and
track each user’s access to other user’s resources. For example:

NETNAME GARY

If the sign on is successful, or if you enter the .NETNAME command

without an operandto display the current user sign on, MOSdisplays
the following message:

Note that only one user can sign on to the network from within a par-
tition, and only the numberof users defined with the $NETBIOS.SYS
device driver can access the network.

Network Emulation Error Messages

There are several messages that may appear when you attempt to
sign on to the network emulation. The following explains why these
messages occur.

MOS-D191 B-3
This message will appear if there is not sufficient memory to run the
.NETNAME command.

This message appearsif the $NETBIOS.SYSdevice driver has not

been defined. You should define this driver in your CONFIG.SYSfile
so that it is always available when you boot MOS. You may use the
.ADDDEV commandto define the driver without rebooting.

This message appears if you enter a usernamethat has already been

used to sign on in anotherpartition.

The interface card is busy and cannot process the sign on command.
You may want to wait a few seconds andtry again.

B-4 MOS-D191
 APPENDIX C: CUSTOMIZING if
THE HELP FACILITY ;
ig
eg

Introduction . 0... 6. ee ee ee ee ee ee C-2

File Descriptions . 0.0.00 0c ee ee ts C-2

Editing the HELP.SRC File... we ee es Cc-3

Rules for Editing HELP.SRC 2... ee ee C-4

Building theHELP Data Files 2.0... 06 cee ees C-4

MOS-D191 C-1
Customizing the HELP Facility

Introduction

The .HELP commanddisplays a menulisting all the commands and

utilities that are available in MOS. From the menu, you maydisplay
on-line screens of help text for individual commands. A detailed ex-
planation of how to use theHELP commandis given in the General
Commands chapter of this manual.

There may be times when you want to changethe information in the

help displays to customize it for your own use. You may add your own
utilities or commands to the menulist and create the associated help
text screens you want to display. If necessary, you may also modify
the existing help text for translation to other languages. Thefiles
necessary to customize the help text and menu are provided with
MOS.

File Descriptions

Thefiles provided with MOSthat allow you to customize theHELP

facility are:

HELP.EXE This program contains the machine languageinstruc-

tions to display the menu andhelp text screens.
There are two data files that are necessary for this
command, both of which mustreside in the same
directory as this file.

HELP.TXT This is the first data file HELP.EXE uses. This data
file is built from the source file HELP.SRC. DO NOT
EDITthis file, or you may find theHELP command
no longer functions properly.

HELP.NDX This is the second data file HELP.EXE uses, and is

also built from the source file HELP.SRC. Thisfile
contains the index for building the menu anddisplay-
ing the associated text blocks as help text screens.

HELP.SRC This file contains the raw text used to build the
HELP.TXT and HELP.NDX datafiles. This is the cur-
rent data used with the .HELP commandthat you
may customize for your own use.

C-2 MOS-Di91
 This file does not have to be in the same directory
as the HELP.EXE file. The rules for customizing
this file are given following these file descriptions.

HELPGEN.EXE This program is a conversion utility that builds

the data files, HELP.TXT and HELP.NDX,from
the raw text in the HELP.SRCfile. Any text that
is in the HELP.SRC file when you run this utility
will overwrite the current contents of these two
data files. Note that the HELP.SRCfile and the
HELPGENfile must reside in the samedirectory
when you run this conversionutility.

Editing the HELP.SRC File

You mayedit the contents of the HELP.SRCfile with any editor or

word processor capable of operating on ASCII files. When you edit
this file, you will notice that it contains blocks of text similar to the
following:

Each block begins with a "keyword"that is associated with the block.

Keywords are identified by a preceding semicolon, which must be
positioned in column oneofthefile. The keyword that follows the
semicolon cannot contain more than 14 characters.

In the previous example, .HELP and .[MPORT are keywords because

they are preceded by a semicolon. The HELPGENutility places the
keywords in the HELP.NDXfile for displaying on the menulist. Any
text associated with the keywordis placed in the HELP.TXTfile.

MOS-D191 C-3
The order in which the keywords andtheir associated text blocks are
entered in the HELP.TXTfile determines the order in which the
keywords appear on the menu.If you want to add help text for your os
own group of utility commands, you may preservethe currental-
phabetical order by placing each block in the appropriate position of
the existing HELP.SRCfile. Or, you may wantto place all of your
own entries at the end of the HELP.SRCfile as a group.

Rules for Kditing HELP.SRC

Whenentering your own text in the HELP.SRCfile, be sure to abide

by the followingrules:

* atext line may have a maximum of 80 characters.

* a block of text may contain a maximum of 4096 characters.

* a block of text may contain a maximum of 200 lines.

* the help text screen displays 18 lines of the text block at a time.

* the HELP.SRCfile will facilitate a maximum of 90 keywords,in-

cluding the existing MOSentries.

* be sure the only semicolons that appear in column oneofthefile

are associated with keywordentries.

Building the .HELPData Ales

8
iiepepe

tee

a7

After modifying the HELP.SRCfile, run the HELPGEN conversion

utility by entering HELPGENat the commandline. The HELP.SRC
file must reside in the same directory as the HELPGEN.EXE file
whenthe conversion is run.

The HELPGENutility will read HELP.SRC andcreate the datafiles

HELP.TXT and HELP.NDX in the same directory. If the datafiles al- om
ready exist in the same directory as HELP.SRC and HELPGEN,the
conversion utility will overwrite their current contents. If you create
new data files, you may then copy the new datafiles over the existing
data files in the directory where the HELP.EXE program file resides.

» &
©
a
sLOSSARY

Attribute - An attribute in MOSis a characteristic inherent.to file.

MOSfiles have four attributes that display with file namesin a direc-
tory; R - read-only, * - archive, S - secured, and H - hidden.

Assembled Program - A program that has been converted to

machine readable language.

Automated Batch File - A special file that contains a group of com-

mandsthat specify the processing environment. An example of an
automated batchfile is the AUTOEXEC.BAT.

ASCII - American Standard Code for Information Interchange. A

methodof translating computer machine languageto a user-identifi-
able characterset.

Backup - To makecopiesoffiles for safekeeping. MOS provides the

.EXPORT commandto backupfiles.

ase Memory - The memory below 1 megabyte in RAM (Random Ac-

cess Memory). Thefirst 640 kilobytes of this memory is typically
reserved for processing applications.

Batch File - A file that contains a commandor group of commands

that are to be executed one after the other. MOS recognizes a batch
file by itsBAT extension. You may use batchfiles to create your own
utilities or to automate a string of commands,

Bit - A binary digit, with possible valuesof 0 or 1. This unit is recog-

nizable by computers since the twopossible values can be repre-
sented by the presence (1) or absence (0) of voltage.

MOS-D191
7:
jest
8
Glossary

Boot - To supply power to your computer and cause the computer to

load the operating system. To reboot simply means to cause your com-
puter to reset memory and reload the operating system. —

Boot Sector - A special disk sector reserved for information the com-
puter needsto load the operating system.

Byte - A groupof eight bits used to represent one character in the PC

character set, such as the letter "A".

Class - MOSidentifies two types of class; a security class and a print

class. A security class is assigned to files, directories and partitions,
and user access is then defined on a class-by-class basis. A print class
is used with the MOS Print Spooler to control printing of spooled
printfiles.

Cluster - The smallest unit of disk space allocatedfor a file. The size
of the cluster is computed when the disk is formatted.

Command - An instruction to MOS to perform a specific task. —_

Cemmand Line - The line on which the MOS prompt appears and
where you may enter commands.

Command Processor - The interface between the user and the

operating system kernel, through which commandsare interpreted
and executed. Also called the shell. The MOSshell is $$SHELL.SYS.
The MOSkernel is $$MOS.SYS.

Configuration - The grouping of hardware and software that makes

up your computer system. This grouping includes the main console,
any printers, workstations, the operating system, plus any other
software applications or hardware.

Current Directory - The directory in which you are presently

processing. If no other directory is specified, MOS defaults to the cur-
rent directory. —~

Ge MOS-Di91
 Data Compression - A means of packing datato lessen the space it
occupies for storage.
ooo,

Default Drive - The present drive on which you are working. If you
make a commandline entry and do not specify otherwise, MOS
defaults to the current drive.

Delimiter - A reserved character, such as a forward slash (/), a

comma(,) or a space that signifies the end of one commandor
operand and the beginningof another.

Device Driver - A piece of software that contains the instructions

for running a particular device in your computer. When invokedit ac-
tivates and controls communication with the device.

IMrectory - A group of filenames, with associated pointers and statis-

tical information.

Disk - A medium on which you mayread, write, or store data. The

oo, medium could a floppy disk, a hard disk, or a removable disk.

Diskette - The removable medium in a drive on which data may be

read, written, or stored.

Drive - A device containing disk media on which data may be read,

written, or stored. The current drive is the drive which contains the
files on which you are presently working.

Eneryption - A means of scramblingthe contentsofa file so it can-

not be read or written to by unauthorized personnel. An encryption
key is needed to decipherthe encryptedfiles.

Environment - A reserved area of memory where frequently ac-

cessed strings of data are stored.

MOS-Di91 G-3
Glossary

Exror Level - A code that is set by MOS when a commandis ex-

ecuted. This code indicates whetheror not the execution was success-
ful. MOS returns one of three codes when a commandis executed -- 0
for a completely successful execution; 1 for an execution which may
have contained errors; and 2 for an execution that was unsuccessful.

Executable File - A file which contains machine recognizable lan-

guage that can be executed without being assembledor interpreted.

Extension - Precededby a period, the character string that follows a

file name. It may be upto three characters long and can serve as an
internal identifier of the file type. MOS recognizes the .BAT, .COM,
.EXE, and..SYS extensions, and treats files with these extensions in a
specific manner.

Extended Memory - That memory whichis above one megabyte on

your computer.

Extrinsic - A type of MOS commandthat resides on disk in an in-

dividual program file.

Filter - A method by which inputis redefined and then output.

Hard disk - Anon-removable disk with hard platters.

Intrinsic - A type of MOS commandthat is loaded into memory and

is available for execution at any time.

Kernel - The core of the operating system that doesall the work. The
MOSkernel is $$MOS.SYS. When a user makes a request of the
operating system through the shell and command processor,it is the
kernel that actually does the work.

Keystroke - The act of pressing a key on the keyboard.

Ge 4 MOS-D191
Logical [Disk - A disk device defined in software that exists regard-
less of the numberof physical disks present on the system. For ex-
ample, one physical hard disk may be divided into four logical disks -
C:, D:, E: and F:.

Mein Console - The computerthat forms the base of your system,in-

cluding its video screen and keyboard.

Nesting - The act of calling a second batchfile to execute from within

one batchfile and then returningto the original batchfile.

Oserand - A single character or character string that further defines

how a commandis to be executed.

Parent - The directory that immediately precedes the nameof a sub-

directory in a path.

Paxtition - A defined area of memory that is associated with a

specific task.

PatchFile - A file that contains the changesthat are to be made to

an existing program file with MOS’s .DEBUGutility.

Path- The directories that precede a specified directory or filename.

Pipe - A character device to which output mayberedirected and

from which it may be retrieved.

Port - The physical device which serves as a channel for peripheral

devices to communicate with the Central Processing Unit.

©rompt - A system-supplied or user-defined character string or

group of symbols displayed by the operating system, signifying thatit
is ready to accept a command.

MOs-DL 91 G-5
Random Access Memory - (RAM) Memory reserved for storage and
retrieval of data during processing. The application’s workspace.

Replaceable Operands - False operands in a batchfile that are

replaced by real operands entered from the commandline when the
batch file is invoked.

Root - The base level of file storage on a disk. The root directory is
the first directory, under which all subsequent directories are made.

Shell - The shell is the interface between the user and the operating
system kernel. The MOSshell is $$SHELL.SYS. The MOS kernelis
$$MOS.SYS.

SMP - System Memory Pool. A small amount of memory assigned at

system setup to supervise all tasks and track all activity on the sys-
tem.

String - A group of characters which may represent specific values.

MOSmayreferto strings of data placed into the environmentfor
easy retrieval.

Time Slicing - The method by which MOSdivides processing time

and allocates it to each partition in a multi-tasking/multi-user en-
vironment.

Utility - A system-related or general-purpose program that performs

a specific function or functions.

G-6 MOS-DLOL
$$MASTER.SYS
changing 9-22
initiating 9-20 to 9-21
purpose 1-9, 9-20
precautions for use 9-20, 9-21
$$MOS.SYS
making a diskette bootable 4-56, 4-67
purpose 1-8
$$SHELL.SYS
making a disk bootable 4-56, 4-67
purpose 1-8, 4-5
$$USER.SYS
creating 9-3 to 9-6
initiating 9-3 to 9-6
purpose 1-9, 4-3
securing from users 9-3, 9-6
$COMPATS$
explanation 6-36
purpose 6-36
$EMS.SYS
default value 2-38
emulation of EMS 2-38
explanation 2-38
operands 2-38
purpose 1-8
$MOUSE.SYS
explanation 2-40
purpose 2-40
$NETBIOS.SYS
errors during network sign on B-3 to B-4
explanation B-2 to B-4
operands B-2
purpose 1-8
setting up network emulation B-2 to B-4
signing on to the network B-3

MOS-D181 i-}
Index

$PIPE.SYS
default value 2-42
explanation 2-43
operands. 2-42
purpose 1-8
$RAMDISK.SYS
default value 2-44
explanation 2-45
operands 2-44
purpose 1-9
$SERIAL.SYS
.ADDTASKserial port assignments 5-13
default value 2-46, 2-47
explanation 2-47 to 2-50
initializing a port 5-30
interrupt vectors, reserving 5-23 to 5-27
modem connections 2-49
operands 2-46, 2-47
purpose 1-9
8087 commandstatement
default value 2-4
explanation 2-4
form 2-4
operands 2-4
type 2-4, 4-5

ABORT
command form 6-4
explanation 6-4
nested batch file usage 6-4
type 4-5, 6-4
access keys, partitions 5-19
access levels, security 9-2 to 9-22
directory level access: 9-15, 9-16
file level access 9-17, 9-18
partition level access 9-12 to 9-14

MOS-DiS1
 .ADDDEV
explanation 4-11
—— form 4-11
operands 4-11
type 4-4, 4-11
adding tasks 5-11 to 5-17
-ADDTASK
batch file usage 6-31
command form 5-11
explanation 5-14 to 5-17
modem connection at remote location 5-64
operands 5-11 to 5-13
port assignments 5-13, 5-16
security class assignment 5-12, 5-15
startup batch file 5-13, 5-14
security example 9-13
terminal baud rates 5-13
terminal ID 5-12, 5-16
type 4-4, 5-11
ALIAS
explanation 4-13, 4-14
form 4-13
operands 4-13
type 4-4, 4-18
co archive attribute -3-4, 4-53
asterisk
attributes offiles 3-4, 4-53, G-1
wildcard character 3-5, 3-6
-AUTOCD
command form 6-5
explanation 6-5
type 4-5, 6-5
AUTOEXEC.BATfile
explanation 6-3, 6-29
purpose 1-9, 4-3
setting environment 6-29

MOS-DL9l 1-3
Index

backup
-EXPORT command 4-49 to 4-52
bank switching
$EMS.SYS. 2-38
$RAMDISK.SYS 2-44
base memory
definition G-1
multi-tasking 5-4 to 5-7
partition number 5-4, 5-6, 5-11
.BATfile extension 3-3, 4-6, 6-2
batchfile
automated batch files 6-29, G-1
color screen displays 6-25 to 6-28
commands 6-3 to 6-28
compatibility 6-36
creating 6-3
examples 6-29 to 6-35
explanation 6-2, 6-3, G-1
nested 6-2, 6-33
replaceable operands in 6-2, 6-21
startup batchfile for a partition 5-11, 5-15
-BATECHO
command form 6-6
explanation 6-6
type. 4-5, 6-6
baudrate for terminal workstations. 5-13, 5-64
boot sector
copying to a disk 4-55, 4-67
definition G-1
replacing current on a disk 4-67
braces { }
command form.conventions 4-9
.BREAK
explanation 4-16
form 4-16
operands 4-16
type 4-5, 4-16
break points in .DEBUG 8-4

MOS-DI91
oo cable connections
modems. 5-54
workstations 5-53
CACHE commandstatement
default values 2-5, 2-6
explanation 2-6
form 2-5
operands 2-5
turning on and off (.MOSADM CACHE) 5-46
type 2-5, 4-5
cache of memory 2-5, 5-46
.CALL/.RETURN
command form 6-7
explanation 6-7
type 4-5, 6-7
.CD
explanation 4-17
form 4-17
operands 4-17
type 4-5, 4-17
CGAvideo cards supported 1-3
modesettings 5-29
snow-like effect. corrected 2-16
characteristics of files 3-4.to 3-5
.CLASS
explanation. 9-7, 9-8
form 9-7
operands 9-7
type 4-4, 9-7
class
definition 1-10, G-1
displaying security assignments 3-5
print spooler file 10-4 to 10-7, 10-11 to 10-22
security 9-2 to 9-22
.CLS
batch file usage 6-32
explanation 4-19
form 4-19
type 4-5, 4-19

jet.
Index

cluster.
definition. G-2
file allocation check 4-90 to 4-92
color video screen displays in batch files 6-25 to 6-28
.COM file extensions 3-3, 4-6
COMMAND
explanation 4-20 to 4-21
form 4-20
operands 4-20
type 4-5, 4-20
command
batch file commands 6-1 to 6-36
configuration commandstatements 2-2 to 2-36
conventions in this manual 4-7 to 4-9
.DEBUG commands 8-7 to 8-46
definition 1-10, G-2
editor commands 7-6 to 7-21
extrinsic 1-8, 4-3, 4-4
general commands 4-11 to 4-94
intrinsic 1-8, 4-3, 4-5
multi-tasking/multi-user commands 5-11 to 5-18, 5-21 to 5-51
print spooler commands 10-8 to 10-15
security commands 9-7 to 9-11
commandline
definition G-2
MOSediting modes 1-13
MOSediting control keys 1-14 to 1-15
Command modeediting with .ED 7-2 to 7-26
commandprocessor
changing to anew layer 4-20
definition 4-3, G-2
loading 5-4
sharing amongpartitions 5-6
commandrecall buffer 1-13
clearing 1-13, 6-10, 9-9
retrieving lines from 1-13
COMMAND.COM
making a disk bootable 4-55, 4-67
purpose 1-8, 4-3

L-6 MOS-DI91
-COMPFILE
explanation 4-22 to 4-24
form 4-22
operands 4-22
type 4-4, 4-22
computer
cable connections 5-53
definition 1-10
host 5-7
workstations connections 5-7, 5-53
COMSPEC= 4-20. 4-84
COMFIG.SYSfile
command statements 2-2 to 2-36
defining an operating environment 2-2 to 2-36
explanation 2-2, 2-3
purpose 1-9
control keys for editing
at MOS system prompt 1-14, 1-15
in MOS.Editor 7-24, 7-25
conventions
command form 4-7 to 4-9
namingfiles 3-2 to 3-4
-COPY
ASCII andbinary files 4-30
changingfile dates and times 4-29
changing a security class 4-31, 9-3, 9-6
device input/output 4-27
explanation 4-25 to 4-31
file concatenation 4-28
form 4-25
operands 4-25, 4-26
securedfiles 4-31
type 4-5, 4-25
COUNTRYcommandstatement
available codes 2-15
default value 2-15
explanation 2-15
form 2-15
operands 2-15
type 2-15, 4-5
creating files 3-2, 7-2 to 7-4
critical error messages in MOS A-3 to A-6
cursor
insert mode display (block) 1-13
typeover mode display (underscore) 1-13

MOS-DI81 i-@7
D

-DATE —,
batch file usage 6-31
explanation 4-32
form 4-32
operands 4-32
type 4-5, 4-32
.DEBUG
break points 8-3
commands 8-7 to 8-46
explanation 8-3 to 8-5
form 8-6
operands 8-4 to 8-6
sample session 8-47 to 8-54
type 4-5, 8-6
default drive 4-7, 4-8, G-3
delimiter 4-7, G-3
DESNOW commandstatement
default value 2-16
explanation 2-16
form 2-16
operands 2-16
type 2-16, 4-5 _~
DEVICE command statement “
default value 2-17
explanation 2-17
form 2-17
operands 2-17
optional device drivers 2-17, 2-38 to 2-50
standard device drivers 2-17, 2-38
terminal drivers supplied with MOS 5-12, 5-13,:5-55, 5-56
type 2-17, 4-5
device drivers
adding with ADDDEV 4-11
adding with DEVICE= 2-17
optional 2-38 to 2-50
provided with MOS 1-8, 1-9, 2-37 to 2-50
removing with .REMDEV 4-78
SMPSIZErequired for loading 2-29
standard 2-37
terminal driver requirements 5-55, 5-56
terminal drivers supplied with MOS 5-12, 5-18, 5-55, 5-56
 device names 2-37 to 2-50
-DIR
_n, explanation 4-34, 4-35.
form 4-33
operands 4-33
type 4-5, 4-33
directory
access levels under security 9-12 to 9-17
backslash usage 3-9 to 3-12
changing (.CD) 4-17
class 9-7
current directory 3-9 to 3-14, 4-17
dedicated for print spooling 10-2
diagram 3-8
displaying 3-13, 4-33 to 4-37
explanation 3-8 to 3-14, G-3
extension 3-10
levels 3-9 to 3-14
making (.MD) 4-61 to 4-62
maintaining 3-11
names 3-10
organizing 3-11
parent 3-9 to 3-12
path 3-8 to 3-10
removing (.RD) 4-76
root 3-8
securing 9-2, 9-3, 9-7, 9-12 to 9-17
signing on to security 9-10
structure 3-8 to 3-14
substituting access with ALIAS 4-13
.-DIRMAP
explanation 4-36
form 4-36
operands 4-36
type 4-4, 4-36
dirname 4-7

copy entire contents 4-38, 4-39

definition 1-10, G-3
formatting 4-55 to 4-57
making bootable 4-55, 4-67
naming 4-40

ni,
Index

-DISKCOPY
explanation 4-38
form 4-38 Oo
operands 4-38
type 4-4, 4-38
-DISKID
explanation 4-40
form 4-40
operands 4-40
type 4-4, 4-40
displaying files 3-3
disposition of print spoolerfile
default 10-3 to 10-4
changing 10-14, 10-17 to 10-21
-DOT command 4-6
drivers (see device drivers)

.ECHO
command form 6-9
explanation 6-9
type 4-5, 6-9
echoing to the video screen 6-7, 6-9
turn: off modem echoing 5-64
.ED (MOSEditor)
Command mode explanation 7-2 to 7-5
Command mode commands 7-6 to 7-21
editing modes 7-2, 7-3
graphic character assignments 7-2, 7-6
DEFKEYS.EDfile 7-6
type 4-4, 7-2
using macros 7-26
Visual modeediting keys 7-24, 7-25
Visual mode explanation 7-2, 7-19
editing
commandline editing keys 1-14, 1-15
MOSEditor- .ED 7-1 to 7-26
EGAvideo card
conflict with FREEMEM 2-19
supported 1-3

MOS-D19!
=
&
 EMS
conflict with FREEMEM 2-20
“aos
emulation 1-8
encryption for security 9-20 to 9-22, G-3
environment
AUTOEXEC.BATfile 6-29
changing
.COMMAND 4-20
-PATH 4-71
SET 4-84, 4-85
definition G-3
reserving size for 4-42, 6-30
-ENVSIZE
batch file usage 6-30
explanation 4-42
form 4-42
operands 4-42
type 4-5, 4-42
-ERASE
explanation 4-43, 4-44
form 4-43
operands 4-43
type 4-5, 4-43
error
errorlevel conditions in batch file 6-15, G-4
messages in MOS A-2 to A-6
escape key sequences 5-58 to 5-61
escape sequence chart 5-61
-EXCEPT
CANCEL. 4-45 to 4-48
DO 4-45 to 4-48
explanation 4-45 to 4-48

type 4-5, 4-45

.EXE file extensions 3-3, 4-3
.EXPORT (also see .IMPORT)
explanation 4-49 to 4-52
form 4-49
operands 4-49
type 4-4, 4-49

MOS-D191
extensions
filenames, in 3-2 to 3-3, 4-3, 4-6
directory names, in 3-10
print spoolerfiles 10-2: to 10-4
special file types 3-3
extrinsic commands 1-8, 4-3, 4-4, G-4

.FILEMODE
explanation 4-53, 4-54
form 4-53
operands 4-53
type 4-4, 4-53
files
accessing in a directory 3-8 to 3-10, 9-17
attributes 3-4 to 3-5
backup (,EXPORT) 4-49 to 4-52
characteristics 3-3 to 3-4
command form conventions 4-7 to 4-9
comparing (.COMPFILE) 4-22 to 4-24
concatenation 4-28,.4-29
copying 4-25 to 4-31
creating 3-2
date and time 3-5
secured 9-17, 9-18
with MOS Editor 7-2 to 7-25
debugging (see .DEBUG)
directory groupings 3-8 to 3-14
displaying 3-3, 4-33 to 4-35, 4-88
disposition in print file names 10-3 to.10-4
changing 10-14, 10-17 to 10-21
erasing 4-43
explanation 3-2 to 3-7
extension
-BAT purpose 6-2, G-4
.COM purpose 1-8, 4-3
.EXE purpose 1-8, 4-3
print spooler assignments 10-2 to 10-5
“SYS purpose 1-8
usage by MOS 3-2, 3-3, 4-3
 limiting numberof open 5-40
maintaining 3-7
oo naming conventions 3-2, 3-3
print spooler files 10-2 to 10-5
print spooler files 10-2 to 11-5
provided to customize HELP facility C-2 to C-4
provided with MOS 1-8, 1-9
README file ii
renaming 4-79 to 4-81
restoring (.[MPORT) 4-59, 4-60
securing 9-2, 9-3, 9-11, 9-17, 9-18
security assignment display 3-4
sharing 3-5
signing on to security 9-10
sizes 3-4
special processing, used for 1-9, 3-3
updating 3-4
time and date 3-4
with MOSEditor 7-2 to 7-26
verification 4-90 to 4-94
wildcard characters 3-5
.FLUSH
command form 6-10
explanation 6-10
type 4-5, 6-10
.FOR IN DO
commandform 6-11
explanation 6-11
type 4-5, 6-11
foreign keyboard drivers 5-38, 5-39
-FORMAT
explanation 4-55 to 4-57
form 4-55
operands 4-55
type 4-4, 4-55
FREEMEMcommandstatement
explanation 2-19 to 2-21
form 2-19
operands 2-19
type 2-19, 4-5

T-13
Index

.GOTO
command form 6-13
explanation 6-13
type 4-5, 6-13
graphic character assignments in the Editor 7-6

EH

hard disk, making bootable 4-55, 4-67

-HELP
customizing C-2 to C-4
explanation 1-3, 4-58
form 4-58
operands 4-58
type 4-4, 4-58
host computer (see computer)
hot key in print spooler 10-15, 10-21

JF
command form 6-14
explanation 6-14
type 4-5, 6-14
IMPORT
explanation 4-60
form 4-59
operands 4-59
type 4-4, 4-59
input/output redirection 4-9 to 4-10
sorting files 4-64 to 4-66
symbols for 4-9, 4-10
INSERT
command form 6-17
explanation 6-17
set commandline mode 1-13
type 4-5, 6-17
insert mode 1-18, 6-17

1-44. MOS-DIi9T
 interrupt vector
displaying reserved vectors 5-27
ao, freeing a reserved vector 5-26
reserving 5-23 to 5-27
task switching method 5-48
intrinsic commands 1-4, 4-3, 4-5, G-4
IRQ (see interrupt vector)

kernel (or core) of MOS 1-3

.KEY
command form 6-18
explanation 6-18 to 6-20
type 4-5, 6-18
key
hot key in print spooler 10-15, 10-19, 10-21
master password encryption 9-20 to 9-22
partition access 5-19
keyboard
accessing partitions 5-19
commandline editing keys 1-14, 1-15
commandrecall buffer 1-13, 6-10
disable keyboard checking 5-23
emulation of host computer at workstation 5-55 to 5-61
escape sequence chart 5-61
escape sequences for workstations 5-58 to 5-61
foreign keyboard drivers 5-38, 5-38
rebooting from 5-9
scan code emulation 5-58 to 5-61
turning on andoff partition access 5-13
workstation keyboard emulation 5-58 to 5-61
.KEYMAP Command5-62

LDEVICE command statement 2-17

levels of security access 9-6
directories 9-15, 9-16
files 9-17, 9-18
partitions 9-12 to 9-14
levels of directories from the root 3-9 to 3-14
logical disk G-5

MOS-D191 T-15
Index

main console
definition 1-10, G-5
securing with master password 9-20 to 9-22
master password. 1-9, 9-20 to 9-22
.MD
explanation 4-61 to 4-62
form 4-61
operands 4-61
type 4-5, 4-61
MEMDEVcommandstatement
explanation 2-22 to 2-25
form 2-22
operands 2-22, 2-23
type 2-22, 4-5
memory
addressable 5-4 to 5-6
allocation for partitions 5-5
managed environments 1-4, 2-22 to 2-25
management 1-4,:2-22 to 2-25
managementdrivers 2-24, 2-25
partition (see partition)
memory paging a,

$EMS.SYS 2-38
$RAMDISK.SYS 2-44
mode
changing a workstation video mode 5-29
setting for color monitor 5-29
video modesettings 5-29
modem
baud rate settings 5-64
defining types 5-65
initialization utility 5-64
remote workstation connections 5-64
partition set up 5-7
monochromevideo cards supported 1-3
«MORE
explanation 4-63
form 4-63
type 4-4, 4-63
pent
puced
52
g
 .MOS
type 4-4
utility command 5-21
utility functions 5-9, 5-21 to 5-42
utility function display 5-21
-MOS ANSI 5-42
.MOS DIS 5-28
-.MOS DOSVER, 5-42
-.MOS DSPORT 5-35
-MOS FILES 5-40
-MOS FREEIRQ 5-26
-MOS HOLD LPTn 5-40, 5-41, 10-6
-MOS INFO 5-33
-MOS IRQ 5-27
-MOS KEYB 5-38
-MOS MAP 5-22
-MOS MOUSE 2-40, 5-36, 5-37
.MOS NODIS 5-23
-MOS RESIZE 5-32
.MOS ROUTELPTn to COMn 5-31
«MOS ROUTE LPTn to LPTn 5-31
-MOS ROUTE LPTn to NOTERM 5-32
.MOS ROUTE LPTn to TERM 5-82
-MOS.SERINIT 5-30
.MOS TSR 5-41
.MOS USEIRQ 5-23
-MOSutility command 5-21
-.MOS VMODE 5-29
-.MOS WAIT 5-28
-.MOSADM
change system time tick default. 2-27
help display 5-43
type 4-4
utility functions 5-9, 5-48 to 5-51
-MOSADM. CACHE 5-46
-.MOSADM EMSLIMIT5-50, 5-51
-MOSADM HOLD 5-47, 10-6
-MOSADM PRI 5-45
.MOSADM RESET 5-48
-MOSADM SLICE 5-44
-MOSADM SWITCH 5-46
-MOSADM TIME 5-49
-MOSADM TMFACTOR 5-46, 5-47
-MOSADM VIRQ 5-48

ani.
Index

mouse
device driver 2-40
initializing 5-36, 5-37
-MSORT
explanation 4-64 to 4-66

explanation 4-67
form 4-67
making a disk bootable 4-67
operands 4-67
type 4-4, 4-67
multi-tasking
commands 5-10 t0.5-19
commandprocessor, loading 5-4 to.5-7
concepts 5-4 to 5-6
definition 1-10
environment 5-4 to 5-6
memory organization 5-4 to 5-6, 2-22
processing 5-7
multi-user
advantages 5-8
commands 5-10 to 5-19
concepts 5-7, 5-8
definition 1-10
processing 5-8
workstations 5-7, 5-8

nested batch files 6-2, 6-33, G-5

NETBIOS emulation with MOS 1-8, B-2 to B-4
-.NETNAME
explanation B-3 to B-4
form B-3
operands B-3
NEXT
command form 6-21
explanation 6-21
type 4-5, 6-21

1-18 MOS-DLOL
oO

-ONLY
CANCEL 4-68 .to 4-70
DO 4-68 to 4-70
explanation 4-68 to 4-70
form 4-68
operands 4-68
type 4-5, 4-68
operand
definition 1-10, 4-8, G-5
replaceable (in batch files) 6-2, 6-21, 6-34, 6-35
operating system
definition 1-2
output redirection 4-9 to 4-10

parent directory 3-9 to 3-12, G-5

partition
access 5-7, 5-19
with security 9-12 to 9-14
access keys 5-19
adding 5-11 to 5-17
adjusting memory size 5-32
class, security
assigning 5-12, 5-15, 9-7
changing 9-7, 9-8
security example withADDTASK 9-13, 9-14
communication with pipe devices 2-42
dedicated for print spooler 10-2, 10-8 to 10-16
definition 1-11, G-5
explanation. 5-4 to 5-7
information display, statistical 5-22
memory size 5-11, 5-32
numbers 5-4 to 5-6, 5-18, 5-19
priority, changing 5-45
processing time ticks 2-27
rebooting 5-9
removing 5-18
resizing 5-32

MOS-DIS1 T-19
Index

securing 9-2 to 9-4, 9-7, 9-8, 9-11 to 9-14

sharing 5-7
signing on to:'security 9-10
statistical information display 5-22
timeticks, changing 5-44
turning access keys on and off 5-20
patch file 8-3,.G-5
-PATH
batch file usage. 6-30
explanation 4-71
form 4-71
in AUTOEXEC.BATfile 4-3
operands 4-71
type 4-5, 4-71
path
commandform conventions 4-8
in directory structure 3-9 to 3-14
-PAUSE
command form. 6-22
explanation 6-22
type 4-5, 6-22
PC-MOS
customizing the..HELP facility. C-2 to C-4
files provided 1-8 to 1-9
introduction 1-2 to 1-15
modular expansion 1-2
release number 4-77
single-user, multi-tasking 1-2
special features 1-2
system monitor 5-68.to 5-70
system prompt 1-13
terms used in 1-10 to 1-11
upgrading to-multi-user versions 1-2
version number 4-77
pipe
device driver 1-8, 2-42
example of adding with -ADDDEV 4-11
command form conventions 4-9
symbolfor redirection 4-9, 4-10

T= 20
-PRINT
explanation 10-8 to 10-10
dedicated directory 10-2, 10-8
form 10-8
operands 10-8
type 4-4, 10-8
print class 10-3 to 10-5
changing 10-14, 10-17, 10-18
default value 10-3 to 10-5
print processor menu 10-17, 10-18
print spooler menu 10-19 to 10-21
ports
address assignments 2-46
-ADDTASKport number assignments 2-49, 5-13
definition G-5
initializing from a workstation 5-30
reserved for modem connections 2-49
$SERIAL.SYSdevice driver 2-46 to 2-50
standard buffered interface 2-46 to 2-50
terminal (workstation) connections 2-46, 5-7, 5-8, 5-13
Print Spooler 1-3, 5-8, 10-1 to 10-24
automating 10-16, 10-23, 10-24
dedicated partition 10-2, 10-8 to 10-16
example batch files 10-23, 10-24
filenames 10-2 to 10-5
initiating 10-15
introduction 10-2
multiple printer example 10-22, 10-24
multiple user example 10-23
PRINT.CTL file 10-6, 10-7
-PRINT command 10-8 to 10-10
print processor menu 10-17
SPOOL command 10-11 to 10-15
spooler menu 10-19 to 10-21
printer
redirection 5-31, 5-32
reservation 5-47
multiple printer use 10-22, 10-24
multiple users sharing 10-2 to 10-4, 10-23
spooling 10-2 to 10-24

MOSs-D1L91 1-2)
Index

priority
partition. 5-45
print spooler file
changing 10-12, 10-18 to 10-21
default value 10-3, 10-4
program files (see files)
prompt
definition G-5
MOSsystem default 1-13
.PROMPT
batch file usage 6-30
explanation 4-73 to 4-75
form 4-73
operands 4-73, 4-74
type 4-5, 4-73

Q
question mark wildcard character 3-6

R
RAM (Random Access Memory) 5-4 to-5-6, G-6
RAM disk
emulation 1-9
conflict with FREEMEM 2-20
$RAMDISK.SYS 2-44, 2-45
.RD
explanation 4-76
form 4-76
operands 4-76
type 4-5, 4-76
read-only attribute 3-4
reboot from keyboard 5-9
rebooting tasks 5-9.
record sharing 5-8
redirect processing
.GOTO batch file command. 6-13
sorting files 4-64 to 4-66

1-22 MOS-DISI
-REL
explanation 4-77
form 4-77
type 4-5, 4-77
-REM
explanation 6-23
form 6-23
type 4-5, 3-26
-REMDEV
explanation 4-78
form. 4-78
operands 4-78
type 4-4, 4-78
removing tasks. 5-18 to 5-20
.REMTASK
explanation 5-18 to 5-20
form 5-18
operands 5-18
task ID numbers 5-18
type 4-4, 5-18
-RENAME
explanation 4-79 to 4-81
form 4-79
operands 4-79
type 4-5, 4-79
replaceable operands 6-2, 6-21, 6-34, 6-35, G-6
resource sharing 1-2, 5-7, 5-8
root directory 3-9 to 3-14, G-6

Fs)

SEARCH
explanation 4-82, 4-83
form 4-82
operands 4-82
type 4-4, 4-82

MOS-DL9L I-23
Index

security 1-3, 1-9, 5-8

access levels 9-2 to 9-5
directory level access 9-15, 9-16
file level access 9-17, 9-18
partition level access 9-12 to 9-14
advanced 9-19 to 9-22
assigning to a partition 5-12, 5-15, 5-16
.CLASS command 9-7 to 9-8
classes 9-2
commands 9-7 to 9-10
default output class 9-6
encryption key 9-20 to 9-22
explanation 9-2 to 9-3
master password 9-20 to 9-22
precautions for using 9-19
SIGNOFF command 9-9
SSIGNON command 9-10
system administrator's record 9-4
user ID 9-4
user password 9-5
user records 9-4 to 9-6
serial adapter boards 5-53
serial port
.ADDTASK command port assignments 5-13
connecting workstations 5-7, 5-13, 5-52
initializing from a workstation 5-30
modem connections 5-54
workstation connections 5-7, 5-138, 5-34
SET
batch file usage 6-29
explanation 4-20, 4-84, 4-85
form 4-84
operands 4-84
type 4-5, 4-84
SHELL commandstatement
changing system default 2-26
default value 2-26
explanation 2-26
form. 2-26
operands 2-26
type 2-26, 4-5
user defined commandprocessor 2-26

1-24 MOS-D191
shifting operands 6-21
SIGNOFF
explanation 9-9
form 9-9
type. 4-5, 9-9
SIGNON
batch file usage 6-32, 9-14
explanation 9-10, 9-14
form 9-10
operands 9-10
type 4-5, 9-10
sign on to network emulation (NETBIOS) B-3
single-user
definition 1-11
SLICE command statement
changingfor a partition 5-44
default value 2-27
explanation 2-27, G-6
form 2-27
operands 2-27
time sharing explanation 2-27, 5-8, 5-9
type 4-5
SMPSIZE commandstatement
default value 2-28
explanation 2-28
form 2-28
operands 2-28
type 2-28, 4-5
«SPOOL
dedicated directory 10-11
explanation 10-11 to 10-15
operands 10-11, 10-12
type 4-4, 10-11
spooler hot key 10-15, 10-18
spooler menu 10-19 to 10-21
standard device drivers 2-37
startup batchfile
.ADDTASK command. 5-12, 5-14
print spooler example 10-23, 10-24
security example 9-13, 9-14

MOS-DiSl 1-25
Index

STOP
command form 6-24
explanation 6-24 ss

nested in batchfiles 6-24

type 4-5, 6-24
SunRiver terminal driver 5-35, 5-66
SWITCH command 5-10, 5-20
SYSfile extensions 2-38 to 2-50, 3-3
system administrator
definition 1-12
invoking security 9-2 to 9-22
responsibilities 1-12
security record. 9-4
system memory pool (SMP) 2-28
system monitor 5-68 to 5-70
system prompt 1-13, 4-73 to 4-75

tT

task (see partition)

task ID 5-11, 5-15,.5-18
terminal (also see workstation)
baud rates for communications 5-13
device drivers. supplied with MOS 5-12, 5-13, 5-55
requirements for workstations 5-7, 5-8, 5-55 to 5-57
.TEXT/.ENDTEXT
background screen colors 6-25
color code table 6-27
command form 6-25
explanation 6-25 to 6-28
foreground screen colors 6-25
type 4-5, 6-25
.TIME
batch file usage 6-31
explanation 4-86
form. 4-86
operands 4-86
type 4-5, 4-86
time sharing 2-27
adjusting rate 5-46, 5-47
explanation 5-8, 5-9
time ticks 2-27, 5-8, 5-9

MOS-D191
 -TYPE
explanation 4-88
7, form 4-88
operands 4-88
type 4-5, 4-88
typeover mode 1-13, 6-17

user
default output class 9-6 to 9-8
security records 9-4 to 9-6
user ID
assigning 9-4
displaying file assignments 3-4
SSIGNON command 9-10
USERFILE commandstatement
default value 2-30
explanation 2-30
form 2-30
operands 2-30
type 2-30, 4-5
utility functions
oo, multi-user/multi-tasking 5-9, 5-20, 5-51

-VERIFY
explanation 4-90 to 4-92
form 4-90
operands 4-90
type 4-4, 4-90
VGAvideo card
conflict with FREEMEM 2-19
supported 1-3
video
cards supported 1-3
clearing display (.CLS) 4-19, 6-32
display on terminals 5-56
handling 1-6
screen colors in batchfiles 6-25 to 6-28
type, for memory allocation 2-31 to 2-36

on,

MOS-D191 1-27
VIDPATCH.COM 1-6
virtual disk emulation
$RAMDISK-SYS 1-9, 2-44 oN
Visual mode editing 7-22 to 7-25
Visual mode editing keys 7-24, 7-25
VTYPE command statement 2-31 to 2-36

WwW

warning messages in MOS A-2 to A-6

wildcard characters
in command form conventions 4-8
in file names 3-5, 3-6
workstation
connecting to host computer 5-52, 5-53
definition 1-4, 5-7, 5-8
keyboard differences 5-57
requirements for 5-56
terminal drivers supplied with MOS 5-12, 5-13, 5-55
video display differences 5-57
-WVER
explanation 4-93
form 4-93
operands 4-93
type 4-5, 4-93

MOS-D19I